HD DIGITAL VIDEOCASSETTE RECORDER
HDW-F500
PARALLEL INTERFACE KIT
BKDW-509
HD-SD CONVERTER BOARD
HKDV-501A
HD LINE CONVERTER BOARD
HKDV-502
HD DIGITAL VIDEO CONTROLLER
HKDV-503
SDTI BOARD
HKDV-506A
HD PULL DOWN BOARD
HKDV-507/507D
[ English ]
OPERATION MANUAL
1st Edition (Revised 3)
Serial No. 10101 and Higher
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VORSICHT
Um Feuergefahr und die Gefahr eines
elektrischen Schlages zu vermeiden, darf
das Gerät weder Regen noch Feuchtigkeit
ausgesetzt werden.
Um einen elektrischen Schlag zu
vermeiden, darf das Gehäuse nicht
geöffnet werden. Überlassen Sie
Wartungsarbeiten stets nur qualifiziertem
Fachpersonal.
DIESES GERÄT MUSS GEERDET
WERDEN.
Für Kunden in Europa
Dieses Produkt besitzt die CE-Kennzeichnung und erfüllt
sowohl die EMV-Direktive (89/336/EEC) als auch die
Directive Niederspannung (73/23/EEC) der EG-
Kommission.
Die Erfüllung dieser Direktiven bedeutet Konformität für die
folgenden Europäischen Normen:
• EN60065: Produktsicherheit
• EN55103-1: Elektromagnetische Interferenz (Emission)
• EN55103-2: Elektromagnetische Empfindlichkeit
(Immunität)
Dieses Produkt ist für den Einsatz unter die folgende
elektromagnetische Bedingung ausgelegt:
E4 (kontrollierter EMV-Bereich, z.B. Fernsehstudio).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
1-1 Features ............................................................................................ 1-1
1-1-1 Features of the HDW-F500 .................................................... 1-1
1-1-2 Features of the Control Panel ................................................. 1-3
1-2 Optional Accessories ....................................................................... 1-5
Chapter 1
Overview
2-1 Control Panel ................................................................................... 2-1
2-1-1 Upper Control Panel ............................................................... 2-2
2-1-2 Lower Control Panel (Menu Operations Section) .................. 2-5
2-1-3 Lower Control Panel (Editing Operations Section) ................ 2-7
2-1-4 Lower Control Panel (Tape Transport Operations Section) ... 2-9
2-1-5 Lower Control Panel (Search Operations Section)............... 2-11
2-2 System Set-Up Panel ..................................................................... 2-13
2-3 Connector Panel ............................................................................ 2-14
Chapter 2
Locations and Functions
of Parts and Controls
3-1 Connecting External Equipment ................................................... 3-1
3-1-1 Making Digital Connections................................................... 3-1
3-1-2 Making HD Analog Connections ........................................... 3-2
3-1-3 Making NTSC/PAL Digital Connections ............................... 3-3
3-1-4 Cascade connection ................................................................ 3-4
3-2 Reference Signals for Video Output and Servo System............... 3-5
3-2-1 Reference Signals for Output Video ....................................... 3-5
3-2-2 Reference Signals Connections .............................................. 3-6
3-3 Handling Cassettes .......................................................................... 3-8
3-3-1 Recommended Cassettes ........................................................ 3-8
3-3-2 Inserting and Ejecting Cassettes ............................................. 3-8
3-3-3 Preventing Accidental Erasure ............................................... 3-9
Chapter 3
Setting Up the VTR
4-1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings......................................... 4-1
4-1-1 Menu Configuration ............................................................... 4-1
4-1-2 Changing Menu Settings ........................................................ 4-2
4-1-3 Registering Items to the PF1/2 Menus ................................... 4-3
4-1-4 VTR Memory Bank Function ................................................. 4-4
4-1-5 Memory Card Function .......................................................... 4-6
4-1-6 Adding Titles to the Data...................................................... 4-11
4-1-7 Details on VTR Memory Bank and Memory Card Functions 4-12
4-1-8 Memory Card Data Compatibility ........................................ 4-13
4-2 HOME Menu ................................................................................. 4-14
4-2-1 Selecting the Output Signals(PB/EE) ................................... 4-16
4-2-2 Record Inhibit Mode (REC INH) ......................................... 4-16
4-2-3 Selecting the Edit Mode and Edit Channel
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
(ASSEMBLE or INS CUE) ................................................ 4-17
4-2-4 Preread Settings (PRE READ) ............................................. 4-17
4-2-5 Still-Picture Output (FREEZE) ............................................ 4-17
4-2-6 Selecting the Capstan Servo Lock Mode (CAP LOCK) ...... 4-18
4-2-7 Setting the Preroll Time (PREROLL TIME) ....................... 4-18
4-2-8 Selecting DMC Playback (DMC) ......................................... 4-19
4-2-9 Recalling Edit Points (LAST EDIT) .................................... 4-19
(Continued)
Table of Contents
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
4-3 TC Menu ........................................................................................ 4-20
4-3-1 Setting the Time Data (TIMER SEL/RESET/SET/HOLD) 4-21
4-3-2 Setting the Time Code Reader (TCR SEL) .......................... 4-24
4-3-3 Setting the Time Code Generator (TCG SOURCE/MODE) 4-25
4-3-4 Selecting the Time Code Running Mode (RUN MODE)..... 4-25
4-3-5 Selecting the Drop Frame Mode (DF/NDF) ......................... 4-25
4-3-6 Inserting VITC input source (VITC) .................................... 4-26
4-3-7 Selecting CTL Display Mode (TAPE TIMER) .................... 4-26
4-3-8 Presetting Pull Down Time Code (PDPSET MENU)
Chapter 4
Menu Settings
(when HKDV-507/507D is installed) .................................. 4-26
4-3-9 Presetting for Conversion From 24-frame Into 25-frame Time
Code (TCCONV MENU) .................................................... 4-27
4-3-10 Conversion of Time Code During Playback in 25F Mode
(TC CONV).......................................................................... 4-29
4-3-11 Displaying the Pull Down Time Code
(when HKDV-507/507D is installed) ................................ 4-29
4-3-12 Superimposition of Character Information
(PD CHARA/CHARA SUPER/H-POS/V-POS) ................. 4-30
4-3-13 Setting the VITC Insertion Line (VITC POS-1/POS-2)..... 4-32
4-3-14 Presetting for Conversion From 25-frame Into 24-frame Time
Code (TCCONV MENU) .................................................... 4-33
4-3-15 Conversion of Time Code During Playback in 24F Mode
(TC CONV).......................................................................... 4-34
4-4 CUE Menu ..................................................................................... 4-35
4-4-1 Selecting a Multi-Cue Mode................................................. 4-36
4-4-2 Registering Cue Points ......................................................... 4-36
4-4-3 Erasing Cue Point Data......................................................... 4-38
4-4-4 Prerolling to a Cue Point ...................................................... 4-39
4-4-5 Changing a Cue Point Into an Edit Point.............................. 4-40
4-4-6 Backspace Editing ................................................................ 4-40
4-4-7 TELE FILE Menu................................................................. 4-41
4-5 PF1 Menu (Factory Settings) ....................................................... 4-55
4-5-1 Selecting the Input Video Signal (VIDEO IN) ..................... 4-56
4-5-2 Selecting the Reference Signal (SERVO REF) .................... 4-56
4-5-3 Adjusting the Output Video Signal
(MASTER LEVEL to FINE) ............................................... 4-56
4-6 PF2 Menu (Factory Settings) ....................................................... 4-59
4-6-1 Selecting the Audio Input Signal (A-IN CH-1~CH4) .......... 4-60
4-6-2 Setting Emphasis (EMPHASIS) ........................................... 4-60
4-6-3 Selecting the Monitor Output Signal
(MON-L SEL/MON-R SEL) ............................................... 4-60
4-7 SET UP Menu ................................................................................ 4-61
4-7-1 VTR SETUP Menu............................................................... 4-63
4-7-2 PANEL SETUP Menu .......................................................... 4-65
2
Table of Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1 Preparing for Recording................................................................. 5-1
5-1-1 Setting Switches and Menus ................................................... 5-1
5-1-2 Selecting Audio Signals.......................................................... 5-2
5-1-3 Adjusting the Audio Recording Level .................................... 5-3
5-1-4 Simultaneously Monitoring Playback of Video and Audio
Signals Being Recorded ......................................................... 5-4
5-1-5 Recording Analog Audio ........................................................ 5-4
5-2 Recording ......................................................................................... 5-5
5-3 Preparing for Playback................................................................... 5-6
5-3-1 Setting Switches and Menus ................................................... 5-6
5-3-2 Adjusting the Audio Playback Level ...................................... 5-6
5-3-3 Selecting the HD-SD Conversion Mode
Chapter 5
Recording/Playback
(when HKDV-501A is installed) ........................................... 5-7
5-3-4 Selecting the Conversion Mode of the Effective Scanning Line
Number (when HKDV-502 is installed) ................................ 5-8
5-3-5 Improving the Vertical Resolution during Slow-Motion
Playback (when HKDV-502 is installed)............................... 5-9
5-4 Playback ......................................................................................... 5-11
5-4-1 Normal-Speed Playback ....................................................... 5-11
5-4-2 Variable Speed Playback ...................................................... 5-11
5-4-3 Capstan Override Playback .................................................. 5-14
5-4-4 DMC Playback ..................................................................... 5-14
5-4-5 Playing Back Non-audio Data .............................................. 5-16
5-4-6 Output of Pull Down Signal ................................................. 5-16
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing ................................................................. 6-1
6-1-1 Overview of Automatic Editing ............................................. 6-1
6-1-2 Setting Switches and Menus ................................................... 6-2
6-1-3 Selecting the Edit Mode ......................................................... 6-3
6-1-4 Setting Edit Points .................................................................. 6-3
6-1-5 Editing Non-audio Data .......................................................... 6-7
6-1-6 Confirming Edit Points ........................................................... 6-8
6-1-7 Cuing Up and Prerolling ......................................................... 6-8
6-1-8 Previewing .............................................................................. 6-9
6-1-9 Modifying Edit Points .......................................................... 6-10
6-1-10 Performing Automatic Editing ........................................... 6-12
6-2 Advanced Automatic Editing ....................................................... 6-15
6-2-1 Performing DMC Editing ..................................................... 6-15
6-2-2 Animation Editing ................................................................ 6-17
6-2-3 Performing Preread Editing .................................................. 6-18
6-3 Manual Editing .............................................................................. 6-19
Chapter 6
Editing
Table of Contents
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Maintenance .......................................................................................... A-1
Head Cleaning ................................................................................. A-1
Moisture Condensation ................................................................... A-1
Specifications......................................................................................... A-2
Operation Information Display ........................................................... A-6
Error Messages and Warning Messages ............................................ A-8
Error Messages ................................................................................ A-8
Warning Messages ........................................................................ A-10
Error Log Menu............................................................................. A-11
Glossary ............................................................................................... A-13
Menu List ............................................................................................ A-15
Items Related to the Hours Meter (H01~) ..................................... A-15
Items Related to VTR Operations (001~) ..................................... A-16
Items Related to Operation Panels (101~) .................................... A-20
Items Related to Remote Interface (201~) .................................... A-23
Items Related to Editing (301~) .................................................... A-24
Items Related to Prerolling (401~) ................................................ A-27
Items Related to Recording Protection (501~) .............................. A-28
Items Related to the Time Code (601~) ........................................ A-29
Items Related to the Video Control (701~) ................................... A-34
Items Related to the Audio Control (801~) ................................... A-39
Items Related to Digital Processing (901~) .................................. A-42
Items Related to the Pull Down Control (A01~)........................... A-44
Other Items (T01~)........................................................................ A-46
Index ........................................................................................................ I-1
Table of Functions (Factory Default Settings) ......................... Last page
Appendix
4
Table of Contents
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-1 Features
Bit rate reduction encoder
1-1-1 Features of the HDW-F500
The component video signal data is compressed by a
factor of about four by a process in which it is
subjected to frame shuffling, blocking, DCT (discrete
cosine transform), quantizing adjustment, and variable
length word encoding. This is the core of the newly
developed coefficient recording system.
The HDW-F500 is a HD digital videocassette recorder
using the HDCAM1) format. Comparable to a
conventional digital Betacam in size, weight, and ease-
of-use, the HDW-F500 is a small, lightweight HD
digital VTR using integrated circuit technology.
ECC encoder
The outer ECC (Error Correction Code) is added to the
compressed video and audio data, followed by the
inner ECC, ID data, and sync data. The Reed-
Solomon code is employed in this error correction
system.
HDCAM Format
The HDCAM format was developed from the digital
Betacam format, and retains the same ease of use of
digital Betacam, while yielding high performance HD
digital recording and playback. The HDCAM format
uses the following technologies:
• Pre-filtering and a new coefficient recording system,
compressing the data by a factor of seven.
• Powerful error-correcting codes
• High-performance, high-accuracy heads and drum
with dynamic tracking (DT)™, together with a new
auto-tracking technique, yielding highly reliable
narrow track recording and playback.
Together, these technologies allow 120 minutes of
recording on a (large size) 1/2-inch HDCAM cassette,
the same size as a conventional digital Betacam
cassette.
Channel coding
Video and audio data with the ECC added is recorded
in the form of serial data. The HDCAM format adopts
a scrambled NRZI channel coding system for off-track
and noise characteristics.
Playback signal processing
The playback digital data is equalized by equalizer
circuits and error-corrected by powerful inner and
outer ECC, which can correct most data disturbed by
noise and dropouts in the reproduced signal. Data that
cannot be completely corrected in this way is passed
through a bit reduction decoder and corrected by an
error concealment circuit.
Digital Signal Processing
In an HDCAM VTR, the signal processing takes a
4:2:2 component signal which has been quantized
according to ITU-R709/SMPTE 274M/SMPTE
260M(BTA S-002B) standards, and subjects it to pre-
filter, and then further applies data compression by
using a coefficient recording system. Audio signals
are processed using full bit processing based on the
AES/EBU format.
Output interface
Component video data are converted into serial data
and multiplexed with audio data and time code, then
output in the HD SDI format.
By installing an HD-SD Converter Board (HKDV-
501A; optional accessory), D1 SDI or D2 SDI and
analog composite outputs are also available.
Audio output can be data from the AES/EBU digital
interface or analog audio converted from digital
signals.
Input interface
The input interface is based on the SMPTE 291M/
292M/299M(BTA S-004B/-005B/-006B) /ARIB STD
B-4 HD component SDI(Serial Digital Interface)
format, allowing a single BNC coaxial cable to carry
one component video signal, four digital audio
channels, and time code in time division multiplex;
this is separated for conversion to parallel data.
The interface can be used to record audio data from an
AES/EBU digital interface or digitally converted
analog signals.
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................
1) HDCAM is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
Chapter 1 Overview
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-1 Features
Capstan override function
Advanced Recording and Playback
Functions
You can adjust the playback speed by ±15% to ensure
synchronization between, for example, two VTRs
playing back the same program.
High-quality digital recording
The HDCAM system uses a component system to
record video signals. An AES/EBU format with a wide
dynamic range is used for 4-channel audio recording.
A unique and powerful error correction circuit and
concealment circuit are used in digital signal
processing.
Accurate, stable video signal output is made possible
by setting and adjusting an internal digital video
processor.
Independent level controls
The recording and playback levels of each of the four
audio channels can be adjusted independently while
peak values on all four audio channels are monitored.
Tele-File1) memory label system
The HDW-F500 incorporates the Tele-File memory
label system to allow users to write and update
videocassette management information and cue point
data on optional MLB-1B-100 memory labels,
providing greater efficiency in cassette management
and editing.
8 kinds of record/playback modes
As the record/playback mode, you can select from the
following 8 modes.
59.94i/60i/50i/23.98PsF/24PsF/25PsF/29.97PsF/30PsF
Features for Ease of Operation
HD pull down
By installing an optional HD Pull Down Board
HKDV-507/507D, the HD SDI output (to which the
audio signal and VITC are multiplexed) of 59.94i or
60i mode are also available when the unit is operated
in the 23.98PsF or 24PsF mode.
Compact, lightweight, low power consumption
The VTR is small and light enough to be used in
outside broadcast vans or in EFP (Electronic Field
Production) assignments.
Remote control operation
Noiseless playback with DT heads
The VTR has a serial RS-422A 9-pin connector to allow
control of the VTR by an external control unit through
RS-422A communications.
The VTR also comes with 9-pin REMOTE1-IN(9P) and
OUT(9P) connectors to support bridge connection of
multiple HDW-F500 units or other VTRs equipped with
9-pin remote connectors for simultaneous operation.
Furthermore, by using the optional BKDW-509 Parallel
(50-pin) Interface Kit, you can control the VTR from an
external control unit with a parallel interface.
Using the playback DT heads, you can perform
noiseless playback at 51 speeds ranging from –1 to +2
times normal speed, including still-picture playback.
Video and audio confidence heads
Video and audio (channels 1 through 4) signals can be
recorded and simultaneously played back to check the
recording.
Internal time code generator and reader
The internal time code generator allows you to record
time code (LTC or user bits) together with video and
audio signals. Time codes (LTC or user bits) can be
read during playback using the time code reader.
Digital hours meter
Three different hour displays and one cycle count
display are supported, showing total elapsed time since
the VTR was turned on, total drum revolution time,
total tape running time and total number of threadings
and unthreadings.
Computer servo system
Computer-controlled servo motors provide direct drive
for the drum, capstan, and two reels, enabling quick
and accurate tape access.
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................
1) A contact-free system for writing, reading, and modifying
video cassette-related information on IC memory-bearing
labels. Tele-File is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
1-2
Chapter 1 Overview
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Self-diagnosis
PF1/PF2 (Personal Function) menus
This function allows the VTR to perform self
diagnostics when a malfunction occurs. An error
message is displayed and a history of all errors that
have occurred is recorded.
Use these menus to register up to 40 of the most
frequently used items from the other menus (up to ten
items each can be registered to PF1, ALT+PF1, PF2
and ALT+PF2). Menu items that may be registered can
be displayed by pressing the [F4] (PF1&2 ASSIGN)
button in the SET UP menu.
Easy-to-maintain plug-in boards
The VTR uses plug-in circuit boards to simplify
servicing and inspection.
SET UP menu
• The VTR BANK menu allows up to eight pages of
menu settings to be saved.
Mountable in standard 19-inch rack
The unit can be mounted in an EIA-standard 19-inch
rack.
• Use the MEMORY CARD menu to store current
settings of the VTR and up to 8 pages of the contents
of the VTR memory bank to a memory card.
• Use the scrollable PF1&2 ASSIGN menu to display
the items that can be registered in the PF1/PF2
menus, and to select and register the most frequently
used menu items.
• Use the scrollable VTR SETUP menu to display the
items necessary for making initial settings, and to
directly change settings without registering them with
the function buttons for each menu.
For rack mounting, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
1-1-2 Features of the Control
Panel
The BKDW-515 Control Panel provides six menu
screens corresponding to the six operation modes to
allow fast and easy adjustment of necessary settings, as
well as the ability to store menu settings to a memory
card for later recall.
• Use the PANEL SETUP menu to set control panel
operations, such as the keyboard sound output.
MAINTENANCE menu
Use this menu to access the maintenance functions.
Menu-driven operations for a variety of
purposes
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
Six menus are displayed on the 90 × 72 mm (3 5/8
inches × 2 7/8 inches) screen and are set using the 10
function keys.
A full complement of storage/recall
functions
These functions allow you to use titles to store and
recall menu settings in either the VTR’s internal
memory banks or memory cards.
HOME menu
Use this menu to make the basic settings for recording,
playback, and editing operations, and to select
channels to be edited during insert editing.
VTR memory banks
These memory banks allow you to store up to eight
pages of VTR settings in addition to the current VTR
settings. Factory settings are also stored here,
allowing the VTR to be reset to these values at any
time.
TC menu
Use this menu to make time code settings.
CUE menu
Use this menu to set up to 100 cue points. In page
mode, 10 cue points per page can be set on a total of
10 pages. In TELE FILE menu, you can change the
setting for the memory label system Tele-File.
Memory cards
Each memory card can hold the current VTR settings
as well as up to eight pages of settings. A single
memory card thus allows you to store and recall the
entire contents of the VTR memory banks.
Chapter 1 Overview
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-1 Features
Title function
Display of duration between edit points
The duration between any two of IN, OUT, AUDIO IN,
or AUDIO OUT points can be displayed by
simultaneously pressing two buttons corresponding to
those edit points.
This function allows you to add titles when storing
data to the VTR memory bank or memory card, thus
facilitating data retrieval and management.
Write protect function
Setting pages stored in VTR memory banks or
memory cards can be write protected on an individual
basis.
Digital time counter
The time counter display shows CTL and time codes
(LTC/VITC1)), or user bits data for precise setting of edit
points.
A full range of editing functions
Two HDW-F500 units can be connected allowing
automatic or manual assembly and insertion. The
VTR also features a full range of editing functions,
including preview, review, preroll, and the setting or
changing of edit points.
Quick access to edit points
The following methods are provided for the setting of
edit points:
• Multi-cuing for up to 100 edit points
• Search dial with shuttle and jog functions
• Direct input through numeric buttons
DMC (Dynamic Motion Control) editing
Using the DT® (Dynamic Tracking) heads, you can
play back a section of an edit at speeds between –1 and
+2 times normal speed and store the speed variation in
memory for later use in automatic editing.
Split editing
In insert mode, audio and video edit points can be set
separately.
Preread editing
Video and audio signals that have been pre-read can be
externally processed and simultaneously re-recorded.
A variety of audio editing modes
You can select cut-in editing, cross-fade editing, and
fade in/out editing for the audio signals.
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................
1) LTC (Longitudinal Time Code)
Time code recorded on a longitudinal track
VITC (Vertical Interval Time Code)
Time code recorded on a video track during
the vertical blanking interval
1-4
Chapter 1 Overview
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2 Optional Accessories
HKDV-507/507D HD Pull Down Board
This board allows the output of 2-3 pull down HD
signal of 59.94i or 60i mode when this unit is operated
with the frame frequency of 23.98 or 24 Hz. The 2-3
pull down sequence is as follows.
The following accessories can be used with the HDW-
F500.
BKDW-509 Parallel (50-pin) Interface Kit
A 50-pin parallel interfaces makes the HDW-F500
compatible with different broadcast station systems.
HKDV-501A HD-SD Converter Board
Allows you to output an NTSC/PAL component or
composite signal.
A(f1) A(f2) B(f1) B(f2) C(f1) C(f2) D(f1) D(f2)
A(f1) A(f2) B(f1) B(f2) B(f1) C(f2) C(f1) D(f2) D(f1) D(f2)
HKDV-502 HD Line Converter Board
• Allows you to convert an effective scanning line
number from 1035 to 1080 or from 1080 to 1035.
Note
Note
The 2-3 pull down sequence is guaranteed only when
this VTR is in normal play mode.
This function is operative only when the frame
frequency of the VTR is set to 29.97Hz or 30Hz.
• Allows you to smooth the picture motion and
improve the vertical resolution during slow-motion
playback. Note that this function does not work
when this VTR is operated in PsF mode.
References
In addition to this Operation Manual, the following
manuals are available:
HKDV-503 HD Digital Video Controller
This allows you to remotely control the parameters for
video signals and image enhancement.
• Maintenance Manual Part 1
Provides information necessary for users to maintain
the VTR.
HKDV-506A SDTI Board
This board allows the input and output of special non-
• Maintenance Manual Part 2 (sold separately)
Provides additional information to fully maintain the
HDW-F500. Contains details on electrical
degrading SDTI1) (270Mbps) signals.
adjustments, circuit diagrams, and other items.
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................
1) SDTI (Serial Data Transport Interface)
SDTI is defined as SMPTE-305M.
Chapter 1 Overview
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-1 Control Panel
The control panel consists of the following sections:
• Upper control panel
• Lower control panel: menu operations section,
memory card insertion slot, editing operations
section, tape transport operations section and search
operations section
Upper control panel
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500
Lower control panel
Menu operations section
Memory card
insertion slot
Search operations section
Editing operations section
Tape transport operations section
Control panel
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-1
2-1 Control Panel
2-1-1 Upper Control Panel
1DISPLAY FULL/FINE button
2PHONES jack
3POWER switch
4PHONES level control
5 PB level
controls
6REC level controls 7Audio level meters
8MONITOR SELECT button
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500
9Indicator window
!ºINPUT SELECT button
!¡AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT buttons
!™REFERENCE signal indicators
!£REMOTE buttons and RS-232C indicator
Upper control panel
1 DISPLAY FULL/FINE button
2 PHONES jack
Changes the display range of the audio level meters.
FULL: Display range is –60 to 0 dB (peak level = 0
dB) or –40 to +20 dB (peak level = +20 dB).
Use 814. LEVEL METER SCALE in the VTR
SETUP menu to select the range.
Connects stereo headphones with 8 Ω impedance for
audio monitoring during recording, playback, and
editing. Adjust the headphone output level with the
PHONES level control.
FINE: Displays the audio level in 0.25 dB
increments. The center LED lights up in each
meter as a signal level reference. When the level
exceeds the maximum display value, the top LED
flashes. When the level falls below the minimum
display value, the bottom LED flashes.
3 POWER switch
Turns on the power. When the power is turned on, the
audio level meters and menu display in the lower
control panel light up.
2-2
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 PHONES level control
9 Indicator window
Adjusts the output level to the PHONES jack.
You can enable this control to simultaneously adjust
the output level to the MONITOR OUTPUT
connectors on the connector panel.
The following indicators light up to indicate the VTR’s
status.
Indicators and corresponding VTR status
Indicator
Status
CHANNEL
CONDITION
Indicates the playback signal condition.
Green: Playback signal is good.
Yellow: Playback signal is less than
good, but still reproducible.
For details, see Section 5-1-2, “Selecting Audio Signals” on
page 5-2.
Red: Playback signal is poor. Head
cleaning or internal inspection is
necessary if the indicator lights up
continuously.
5 PB (playback) level controls
Adjust the level of the audio output for channels 1 to 4
and the cue channel.
Pull out the controls during playback to adjust the
audio output for each channel. Push in again for
factory-set levels (+4 dB output for a signal recorded
at a reference level of 0 dB). When pushed in, the
controls cannot adjust the audio output level.
INTERLACE
PsF
Lights when the VTR is operating under
the interlace mode(50i/59.94i/60i).
Lights when the VTR is operating under
the PsF mode(23.98PsF/24PsF/25PsF/
29.97PsF/30PsF).
23.98
24
Lights when the VTR is operating with a
frame frequency of 23.98 Hz.
Lights when the VTR is operating with a
frame frequency of 24 Hz.
6 REC (recording) level controls
Adjust the recording level for channels 1 to 4 and the
cue channel.
Pull out the controls to adjust the recording level for
each channel in E-E mode1). Push in again for the
factory-set recording level (0 dB reference level for an
input of +4 dB). When pushed in, the controls cannot
adjust the recording level.
25
Lights when the VTR is operating with a
frame frequency of 25 Hz.
29.97
30
Lights when the VTR is operating with a
frame frequency of 29.97 Hz.
Lights when the VTR is operating with a
frame frequency of 30 Hz.
Lights when item 821.AUDIO ADVANCE
MODE in the VTR SETUP menu is set to
“on.” When edit preset is set to “ON”, the
HDW-F500 operates internally with “off”
setting, so this indicator lights off.
ADV. AUDIO
7 Audio level meters
Indicate the recording level in recording or E-E mode
or the playback level in playback or CONFI mode.
The display range can be changed by pressing the
DISPLAY FULL/FINE button. The reference level is
factory set at –20 dB, and the peak level at 0 dB.
Formoreinformationabouttheselectionoftheframe
frequency,refertothesuppliedMaintenanceManual.
8 MONITOR SELECT button
Selects the audio signal to be output at the MONITOR
OUTPUT L/R connector(s). Press to light the button
up, then press the AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR
SELECT button(s) to specify which channel(s) are to
be monitored at the MONITOR OUTPUT L or R
connector. If you specify more than one channel to the
same MONITOR OUTPUT connector, a mixed audio
signal is output from that connector. This specification
can also be done with setting the VTR SETUP menu
807~808 AUDIO MONITOR L~R select .
Fordetails,seeSection4-6-3,“SelectingtheMonitor
OutputSignal(MON-LSEL/MON-RSEL)”onpage4-58.
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................
1) E-E mode
An abbreviation for Electric-to-Electric mode. In this
mode, video or audio input signals are passed and output
only through the VTR’s internal circuitry, and not
through the magnetic conversion system comprising tape
and heads.
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-3
2-1 Control Panel
!º INPUT SELECT button
!™ REF SYNC (reference signal) indicators
These indicate the signal selected as the reference
signal. If there is no reference signal input to the
selected connector, the STOP button flashes.
EXT SD: Is lit when the video signal input to the
REF. IN SD connector is acting as the reference
signal.
EXT HD: Is lit when the video signal input to the
REF. IN HD connector is acting as the reference
signal.
Selects the type and channel for the audio input signal.
Press to light the button up, then press one of the
AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT buttons to select
the type and the channel of the audio signal.
HD SDI (CH-1 to CH-4): Selects the input signal
from the HD SDI INPUT or SDTI (OPTION) IN
connector.
AES/EBU (CH-1 to CH-4): Selects signal input to
the AUDIO INPUT (AES/EBU) connectors.
ANALOG (CH-1 to CH-4): Selects signal input to
the AUDIO INPUT connectors.
The INPUT SELECT button will flash if there is no
incoming signal and HD SDI or AES/EBU is selected.
This setting can also be done with setting the VTR
SETUP menu 802~805 AUDIO INPUT select
CH1~CH4.
INPUT VIDEO: Is lit when the video signal input to
the HD SDI INPUT or SDTI (OPTION) IN
connector is acting as the reference signal.
!£ REMOTE buttons and RS-232C indicator
Press these buttons to select external equipment to be
used to remotely control the VTR.
1(9 pin): Press to select the unit connected to the
REMOTE1-IN(9P)/OUT (9P) connectors. The
button lights up.
2(50 pin): Press to select the unit connected to the
PARALLEL I/O (50P) connector (with optional
BKDW-509). The button lights up.
RS-232C indicator: Lights up when the VTR is
communicating with the external equipment
connected to the RS-232C connector.
Notes
• When the signal input to the SDTI (OPTION) IN
connector is selected for the input video signal, the
signal input to the SDTI (OPTION) IN connector is
automatically selected for the input audio signal as
well.
• When the audio signal input to the SDTI (OPTION)
IN connector is selected for the input audio signal,
only the INPUT SELECT button lights.
Note
Fordetails,referto“4-6-1SelectingtheAudioInput
Signal” on page 4-58.
When the VTR is being controlled by external
equipment connected to the REMOTE1-IN (9P) or
PARALLEL I/O (50P) connector, all tape transport
buttons and edit operation buttons are disabled, except
the STOP and EJECT buttons. You may also specify
the disabling or enabling of all buttons by setting
008.LOCAL FUNCTION ENABLE in the VTR
SETUP menu.
!¡ AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT buttons
Select the audio input signal when the INPUT
SELECT button is lit, or the audio signal to be
monitored when the MONITOR SELECT button is lit.
2-4
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-1-2 Lower Control Panel (Menu Operations Section)
1Menu display
3MEMORY CARD indicator
2Menu buttons
4ACCESS button
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500
5Memory card insertion slot
6Function buttons
7ALT button
8MAINTENANCE switch
9ALARM indicator
Lower control panel (menu operations section)
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-5
2-1 Control Panel
1 Menu display
5 Memory card insertion slot
Menus selected by pressing the menu buttons appear
here.
Each menu shows the functions assigned to each
function button ([F1] to [F10]) and information
necessary for making settings, such as time codes.
Insert memory cards here. VTR settings can be stored
on cards and used to configure the VTR and control
panel at a later date, thus reducing the time required
for set up.
Press the button beside the insertion slot to eject the
memory card.
2 Menu buttons
6 Function buttons
Press to activate the respective menu.
HOME button: Activates the HOME menu.
Settings for basic or editing operations are made
in the HOME menu.
Activates the functions in each menu.
7 ALT (alternative) button
TC button: Activates the TC (time code) menu. In
the TC menu, you can switch between LTC and
VITC and between DF and NDF, and make
settings for time code displays on an external
monitor.
CUE button: Activates the CUE menu. In the CUE
menu, you can register 10 cue points per page for
a total of 100 cue points.
Press to change the functions of the current menu.
Press again to return to the original functions.
8 MAINTENANCE switch
Activates the MAINTENANCE menu.
To operate this switch, push it in using the tip of a pen
or some other pointed object while holding down the
SFT button.
PF1 button: Activates the PF (Personal Function) 1
menu. In the PF1 menu, you can register
frequently used settings in other menus. Settings
for video input/output signals are factory set.
PF2 button: Activates the PF (Personal Function) 2
menu. In the PF2 menu, you can register
frequently used settings in other menus. Settings
for audio input/output signals are factory set.
SET UP button: Activates the SET UP menu. Use
the SET UP menu to restore settings to the VTR
memory banks or IC memory card, register
functions to the PF1/2 menus, and set items in the
VTR SETUP menu.
9 ALARM indicator
Flashes when the communication between the VTR
and the control panel is abnormal.
For details, see Chapter 4, “Menu Settings” on page 4-1.
3 MEMORY CARD indicator
Lights up when the memory card is inserted.
The indicator will flash when the memory card is
improperly inserted or when the memory card battery
is dead.
4 ACCESS button
Press this button to directly activate the MEMORY
CARD menu. Flashes when the control panel is
accessing the memory card.
Note
Do not eject the memory card while the ACCESS
button is flashing as this may damage the contents of
the memory card.
2-6
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-1-3 Lower Control Panel (Editing Operations Section)
!ºNumeric buttons and +/– buttons
!¡SFT button
!™RCL button
!£CLR button
!¢SET button
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500
@™PREREAD indicator
@¡PLAYER/RECORDER buttons
@ºINPUT CHECK button
!ªAUTO button
!∞AUDIO IN/OUT buttons
!§IN/OUT buttons
!¶ENTRY button
!•Cursor control buttons
Lower control panel (editing operations section)
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-7
2-1 Control Panel
!º Numeric buttons and +/– buttons
!ª AUTO button
Press to input time data or edit points data at the cursor
position in menu display. Press buttons 0 to 5 while
holding down the SFT button to input A to F
(hexadecimal figures) for user bits. Use the +/–
buttons to increase or decrease settings.
When this button is pressed, it lights up and auto edit
mode is activated.
@º INPUT CHECK button
While you hold down this button, the input signal is
output from the monitor output connector, so that you
can monitor the input video and audio.
!¡ SFT (shift) button
Press buttons 0 to 5 while holding down this button to
input A to F (hexadecimal figures) for user bits.
Use also in combination with other buttons to perform
other operations.
When the LTC/VITC time code is shown on the
display, you can check the time code generator.
Note
When the optional HKDV-501A HD-SD Converter
Board is installed in the unit and VTR SETUP menu
item 776 DOWNCONVERTER INPUT CHECK
ENABLE is set to “enable”, you can monitor
downconverter output. When you press the INPUT
CHECK button, the input video and audio is output
from all HD-SD converter output connectors.
!™ RCL (recall) button
Press to call up a previously entered value.
!£ CLR (clear) button
Press to clear input data.
!¢ SET button
@¡ PLAYER/RECORDER buttons
Press to finalize data.
Select which VTR is to be controlled by this VTR’s
control panel during editing when this VTR is used as
a recorder and an external VTR is connected to the
REMOTE1-IN(9P)/OUT(9P) connectors as a player.
PLAYER: The tape transport buttons and editing
operation buttons on the control panel control the
external player VTR.
!∞ AUDIO IN/OUT buttons
Press to set AUDIO IN and OUT points during insert
mode. Press either AUDIO IN or OUT button while
holding down the ENTRY button to set an audio edit
point.
RECORDER: The tape transport buttons and
editing operation buttons on the control panel
control the recorder VTR (this VTR).
The PLAYER/RECORDER buttons have no effect
when using this VTR alone.
!§ IN/OUT buttons
Press to set an IN or OUT point during editing. Press
either button while holding down the ENTRY button
to set an edit point.
!¶ ENTRY button
@™ PREREAD indicator
Press to enter an edit or cue point.
Lights up during preread mode.
While holding down this button, press either the
AUDIO IN or OUT button, or the IN or OUT button.
FormoreinformationaboutPREREAD,see“6-2-3
PerformingPrereadEditing”onpage6-18.
!• Cursor control buttons
Press to move the cursor in the menu display. Move
the cursor as required to enter a value using the
numeric buttons, or to change a menu setting.
2-8
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-1-4 Lower Control Panel (Tape Transport Operations Section)
@£STANDBY button
@¢EJECT button
@∞PREROLL button
@§PREVIEW/REVIEW button
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500
@¶SERVO indicator
@•STOP button
@ªPLAY button
#ºREC/EDIT button
#¡REC INHIBIT indicator
Lower control panel (tape transport operations section)
@£ STANDBY button
@¢ EJECT button
Press this button in other than standby mode to make
it light up and place the VTR in standby mode. The
head drum rotates in standby mode, thereby
shortening the time required for the tape to start.
Press this button while in standby mode to turn the
button off and cancel standby mode. The head drum
stops rotating and the tape tension is released. If the
VTR remains in standby mode for more than eight
minutes (factory setting), standby mode is
Press to eject the cassette. When the button is pressed,
the tape is automatically unthreaded and the cassette is
ejected in a few seconds. Resets the display when CTL
codes appear in the menu display in the lower control
panel.
automatically canceled in order to safeguard the tape.
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-9
2-1 Control Panel
@∞ PREROLL button
@ª PLAY button
Press to position the tape to the preroll point (a
position factory set to five seconds before the IN
point).
Starts playback.
Press this button while holding down the REC button
to start recording.
Press this button while holding down the IN, OUT,
AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT button to cue up the tape
at the edit point of the respective button.
Pressing this button during recording or manual editing
changes the VTR to playback mode.
#º REC/EDIT (recording/edit) button
Press this button while holding down the PLAY button
to start recording.
Fordetailsonchangingtheprerolltime, referto“4-2-7
SettingthePrerollTime(PREROLLTIME)”onpage4-18.
If you press this button in play mode manual editing
begins. After setting edit points, if you press this
button while the AUTO button is lit, automatic editing
is performed.
@§ PREVIEW/REVIEW button
After edit points are set, press this button to preview,
on the monitor connected to the recorder, the effect of
the edit before it is performed. In this operation, the
tape runs, but no editing is carried out.
If you press this button after carrying out an edit, the
results of the edit are played back on the monitor
connected to the recorder.
#¡ REC INHIBIT indicator
The status of this indicator depends on the setting of
the ALT button and [F2] (REC INH) button in the
HOME menu and the state of the record-protect plug
on the cassette.
@¶ SERVO indicator
Lights up when the drum servo and capstan servo are
locked.
Status of the REC INHIBIT indicator
Setting of the ALT State of the record- REC INHIBIT
and [F2] (REC INH) protect plug on the indicator
buttons in the
HOME menu
cassette
@• STOP button
When you insert the cassette, the VTR automatically
enters stop mode.
all
Recording disabled
Recording allowed
Recording disabled
Recording allowed
Recording disabled
Recording allowed
Lit/flashinga)
Lit
Lit/flashinga)
The STOP button flashes when the [F2] (SERVO REF)
button in the PF1 menu is set to input but there is no
video input signal, when the [F2] (SERVO REF)
button in the PF1 menu is set to ext but there is no
external reference video signal, or when the input
signal is out of sync with the external reference video
signal. If you want, you can set 102. REFERENCE
SYSTEM ALARM in the VTR SETUP menu so that
the STOP button will not flash under the above
conditions.
crash REC, video/
CTL, audio/CTL
Unlit
off
Lit/flashinga)
Unlita)
a) Toggle between lit/flashing settings is possible using the
104.REC INHIBIT LAMP FLASHING setting in the
VTR SETUP menu.
Recording, editing, and selection of assemble and
insert modes are possible only when the indicator is
off.
2-10
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-1-5 Lower Control Panel (Search Operations Section)
#™ VAR button
#£ JOG button
#¢ SHUTTLE button
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500
#∞ Search dial
Lower control panel (search operations section)
#™ VAR button
#¢ SHUTTLE button
Press to select variable speed playback mode for
noiseless playback in a maximum range of –1 to +2
times normal playback speed, in 51 steps. Playback
exceeding this speed range is not possible. The search
dial clicks at the positions for still-picture and normal
playback speed.
Press to enter shuttle mode. In this mode, the button
lights and playback corresponding to the angle of
rotation of the search dial. The playback speed is
different depending on the frame frequency of the unit.
In this mode, the search dial clicks at the positions for
0 (still-picture), –10 and +10 times normal playback
speed.
#£ JOG button
Frame frequency Playback speed
Press to select jog mode. In this mode, the button
lights up and playback at –1 to +1 or –2 to +2 times
normal playback speed is possible (determined by the
107. JOG DIAL RESPONSE setting in the VTR
SETUP menu). In this mode, the search dial does not
click.
23.98/24 Hz
25 Hz
Ranging from –60 to +60
Ranging from –58 to +58
Ranging from –50 to +50
29.97/30 Hz
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-11
2-1 Control Panel
#∞ Search dial
Rotate to search for edit points. Rotate the dial
clockwise for forward playback (the z indicator lights
up) or counterclockwise for reverse playback (the Z
indicator lights up). The p indicator lights up while
the VTR is in stop mode.
Shuttle mode: The playback speed is different
depending on the frame frequency of the unit. (See
item #¢SHUTTLE button.) The dial clicks at the
positions corresponding to 0 (still-picture), –10
and +10 times normal playback speed.
Jog mode: The playback speed corresponds to the
rotational speed of the dial (–1 to +1 or –2 to +2
times normal playback speed depending on the
107.JOG DIAL RESPONSE setting in the VTR
SETUP menu). The dial does not click.
Variable speed playback mode: Noiseless playback
at –1 times normal speed when the dial is rotated
fully counterclockwise, and +2 times normal
speed when rotated clockwise. The dial clicks at
the positions of still-picture and normal playback
speed.
Capstan override mode: Rotating the dial while
holding down the PLAY button changes the
playback speed by up to ±15%.
After turning the power on, always set the search dial
at the center position (where the p indicator lights up).
2-12
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-2 System Set-Up Panel
Lift the lower control panel up to its horizontal
position to access the system set-up panel.
Lower control panel
Accessing the system set-up panel
CONTROL PANEL
EXT
INT
CONTROL PANEL switch
Selects which control panel controls this VTR.
INT: Control is by the control panel attached to
this VTR.
EXT: Control is remote, by connection to the
CONTROL PANEL connector on the rear
panel.
The switch is factory-set to INT.
System set-up panel
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-13
2-3 Connector Panel
1 D CONV. OUT (OPTION) COMPOSITE
(SUPER) connector
7 AUDIO INPUT (AES/EBU)
connectors
2 D CONV. OUT (OPTION) SYNC connector
8 AUDIO OUTPUT (AES/EBU)
connectors
3 REF. IN SD connectors and 75 Ω
9 HD SDI INPUT connectors
termination switch
4 REF. IN HD connectors and 75 Ω
!º HD SDI OUTPUT connectors
termination switch
5 BREAKER button
!¡ SDTI (OPTION) IN connector
6 ⁄AC IN connector and
ground connector
!™ SDTI (OPTION) OUT
connector
!ª VIDEO CONTROL
connector
!£ AUDIO INPUT LEVEL/
600Ω termination switches
!¢ AUDIO INPUT connectors
@º RS-232C connector
!∞ AUDIO OUTPUT connectors
@¡ PARALLEL I/O (50P) connector
!§ CONTROL PANEL connector
@™ D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION)
connectors
!¶ REMOTE1-IN(9P)/OUT(9P) connectors
@£ PULL DOWN OUT (OPTION)
connector
!• MONITOR OUTPUT connectors
@¢ TIME CODE OUT connector
@∞ TIME CODE IN connector
Connector panel
connectors, the type (male or female) of input/output
connectors used overseas are opposite of those used in
Japan. To use this unit with audio equipment outside
of Japan, you must use male/female adapters.
Note
For the AUDIO INPUT CH1/2/3/4 CUE connectors,
AUDIO OUTPUT CH1/2/3/4/CUE connectors, as well
as the TIME CODE IN/OUT (XLR, 3 pins)
2-14
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 D CONV. OUT (OPTION) COMPOSITE
(SUPER) connector (BNC)
Outputs an analog composite signal for a video
monitor. When the ALT/[F6] (CHARA SUPER)
setting in the TC menu is on, character signals such as
time codes are superimposed on the output.
7 AUDIO INPUT (AES/EBU) connectors (BNC)
Inputs for digital signals in AES/EBU format for
channels 1 to 4.
8 AUDIO OUTPUT (AES/EBU)connectors (BNC)
Outputs digital signals in AES/EBU format for
channels 1 through 4.
Note
This connector is operative only when the optional
HKDV-501A HD-SD Converter Board is installed.
9 HD SDI (SDI video/audio) INPUT connectors
(BNC)
The left connector accepts HD SDI video/audio
signals.
2 D CONV. OUT (OPTION) SYNC connector
(BNC)
Outputs an NTSC external sync signal.
Note
The INPUT MONITOR connector is for use with an
input monitor and does not follow the standards for
output.
Notes
• This is effective only when the optional HKDV-501A
HD-SD Converter Board is installed.
• The phase is the same as the phase of the composite
signal output from the COMPOSITE (SUPER) of D
CONV. OUT (OPTION) connector. Because the
output phase changes with the operation mode of the
VTR, use this to synchronize with the video monitor.
!º HD SDI (SDI video/audio) OUTPUT connectors
(BNC)
Outputs up to four (1 to 4) HD SDI video/audio signal
lines.
Character data such as time codes are superimposed on
the signal from the MONITOR connector when the
ALT/[F6] (CHARA SUPER) setting in the TC menu is
set.
3 REF. IN SD connectors (BNC) and 75 Ω
termination switch
Inputs for a reference video signal (NTSC or PAL) of
the selected field frequency. Use a video signal with
chroma burst (VBS) or a monochrome video signal
(VS).
A loop-through connection is possible. Set the 75 Ω
termination switch to OFF if you are using a loop-
through connection and set it to ON if you are not
using a loop-through connection.
!¡ SDTI (OPTION) IN connector (BNC)
Outputs a video/audio SDTI signal.
Note
This connector is operative only when the optional
HKDV-506A SDTI Board is installed.
!™ SDTI (OPTION) OUT connector (BNC)
4 REF. IN HD connectors (BNC) and 75 Ω
termination switch
Inputs a video/audio SDTI signal.
Note
Inputs for a reference video signal (HD) of the selected
field frequency. Use a trilevel SYNC signal for the
external synchronization. A loop-through connection
is possible. Set the 75 Ω termination switch to OFF if
you are using a loop-through connection and set it to
ON if you are not using a loop-through connection.
This connector is operative only when the optional
HKDV-506A SDTI Board is installed.
5 BREAKER button
Primary circuit breaker for the AC power circuit.
6 ⁄AC IN connector and connector
Connects to an AC outlet using the power cord
supplied with the VTR.
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-15
2-3 Connector Panel
!£ AUDIO INPUT LEVEL/600Ω termination
switches
!• MONITOR OUTPUT connectors (XLR-3-31)
Outputs signals for audio monitoring. These
connectors output two signal lines: L and R. Select
the signals to be output with the MONITOR SELECT
buttons and the AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT
buttons on the upper control panel. A setting can be
made so that volume can be controlled with the
PHONES volume knob.
The termination switches should be set for in
ANALOG AUDIO INPUT connector according to the
audio input level and input impedance.
Use OFF for low input levels when:
Audio input level is –60 dBu (microphone input)
and audio input impedance is high (approximately
20 kΩ)
Use OFF for high input levels when:
Audio input level is +4 dBu (line input) and audio
input impedance is high (approximately 20 kΩ)
Use ON for high input levels when:
Audio input level is +4 dBm (line input) and audio
input impedance is 600Ω
For details, see Section 5-1-2, “Selecting Audio Signals”on
page 5-2.
!ª VIDEO CONTROL (Digital Video Processor
Control) connector (D-sub 9-pin)
Connects to the optional HKDV-503 HD Digital Video
Controller to enable remote control of the internal
digital video processor. Turn off the power before
connecting the remote controller.
!¢ ANALOG AUDIO INPUT connectors
(XLR-3-32)
Accepts up to five analog audio signal lines (channels
1 to 4 and cue).
@º RS-232C connector (RS-232C serial interface)
(D-sub 25-pin)
Receives or transmits RS-232C serial remote control
signals and/or VTR status data from/to external
equipment. When this connector is being used for
communication, the RS-232C indicator on the upper
control panel will be lit.
!∞ ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT connectors
(XLR-3-31)
Outputs up to five analog audio signal lines (channels
1 to 4 and cue).
!§ CONTROL PANEL connector (15-pin)
Connects the control panel through the 15-pin cable
when using the control panel is used as a remote
controller.
@¡ PARALLEL I/O (50P) connector (D-sub 50-pin,
with optional BKDW-509)
Inputs an external remote control signal.
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
!¶ REMOTE1-IN (9P)/OUT (9P) connectors
(D-sub 9-pin)
@™ D CONV. SDI (D1/D2 SDI video/audio)
(OPTION) OUT connectors (BNC)
Used with the included 9pin remote control cable to
connect two HDW-F500 VTRs, or a second HD VTR
when a BVE900/910/2000/9000/9100 series BVE
Editing Control Unit is used for editing. Used when
you edit using two VTRs and the BVE-900/910/2000/
9000/9100 Editing Control Unit. The REMOTE1-IN
and OUT connectors can be used to make a bridge
connection.
Outputs up to three sets of video/audio signals. When
the ALT/[F8] (CHARA SUPER) key of the TC menu
is set to ON, text data such as time codes are
superimposed on the output of connector 3 (SUPER).
Selection of D1/D2 output is made using the [F9]
(OTHERS CHECK)/[F9] (SYSTEM)/[F3] (D-CONV
SDI) button in the MAINTENANCE menu.
Note
This connector is operative only when the optional
HKDV-501A HD-SD Converter Board is installed.
2-16
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
@£ PULL DOWN OUT (OPTION) connectors
(BNC)
Outputs two sets of 2-3 pull down video/audio signals.
When the ALT/[F5] (PD CHARA) key of the TC
menu is set to ON, text data such as time codes are
superimposed.
Note
This connector is operative only when the optional
HKDV-507/507D HD PULL DOWN Board is
installed.
@¢ TIME CODE OUT connector (XLR-3-31)
Outputs the following time codes according to the
VTR operation mode.
In playback mode: Playback time codes
In recording mode: Time codes generated by the
internal time code generator, or time codes input
to the TIME CODE IN connector.
To select the output signal for the TIME CODE OUT
connector, use the 613.TC OUTPUT SIGNAL IN
REGEN MODE setting in the VTR SETUP menu.
Setting
Description
off tape
In playback mode, playback time codes are
selected, and in recording mode, TCH time
code signals are used.
regene
through
Playback time codes are regenerated and
output only in playback mode when the servo
is locked. In all other cases, output is the
same as for the “off tape” setting.
The time code signal from the TIME CODE
IN connector is output as is. (Used during
cascade connections.)
(For more information about cascade
connections, see 3-1-4 Cascade
Connections on page 3-4.)
@∞ TIME CODE IN connector (XLR-3-32)
Accepts external time codes for recording to tape.
Connect to the time code output connector of the
external equipment.
Chapter 2 Locations and Functions of Parts and Controls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-1 Connecting External Equipment
3-1-1 Making Digital Connections
This example shows how to connect the HDD/HDDP-
1000 1 inch HD Digital VTR and use it as the player
with the HDW-F500 acting as the recorder in the
59.94i or 60i mode.
REMOTE (9Pin)
HDD/HDDP-1000
50 PIN PARALLEL
DIGITAL VIDEO
OUTPUT
DIGITAL AUDIO
CH-1/2
XLR/BNC
Converter
CH-3/4
P/S Converter
HD SDI OUTPUT
HD SDI OUTPUT
REMOTE 1-IN (9P)
Video monitor
(HD serial monitor)
Making digital connections
Refer to the “Specifications” section in the appendix (page
A-2) for recommended XLR/BNC and P/S converters.
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-1 Connecting External Equipment
3-1-2 Making HD Analog Connections
This example shows how to connect the VTR when
using HD analog audio and video signals in the 60i
mode.
HDV-10 1/2 inch VTR
REMOTE (9P)
or other player
ANALOG VIDEO
OUTPUT
ANALOG AUDIO
OUTPUT CH-1 to 4
HKPF-101 A/D
Converter
HD SDI OUTPUT
HD SDI OUTPUT
HKPF-102 D/A
Converter
ANALOG VIDEO
OUTPUT
REMOTE 1-IN (9P)
Set the analog audio input level and
impedance using the AUDIO INPUT
LEVEL/600Ω termination switches as
follows:
For line input with a 600Ω termination:
HIGH and ON
For high-impedance line input: HIGH
and OFF
For high-impedance microphone input:
LOW and OFF
Video monitor (HD
monitor)
3-2
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-1-3 Making NTSC/PAL Digital Connections
This example shows how to connect two VTRs
together, using an HDW-F500 as the players and a
DVR-2100 D-1 Component Digital VTR as the
recorder.
HDW-F500 (Player)
[Input]
D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION)
(D1 SDI)
REMOTE 1-IN
COMPOSITE
9 pin remote cable
VIDEO OUTPUT
SDI INPUT
REMOTE-1
[output]
Video monitor
(NTSC/PAL monitor)
DVR-2100 (Recorder)
Note
For color frame editing using the HDW-F500 as the
player and an NTSC/PAL digital device as the
recorder, set 005.SERVO/AV REFERENCE select in
the VTR SETUP menu to external and set
006.EXTERNAL REFERENCE select to extern SD.
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-1 Connecting External Equipment
3-1-4 Cascade connection
This example shows how to connect multiple HDW-F500 VTRs together for simultaneous recording.
HDW-F500 (Player)
HD SDI OUTPUT
TIME CODE OUT
HDW-F500 (Recorder)
TIME CODE IN
HD SDI INPUT
Digital video
distributor
HKPF-103M
TIME CODE OUT
Video monitor(HD serial
monitor)
HDW-F500 (Recorder)
HD SDI INPUT
SIGNAL IN REGENE MODE in the VTR SETUP
menu to through.
Note
On the recording VTRs, set 613.TC OUTPUT
3-4
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2 Reference Signals for Video Output and Servo
System
This section describes how reference signals for the
video output and servo system are selected.
3-2-1 Reference Signals for Output Video
Depending on the operating condition, VTR SETUP
menu setting, and the input signal, the video output
signal from the VTR can be synchronized as follows.
Start
What is
the 005.SERVO/AV
input
ext
REFERENCE select setting
in the VTR SETUP
menu?
auto
Is the VTR currently
recording or is EDIT
PRESENT on?
Yes
No
What is the 006.
EXTERNAL REFERENCE
select setting in the VTR
SETUP menu?
extrn SD
extrn HD
Is there an input
signal on the connector
selected by the 701.VIDEO
INPUT select setting
in the VTR
Is there a signal of the
correct frequency on the
REF. IN SD connector?
Is there a signal of the
correct frequency on the
REF. IN HD connector?
Yes
Yes
Yes
SETUP?
No
No
No
Synchronization
with the video
signal input
designated by the
701.VIDEO INPUT
select setting
Synchronization
Synchronization
with the reference
video signal input
to the REF. IN HD
connector
with the video
signal input to the
REF. IN SD
connector
No external synchronization (synchronization is internal)
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2 Reference Signals for Video Output and Servo System
3-2-2 Reference Signals Connections
Make the reference signal connections as follows,
according to your recording or playback requirements.
Reference signal connections
For recording signals from a switcher or signal generator
Reference signal
Switcher or signal generator
REF. IN
HD SDI INPUT
75Ω termination switch: ON
For recording signals from a switcher or signal generator
For recording signals from a HD VTR
Reference signal
REF. IN
HD SDI INPUT
HD SDI OUTPUT
HDW-F500 (Recorder)
75Ω termination switch: OFF
HDW-F500 (Player)
75Ω termination switch: ON
For recording signals from a HD VTR
3-6
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For playback
Reference signal
REF. IN
HD SDI OUTPUT
1/2/3/MONITOR
HD serial input monitor
75Ω termination switch: ON
Note
The following signals can be used as a reference
signal.
• HD trilevel SYNC signal of an appropriate field
frequency for the external synchronization
• Black burst signal of 525/59.94 Hz
• Black burst signal of 625/50 Hz
Input the signal of the appropriate field frequency for
your system.
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-3 Handling Cassettes
3-3-1 Recommended Cassettes
3-3-2 Inserting and Ejecting
Cassettes
Use 1/2 inch HDCAM cassettes.
The maximum recording time is as shown in the
following table.
Always turn on the VTR before attempting to insert or
eject cassettes.
System
frequency
HDCAM
cassette
29.97/30 Hz
25 Hz
23.98/24 Hz
Inserting a cassette
S-size cassette
40 minutes 48 minutes 50 minutes
124 minutes 149 minutes 155 minutes
L-size cassette
1
Note
Digital Betacam cassettes cannot be used.
2
S-size cassette
Storage of cassettes
Store your cassettes at room temperature and normal
humidity.
L-size cassette
Inserting a cassette
1 Turn the POWER switch to ON.
2 Before inserting a cassette, check the following
points:
• There is no slack in the tape.
• An error message does not appear in the menu
display.
• The window of the cassette is facing up.
If there is any slack in the tape, refer to “Removing
slack in the tape” on next page.
When inserting an S-size cassette, make sure it is
aligned with the marks on the cassette insertion
slot.
The cassette is loaded automatically, and the tape is
wound around the drum.
3-8
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing slack in the tape
Press one of the reels in slightly, then carefully rotate it
in the direction of the arrow until it stops.
3-3-3 Preventing Accidental
Erasure
To prevent accidental erasure of material recorded on a
tape, push in the record-protect plug.
L-size cassette
S-size cassette
Removing slack in the tape
Preventing double cassette inserting
When a cassette is loaded, an orange lock-out bar
appears in the cassette insertion slot to prevent users
from attempting to load another cassette.
Push in the record-protect plug.
To restore the tape for recording, return the plug to its
original position.
Preventing accidental erasure
Ejecting the cassette
When a cassette with this plug pushed in is inserted
into the VTR, the REC INHIBIT indicator on the
lower control panel lights up and recording will not
start, even if you press the REC button.
To restore the tape for recording, return the plug to its
original position.
Press the EJECT button.
The tape is unthreaded and the cassette is
automatically ejected. This operation takes a few
seconds.
To cancel ejecting a cassette
Press any operation button before the cassette is
completely ejected. The cassette is loaded again and
the operation corresponding to the button you pressed
starts.
Chapter 3 Setting Up the VTR
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings
The operating conditions of the VTR are set using the
menu operation section on the lower control panel.
4-1-1 Menu Configuration
Menu items are divided among six different menus
(HOME, TC, CUE, PF1, PF2, SET UP).
This VTR has two kinds of menus.
Of these menus, the PF1/PF2 (Personal Function)
PF1&2 ASSIGN menu
menus can be used to register frequently used menu
This menu contains items that can be registered to the
items from the other menus, allowing faster setting of
PF1/2 menus.
VTR operating conditions. Eight VTR memory banks
Press the [F4] (PF1&2 ASSIGN) button in the SET UP
are provided for storing up to eight sets of menu
menu to display this menu.
settings. The contents of the eight VTR memory
banks can, in turn, be stored on a memory card for
later recall.
For details on registering items in the PF1&2 ASSIGN
menu to the PF1/2 menus, see Section 4-1-3, “Registering
Items to the PF1/2 Menus” on page 4-3.
VTR SETUP menu
This menu contains items that specify the initial
operating conditions of the VTR. You can change
these settings directly without registering the items to
the PF1/2 menus.
Press the [F6] (VTR SETUP) button in the SET UP
menu to display this menu.
For details on setting operating conditions of the VTR, see
Section 4-7-1, “VTR SETUP Menu” on page 4-61.
The menu configuration of the VTR is shown in the
figure below,
HOME menu
PF1&2
ASSIGN menu
TC menu
PF1 menu
PF2 menu
Registration
VTR SETUP
menu
CUE menu
SETUP menu
[F4] (PF1&2 ASSIGN) button
[F6] (VTR SETUP) button
Menu configuration
• All items in the HOME, TC, and CUE menus can be
duplicated and registered to the PF1/2 menus.
• Most items in the VTR SETUP menu can be
registered to the PF1/2 menus.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings
2 Press the ALT button.
4-1-2 Changing Menu Settings
The second page of the HOME menu appears in
the display.
To activate the HOME, TC, CUE, PF1, PF2, or SET
UP menu, press the respective menu button.
Menu items are assigned to function buttons ([F1] to
[F10]) in each menu. When two items are registered to
the same function button, you can display the second
item by pressing the ALT button.
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min GREEN
ÅLT+HOME
PRE
READ
off
PLÅY
LOCK
NDF 2FD F1
TCR
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00
IN 00:01:10:00 OUT 00:02:10:00
FREEZE
The example below describes the procedure for
changing the setting specified by the ALT button and
[F5] (CAP LOCK) button in the HOME menu.
CÅP
PRE-
ROLL
STOP
CODE
LÅST
DMC
LOCK
EDIT
2FD
5sec
off
1
To return to the first page
Press the ALT button again.
3 Press the [F5] (CAP LOCK) button to change the
capstan servo lock mode setting.
Each time the button is pressed, the setting
changes.
23
Changing menu settings
Changing menu settings using the cursor
control buttons
1 Press the HOME button.
The first page of the HOME menu appears in the
display.
You may also use the cursor control buttons to select
menu items and change menu settings by moving the
on-screen cursor.
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min GREEN
HOME
PB/EE
PB
PLÅY
LOCK
For settings which cannot be made by the function
buttons alone, the following icons appear in the
bottom-right of the menu to indicate the use of the
cursor control buttons:
TCR
2FD F1
RECINH
off
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ
OUT 00:02:10:00
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00
ÅSSEM-
BLE
IN 00:01:10:00
off
INS
TC
: All cursor control buttons
: Cursor control buttons for horizontal
direction
off
INS
INS
INS
INS
INS
INS
CUE
VIDEO Å-CH1 Å-CH2 Å-CH3 Å-CH4
off off off off off
off
: Cursor control buttons for vertical direction
In addition to operations using the cursor control
buttons, some menus allow you to change a value by
using the [+]/[–] buttons.
4-2
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-1-3 Registering Items to the
PF1/2 Menus
PF ASSIGN
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min
PF1
TCR 00:00:00:00
PF1
PF ASSIGN MENU
SETUP ITEM-755
755:MASTER(D1)
756:Y LEVEL(D1)
757:B-Y LVL(D1)
758:R-Y LVL(D1)
759:VD OUT(D2)
760:CHROMA(D2)
761:HUE(D2)
ÅLT+
PF1
F1KEY
1:701
VIDEO
2:005
You can register up to 40 items to the PF (Personal
Function) 1/2 menus, including items that are
displayed when the ALT button is pressed. The
registration of items from different menus to the PF1/2
menus eliminates the need for changing menus in
order to change a given VTR operating condition.
Current setting
IN
3:
SDI
PF2
4:708
5:709
6:710
7:711
8:712
9:713
10:714
Item currently
registered to the
button
ÅLT+
PF2
762:SETUP(D2)
763:SYNC(NTSC)
764:FINE(NTSC)
SET
SÅVE/
PÅSTE
CANCEL
BLÅNK
EXIT
For details on the factory-set PF1/2 menus, see Section 4-5,
“PF1 Menu (Factory Settings)” on page 4-53 and 4-6,
“PF2 Menu (Factory Settings)”on page 4-57.
To unregister the selected item
Press the [F6] (SET BLANK) button.
5 Press the F button to move the cursor (z) to the
PF1&2 ASSIGN menu, then press the G or g
button to move the cursor to the menu item to be
registered to the function button.
Registering items to the PF1/2 menus
3 2
4,5
To scroll the menu faster
Press the G or g button while holding down the
SFT button.
PF ASSIGN
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min
PF1
TCR 00:00:00:00
PF1
PF ASSIGN MENU
SETUP ITEM-760
755:MASTER(D1)
756:Y LEVEL(D1)
757:B-Y LVL(D1)
758:R-Y LVL(D1)
759:VD OUT(D2)
ÅLT+
PF1
F1KEY
1:701
VIDEO
2:005
6 81
IN
3:
SDI
PF2
4:708
5:709
Registering items to the PF1/2 menus
6:7160 760:CHROMA(D2)
Item to be
registered to the
function button
7:711
8:712
761:HUE(D2)
ÅLT+
PF2
762:SETUP(D2)
763:SYNC(NTSC)
764:FINE(NTSC)
9:713
1 Press the SET UP button.
10:714
SET
BLÅNK
SÅVE/
EXIT
The SET UP menu appears in the display.
PÅSTE
CANCEL
2 Press the [F4] (PF1&2 ASSIGN) button.
The PF1&2 ASSIGN menu appears in the display.
6 Press the [F7] (PASTE) button to register the item.
The new item is registered to the function button.
3 Press the [F1], [F2], [F3] or [F4] button to select the
PF menu where you wish to register an item.
The selected PF menu appears and the items
currently registered to the menu appear at the left
of the display.
7 Repeat Steps 3 to 6 to register more items.
To cancel the registration of all new items
Press the [F9] (CANCEL) button.
4 Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to
the function button where the item is to be
registered.
8 Press the [F10] (SAVE/EXIT) button to save the
newly registered items.
The registration is completed and the SET UP
menu appears in the display again.
The selected function button is highlighted and the
current setting is displayed.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings
Storing the current VTR menu settings to
a VTR memory bank
4-1-4 VTR Memory Bank
Function
Eight VTR memory banks are provided for storing up
to eight sets of menu settings including items
registered to the PF1/2 menus with titles.
The contents of all eight VTR memory banks can be
stored on a memory card.
CLR button
6,7
2
Current menu settings in the
VTR (CURRENT SETUP).
These settings are stored
outside the VTR memory
banks even when the power
Storing/recalling
is off.
4 3 81 5
Storing the current VTR menu settings to a VTR memory bank
VTR memory banks (SETUP
BANK1 to 8 and F). SETUP
BANKF contains the factory-
set menu settings. By calling
up SETUP BANK F, you can
restore all menu items to their
factory settings.
1 Press the SET UP button.
The SET UP menu appears in the display.
Storing/recalling
2 Press the [F1] (VTR BANK) button.
The VTR BANK menu appears in the display.
VTR BÅNK
FOOTBALL
CH.COND
TCR 00:00:00:00
Memory card (SETUP
BANK 0 to 8). The card
Storing/recalling
VTR BÅNK
CURRENT SETUP
VTR BÅNK
SETUP BÅNK7
1 (Preset)
2 (Preset)
3 (Preset)
4 (Preset)
5 (Preset)
6 (Preset)
7 FOOTBALL
8 (Preset)
ƒ (Preset)
UNDO
stores setting data in same
way as the VTR memory
banks. These contents can
be later called up in the
VTR.
BASEBALL
ç
VTR memory bank function
EDIT
DIREC-
TION
COPY
EXIT
TITLE
?
For details on memory card use, refer to “4-1-5 Memory
Card Function” on page 4-6.
For details on adding titles to the contents of the VTR
memory bank, refer to “4-1-6 Adding Titles to the Data” on
page 4-11.
3 Press the [F8] (DIRECTION) button or press the f
or F buttons twice to select the / direction.
Note
4 Press the f button to move the cursor (z) to
CURRENT SETUP[C], then press the [F6] (EDIT
TITLE) button to add a title to the current menu
settings of the VTR.
The contents of SETUP BANKF cannot be changed.
For details, refer to “4-1-6 Adding Titles to the Data”
on page 4-11.
5 Press the F button to move the cursor (z) to
SETUP BANK, then press the G or g button to
move the cursor to the number of the VTR
memory bank to be used for saving the current
menu settings.
4-4
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 Press the [F9] (COPY) button.
A message appears in the display asking you to
confirm the operation.
Recalling menu settings from a VTR
memory bank
To cancel the storage operation
Press the CLR button.
5,6
2
7 Press the [F9] (COPY) button while holding down
the SFT button.
The current menu settings are stored to the VTR
memory bank.
To add or change a title for VTR settings
after storing them to the VTR memory bank
Move the cursor (z) to the number of the VTR
where the settings are stored, then press the [F6]
(EDIT TITLE) button.
3 71 4
Recalling menu settings from a VTR memory bank
1 Press the SET UP button.
The SET UP menu appears in the display.
2 Press the [F1] (VTR BANK) button.
EDIT TITLE
The VTR BANK menu appears in the display.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;
VTR BÅNK
FOOTBALL
CH.COND
$#%&,."\^_'/~
' {}
HD1D2CAM
TCR 00:00:00:00
VTR BÅNK
CURRENT SETUP
VTR BÅNK
SETUP BÅNK7
1 (Preset)
2 (Preset)
3 (Preset)
4 (Preset)
5 (Preset)
6 (Preset)
7 FOOTBALL
8 (Preset)
ƒ (Preset)
UNDO
BÅCK
SET
SÅVE/
EXIT
BASEBALL
ç
SPÅCE
CÅNCEL
SPÅCE LETTER
For more information, refer to “4-1-6 Adding Titles to
the Data” on page 4-11.
EDIT
DIREC-
TION
COPY
EXIT
TITLE
?
Recovering previous settings after new
settings have been saved
Press the [F2] (UNDO) button to recover the
previous settings.
3 Press the [F8] (DIRECTION) button or press the f
or F buttons twice to select the ? direction.
Preventing accidental erasure after saving
settings
Move the cursor to the memory bank to be
protected and press ALT/[F2] (PROTECT)
buttons. A will appear next to the selected bank.
4 Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to
the number of the VTR memory bank to be
recalled.
5 Press the [F9] (COPY) button.
A message asking you to confirm the operation
appears in the display.
8 Press the [F10] (EXIT) button.
The SET UP menu appears again.
To cancel the recalling operation
Press the CLR button.
(Continued)
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings
6 Press the [F9] (COPY) button while holding down
Notes
the SFT button.
• Be sure to insert the memory card fully. If the
memory card is not inserted properly, the MEMORY
CARD indicator will flash. If this happens, reinsert
the memory card.
• If the battery in the memory card is dead, the
MEMORY CARD indicator will flash. If this
happens, replace the battery in the memory card.
• The ACCESS button flashes while the VTR is
writing to or reading from a memory card. Do not
eject the memory card while the indicator is flashing.
The menu settings are recalled from the selected
VTR memory bank.
When the recalling process has been completed,
the title of the VTR bank appears under
CURRENT SETUP in the display.
VTR BÅNK
FOOTBALL
CH.COND
TCR 00:00:00:00
VTR BÅNK
CURRENT SETUP
VTR BÅNK
SETUP BÅNK7
1 (Preset)
2 (Preset)
3 (Preset)
4 (Preset)
5 (Preset)
6 (Preset)
7 FOOTBALL
8 (Preset)
ƒ (Preset)
UNDO
BASEBALL
ç
Formatting a memory card
EDIT
DIREC-
TION
The supplied memory card or other memory cards
must be formatted before you can use them.
COPY
EXIT
TITLE
?
3,4,5
2
7 Press the [F10] (EXIT) button.
The SET UP menu appears again.
4-1-5 Memory Card Function
1
You can store menu settings in the VTR memory
banks and cue point data to an memory card for recall
later.
The MEMORY CARD indicator lights up when you
insert a memory card.
Formatting a memory card
1 Insert the memory card.
The MEMORY CARD indicator lights up.
You can then access the MEMORY CARD menu
directly from other menus (HOME/TC/CUE/PF1/PF2)
by pressing the ACCESS button.
2 Press the ACCESS button.
MEMORY CARD menu appears in the display.
MEMORY CÅRD
FOOTBALL
CH.COND
FORMÅT
CÅRD
MEMORY CARD indicator
ACCESS button
TCR 00:00:00:00
MEMORY CÅRD
CARD BÅNK0
BÅSEBÅLL 0
(Preset.).. 1
(Preset) 2
(Preset) 3
(Preset) 4
(Preset) 5
(Preset) 6
FOOTBALL 7
(Preset) 8
VTR BÅNK
CURRENT SETUP
ç FOOTBALL
1 (Preset)
2 (Preset)
3 (Preset)
4 (Preset)
5 (Preset)
6 (Preset)
7 FOOTBALL
8 (Preset)
ƒ (Preset)
UNDO
SHOW
SETUP
SHOW
CUESET
EDIT SELECT DIREC-
COPY
EXIT
TITLE
ÅLL
TION
/
Memory card insertion slot
Memory card function
3 Press the [F1] (FORMAT CARD) button.
A message asking you to confirm the operation
appears in the display.
To eject the memory card
Press the button on the right side of the insertion slot.
4-6
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Press the [F1] (FORMAT CARD) button while
holding down the SFT button.
4 Move the cursor to the VTR side using the [>]
button and use the G and g buttons to move the
cursor to the memory bank where the data is to be
saved.
A message asking you to confirm the operation
appears in the display again.
MEMORY CÅRD
CH.COND
FORMÅT
CÅRD
5 Press the [F1] (FORMAT CARD) button while
holding down the SFT button.
TENNIS
TCR 00:00:00:00
MEMORY CÅRD
CARD BÅNK4
BÅSEBÅLL 0
VTR BÅNK
SETUP BANK 2
ç FOOTBALL
1 (Preset)
2 TENNIS
UNDO
The VTR starts formatting the card.
(Preset
.
)
..
1
(Preset) 2
(Preset) 3
(Preset) 4
(Preset) 5
(Preset) 6
FOOTBALL 7
(Preset) 8
Destination
SHOW
3 (Preset)
4 (Preset)
5 (Preset)
6 (Preset)
7 FOOTBALL
8 (Preset)
ƒ (Preset)
SETUP
To cancel formatting
Press the CLR button while the confirmation
message appears in the display.
SHOW
CUESET
EDIT SELECT DIREC-
COPY
EXIT
TITLE
ÅLL
TION
?
Storing the contents of the VTR memory
banks to a memory card
To store the current VTR menu settings
Move the cursor (z) to the [C] (CURRENT
SETUP) position.
7,8
2
To store all VTR memory banks
Press the [F7] (SELECT ALL) button.
5 Move the cursor to the MEMORY CARD side
using the [>] button, and use the G and g buttons
to move the cursor (z) to the bank number
(MEMORY CARD side) where the data is to be
saved.
6 3 91 4,5
Storing the contents of the VTR memory banks to a memory card
MEMORY CÅRD
CH.COND
FORMÅT
CÅRD
TENNIS
TCR 00:00:00:00
1 Press the SET UP button.
MEMORY CÅRD
CARD BÅNK4
BÅSEBÅLL 0
(Preset.).. 1
(Preset) 2
(Preset) 3
(Preset) 4
(Preset) 5
(Preset) 6
FOOTBALL 7
(Preset) 8
VTR BÅNK
SETUP BANK 2
ç FOOTBALL
1 (Preset)
2 TENNIS
UNDO
The SET UP menu appears in the display.
SHOW
3 (Preset)
4 (Preset)
5 (Preset)
6 (Preset)
7 FOOTBALL
8 (Preset)
ƒ (Preset)
SETUP
2 Press the [F2] (MEMORY CARD) button.
The MEMORY CARD menu appears in the
display.
VTR memory
bank number
SHOW
CUESET
EDIT SELECT DIREC-
You can access the MEMORY CARD menu
directly by pressing the ACCESS button.
COPY
EXIT
TITLE
ÅLL
TION
?
MEMORY CÅRD
FOOTBALL
CH.COND
FORMÅT
CÅRD
6 To change the title of the bank, press the [F6]
TCR 00:00:00:00
MEMORY CÅRD
CARD BÅNK0
BÅSEBÅLL 0
(Preset.).. 1
(Preset) 2
(Preset) 3
(Preset) 4
(Preset) 5
(Preset) 6
FOOTBALL 7
(Preset) 8
VTR BÅNK
(EDIT TITLE) button.
CURRENT SETUP
ç FOOTBALL
1 (Preset)
2 TENNIS
UNDO
For details, refer to “4-1-6 Adding Titles to the
Data”on page 4-11.
SHOW
3 (Preset)
4 (Preset)
5 (Preset)
6 (Preset)
7 FOOTBALL
8 (Preset)
ƒ (Preset)
SETUP
SHOW
CUESET
7 Press the [F9] (COPY) button.
EDIT SELECT DIREC-
A message asking you to confirm the operation
appears in the display.
COPY
EXIT
TITLE
ÅLL
TION
/
(Continued)
3 Press the [F8] (DIRECTION) button or press the
[<] or [>] buttons twice to select the ? direction.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings
8 Press the [F9] (COPY) button while holding down 2 Press the [F2] (MEMORY CARD) button.
the SFT button.
The MEMORY CARD menu appears in the
display.
You can access MEMORY CARD menu directly
from any menu screen by pressing the ACCESS
button.
The control panel stores the specified VTR
memory bank to the IC memory card.
After the storage is complete, the title of the VTR
memory bank appears under the MEMORY CARD
indication.
MEMORY CÅRD
CH.COND
FORMÅT
CÅRD
TENNIS
MEMORY CÅRD
CH.COND
FORMÅT
CÅRD
TCR 00:00:00:00
TENNIS
MEMORY CÅRD
CARD BÅNK4
BÅSEBÅLL 0
(Preset.).. 1
(Preset) 2
(Preset) 3
VTR BÅNK
TCR 00:00:00:00
SETUP BANK 2
ç FOOTBALL
1 (Preset)
2 TENNIS
UNDO
MEMORY CÅRD
CARD BÅNK4
BÅSEBÅLL 0
(Preset.).. 1
(Preset) 2
(Preset) 3
VTR BÅNK
SETUP BANK 2
ç FOOTBALL
1 (Preset)
2 TENNIS
UNDO
SHOW
3 (Preset)
4 (Preset)
5 (Preset)
6 (Preset)
7 FOOTBALL
8 (Preset)
ƒ (Preset)
SETUP
TENNIS
4
SHOW
3 (Preset)
4 (Preset)
5 (Preset)
6 (Preset)
7 FOOTBALL
8 (Preset)
ƒ (Preset)
(Preset) 5
(Preset) 6
FOOTBALL 7
(Preset) 8
SETUP
TENNIS
4
SHOW
(Preset) 5
(Preset) 6
FOOTBALL 7
(Preset) 8
CUESET
SHOW
CUESET
EDIT SELECT DIREC-
COPY
EXIT
TITLE
ÅLL
TION
EDIT SELECT DIREC-
COPY
EXIT
?
TITLE
ÅLL
TION
?
3 Press the [F4] (SHOW CUESET) button.
Preventing accidental erasure after saving
settings
The display for storing cue point lists appears.
Press ALT/[F2] (PROTECT) buttons and a
symbol will appear to the right of the memory card
bank number
MEMORY CÅRD
FORMÅT
CÅRD
TENNIS
TCR 00:00:00:00
MEMORY CÅRD
CUE POINT SET1
VTR BÅNK
CURRENT CUESET
ç TENNIS
UNDO
(Blank)
(Blank)
(Blank)
(Blank)
(Blank)
(Blank)
(Blank)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ƒ
(Blank)
SHOW
9 Press the [F10] (EXIT) button.
SETUP
The SET UP menu or the menu displayed before
you pressed the ACCESS button appears again.
SHOW
(Blank)
(Blank)
CUESET
EDIT SELECT DIREC-
COPY
EXIT
TITLE
ÅLL
TION
/
Storing cue point lists to a memory card
You can store up to 8 pages of cue point lists to a
memory card along with titles.
To return to the MEMORY CARD menu
Press the [F3] (SHOW SETUP) button.
6,7
23
4 Press the [F8] button or press the [<] or [>] buttons
twice to select the ? direction.
5 Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to
the number of the memory bank in the memory
card where you want to store the cue point list.
MEMORY CÅRD
FORMÅT
CÅRD
TENNIS
8 4 91 5
TCR 00:00:00:00
MEMORY CÅRD
CUE POINT SET1
VTR BÅNK
Storing cue point lists to an IC memory card
CURRENT CUESET
ç TENNIS
UNDO
Bank number in
the memory card
(Blank)
(Blank)
(Blank)
(Blank)
(Blank)
(Blank)
(Blank)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ƒ
(Blank)
SHOW
1 Press the SET UP button.
The SET UP menu appears in the display.
SETUP
SHOW
(Blank)
(Blank)
CUESET
EDIT SELECT DIREC-
COPY
EXIT
TITLE
ÅLL
TION
?
4-8
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 Press the [F9] (COPY) button.
A message asking you to confirm the operation
appears in the display.
MEMORY CÅRD
CH.COND
FORMÅT
CÅRD
TENNIS
TCR 00:00:00:00
MEMORY CÅRD
CARD BÅNK4
BÅSEBÅLL 0
(Preset.).. 1
(Preset) 2
(Preset) 3
VTR BÅNK
SETUP BANK 2
ç FOOTBALL
1 (Preset)
2 TENNIS
UNDO
7 Press the [F9] (COPY) button while holding down
SHOW
3 (Preset)
4 (Preset)
5 (Preset)
6 (Preset)
7 FOOTBALL
8 (Preset)
ƒ (Preset)
SETUP
the SFT button.
TENNIS
4
(Preset) 5
(Preset) 6
FOOTBALL 7
(Preset) 8
The VTR stores the cue point list to the memory
card.
SHOW
CUESET
EDIT SELECT DIREC-
COPY
EXIT
TITLE
ÅLL
TION
8 Press the [F6] (EDIT TITLE) button to add a title
/
to the cue point list.
For details, refer to “4-1-6 Adding Titles to the
Data”on page 4-11.
3 Press the [F8] (DIRECTION) button or press the
[<] or [>] buttons twice to select the / direction.
Preventing accidental erasure after saving
settings
Move the cursor (z) to the cue point set number you
wish to save and press ALT/[F2] (PROTECT) buttons.
A symbol will appear to the right of the cue point set
number.
4 Move the cursor to the memory card side using the
[<] button and use the G or g buttons to place the
cursor (z) by the memory bank where the settings
were saved.
MEMORY CÅRD
BASEBALL
CH.COND
FORMÅT
CÅRD
TCR 00:00:00:00
9 Press the [F10] (EXIT) button.
MEMORY CÅRD
CARD BANK0
BÅSEBÅLL 0
VTR BÅNK
SETUP BANK 2
ç FOOTBALL
1 (Preset)
2 TENNIS
UNDO
The SET UP menu or the menu displayed before
you pressed the ACCESS button appears again.
Bank number in
the memory card
(Preset
(Preset) 2
(Preset) 3
TENNIS
.
)
..
1
SHOW
3 (Preset)
4 (Preset)
5 (Preset)
6 (Preset)
7 FOOTBALL
8 (Preset)
ƒ (Preset)
SETUP
4
(Preset) 5
(Preset) 6
FOOTBALL 7
(Preset) 8
SHOW
CUESET
Recalling the contents of a memory card
EDIT SELECT DIREC-
COPY
EXIT
TITLE
ÅLL
TION
The contents stored in a memory card can be recalled
to the current VTR memory bank.
/
5 To change the title of the memory bank, press the
[F6] (EDIT TITLE) button.
7,8
2
The title can be also be changed after the settings
are recalled.
For details, refer to“4-1-6 Adding Titles to the Data”on
page 4-11.
(Continued)
5 3 91 4,6
Recalling the contents of an IC memory card
1 Press the SET UP button.
The SET UP menu appears in the display.
2 Press the [F2] (MEMORY CARD) button.
The MEMORY CARD menu appears in the
display.
You can access MEMORY CARD menu directly
from anu menu screen by pressing the ACCESS
button.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings
6 Press the F button to move the cursor (z) to the
Recalling a cue point list from a memory
card
VTR side, then press the G or G button to move
the cursor to the VTR memory bank number where
the recalled data are to be stored.
Recalling a cue point list from a memory card replaces
the current VTR cue point list with the recalled data.
MEMORY CÅRD
(Preset)
CH.COND
FORMÅT
CÅRD
TCR 00:00:00:00
MEMORY CÅRD
CARD BÅNK0
VTR BÅNK
SETUP BANK 5
ç FOOTBALL
1 (Preset)
2 TENNIS
6,7
23
UNDO
BASEBALL 0
(Preset.).. 1
(Preset) 2
(Preset) 3
SHOW
3 (Preset)
4 (Preset)
5
SETUP
TENNIS
4
(Preset) 5
(Preset) 6
FOOTBALL 7
(Preset) 8
VTR memory
bank number
6 (Preset)
7 FOOTBALL
8 (Preset)
ƒ (Preset)
SHOW
CUESET
EDIT SELECT DIREC-
COPY
EXIT
TITLE
ÅLL
TION
/
4 81 5
To change the current VTR menu settings
Recalling a cue point list in a memory card
Move the cursor (z) to [C] (CURRENT SETUP).
1 Press the SET UP button.
To replace all VTR memory bank contents
with memory card data
The SET UP menu appears in the display.
Press the [F7] (SELECT ALL) button.
2 Press the [F2] (MEMORY CARD) button.
The MEMORY CARD menu appears in the
display.
7 Press the [F9] (COPY) button.
A message asking you to confirm the operation
appears in the display.
You can access MEMORY CARD menu directly
by pressing the ACCESS button.
8 Press the [F9] (COPY) button while holding down
the SFT button.
MEMORY CÅRD
CH.COND
FORMÅT
CÅRD
TENNIS
TCR 00:00:00:00
The VTR recalls the contents of the memory card.
After the recalling process is complete, the title of
the memory bank of the memory card appears
under the VTR indication.
MEMORY CÅRD
CARD BÅNK4
BÅSEBÅLL 0
(Preset.).. 1
(Preset) 2
(Preset) 3
VTR BÅNK
SETUP BANK 2
ç FOOTBALL
1 (Preset)
2 TENNIS
UNDO
SHOW
3 (Preset)
4 (Preset)
5 (Preset)
6 (Preset)
7 FOOTBALL
8 (Preset)
ƒ (Preset)
SETUP
TENNIS
4
(Preset) 5
(Preset) 6
FOOTBALL 7
(Preset) 8
SHOW
CUESET
9 Press the [F10] (EXIT) button.
EDIT SELECT DIREC-
The SET UP menu or the menu displayed before
you pressed the ACCESS button appears again.
COPY
EXIT
TITLE
ÅLL
TION
/
3 Press the [F4] (SHOW CUESET) button.
The menu for storing cue point lists appears.
MEMORY CÅRD
FORMÅT
CÅRD
CINEMA
TCR 00:00:00:00
MEMORY CÅRD
CUE POINT SET1
VTR BÅNK
CURRENT CUESET
ç TENNIS
UNDO
CINEMA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(Blank)
(Blank)
(Blank)
(Blank)
(Blank)
(Blank)
ƒ
(Blank)
SHOW
SETUP
SHOW
(Blank)
(Blank)
CUESET
EDIT SELECT DIREC-
COPY
EXIT
TITLE
ÅLL
TION
/
4-10
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return to the MEMORY CARD menu
Press the [F3] (SHOW SETUP) button again.
4-1-6 Adding Titles to the Data
When storing data to a memory bank in a memory card
or the VTR, you can add a title to the data to make
data management easier.
4 Press the [F8] (DIRECTION) button or press the
[<] or [>] buttons twice to select the / direction.
5 Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to
the number of the memory bank in the memory
card.
2
MEMORY CÅRD
FORMÅT
CÅRD
CINEMA
TCR 00:00:00:00
MEMORY CÅRD
CUE POINT SET1
VTR BÅNK
CURRENT CUESET
ç TENNIS
UNDO
CINEMA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bank number of
the memory card
(Blank)
(Blank)
(Blank)
(Blank)
(Blank)
(Blank)
ƒ
(Blank)
SHOW
SETUP
4 6 1,3
SHOW
(Blank)
(Blank)
CUESET
Adding titles to the data
EDIT SELECT DIREC-
COPY
EXIT
TITLE
ÅLL
TION
/
1 Move the cursor (z) to item to be filled.
2 Press the [F6] (EDIT TITLE) button to display the
6 Press the [F9] (COPY) button.
EDIT TITLE widnow.
A message asking you to confirm the operation
appears in the display.
EDIT TITLE
7 Press the [F9] (COPY) button while holding down
the SFT button.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;
The VTR recalls the cue point list in the memory
card.
$#%&,."\^_'/~
' {}
HD1D2CAM
After the recalling process is completed, the name
of the cue point list appears under the CURRENT
CUESET indication.
BÅCK
SET
SÅVE/
EXIT
SPÅCE
CÅNCEL
SPÅCE LETTER
8 Press the [F10] (EXIT) button.
3 Press the f or F button to select a letter.
The SET UP menu or the menu displayed before
you pressed the ACCESS button appears again.
EDIT TITLE
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;
$#%&,."\^_'/~
' {}
HD1D2CAM
BÅCK
SET
SÅVE/
EXIT
SPÅCE
CÅNCEL
SPÅCE LETTER
(Continued)
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-1 Registering and Storing Menu Settings
4 Press the [F7] (SET LETTER) button .
4-1-7 Details on VTR Memory
Bank and Memory Card
Functions
The selected letter is entered.
Most setting of most items can be stored to a VTR
memory bank or a memory card, with the exception of
the settings described below:
EDIT TITLE
B
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;
$#%&,."\^_'/~
' {}
HD1D2CAM
Data that can be stored to/recalled from a VTR
memory bank or a memory card
• Settings of items in the VTR SETUP menu (with the
exceptions listed below)
BÅCK
SET
SÅVE/
EXIT
SPÅCE
CÅNCEL
SPÅCE LETTER
• Contents of the PF1/2 menus
• VTR memory bank titles
5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters.
Data that cannot be stored to/recalled from a
VTR memory bank or a memory card
• Items related to the hours meter (H01 to H14)
Current settings are always maintained for these items.
To enter a space
Press the [F5] (SPACE) button.
If you enter a wrong character
Press the [F6] (BACK SPACE) to go back, then
reenter a character.
To cancel the procedure to start again
Press [F9] (CANCEL) button to start over.
To change a character
Press the [<] button to the move the cursor to the
title box, the press the G or g buttons to move
the text insertion position.)
6 Press the [F10] (SAVE/EXIT) button.
The entered title is set and the menu displayed
before you pressed the EDIT TITLE button
appears again.
4-12
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-1-8 Memory Card Data
Compatibility
Data copied onto a memory card can be used on
control panels connected to other HDW-F500 VTRs.
Although data is completely compatible between
VTRs with different optional equipment, take note of
the following.
Consider data copied from VTR A to VTR B
and then to VTR C
VTR A
(HKDV-506A SDTI Board installed)
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500
701.VIDEO INPUT select
setting: SDTI
Internal VTR processing:
SDTI
Memory card
Copy
VTR B
(HKDV-506A SDTI Board NOT installed)
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500
701.VIDEO INPUT select
setting: SDTI
Internal VTR processing:
SDI
Copy
VTR C
(HKDV-506A SDTI Board installed)
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500
701.VIDEO INPUT select
setting: SDTI
Internal VTR processing:
SDTI
• Even though the optional equipment is different in
VTRs A and B, the VTR SETUP menu settings are
preserved.
• Even though the VTR SETUP menu settings are
copied to VTR C after being copied to VTR B, the
settings from VTR A are copied to VTR C
• Even though settings are copied for optional
equipment that is not present, the settings are adjusted
and processed by the VTR internally.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2 HOME Menu
To activate the HOME menu
Press the HOME button.
The HOME menu sets the basic VTR operation
conditions for recording, playback, and editing.
The HOME, TC, PF1 and PF2 menus show
information that includes the VTR operation mode,
time code of the current position, and time code type,
etc.
To change the HOME menu page
Press the ALT button.
Channel condition
Tape remaining
REMAIN-T CH.COND
HOME
Name of the displayed menu
PB/EE
L 113min GREEN
BÅSEBÅLL EDIT SET
PLÅY
LOCK
Operation mode
PB
TCR
2FD F1
Title of the current VTR SETUP menu
RECINH
off
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ
IN 00:01:10:00
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00
ÅSSEM-
BLE
OUT 00:02:10:00
Capstan lock mode
Servo lock status
off
INS
TC
off
INS
INS
INS
INS
INS
INS
CUE
VIDEO Å-CH1 Å-CH2 Å-CH3 Å-CH4
off off off off off
off
HOME menu display
For details on time codes, refer to “4-3 TC Menu” on page
4-20.
4-14
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOME menu
Button
[F1]
Indication
PB/EE
Function
Settings
Selection of output signals
Disables recording
PB, EE
[F2]
REC INH
off, < all, crash REC, video/CTL,
audio/CTL >, [casst]
Note
The [casst] indicator is only displayed
when the record-protect plug is set to
prevent recording. This setting
cannot be selected.
[F3]
ASSEMBLE
INS TC
Selects edit mode and edit channel
on, off
[F4]
[F5]
INS VIDEO
INS A-CH1
INS A-CH2
INS A-CH3
INS A-CH4
INS CUE
[F6]
[F7]
[F8]
[F9]
[F10]
ALT/[F1]
ALT/[F3]
ALT/[F5]
ALT/[F6]
ALT/[F7]
ALT/[F10]
PRE READ
FREEZE
Setting for pre-reading
off, video, audio, a/v
Selects still-picture output.
CAP LOCK
PREROLL
DMC
Selects CAP LOCK (capstan servo lock) mode. 2FD, 4LOCK, 4HOLD
Sets the preroll time.
0 to 30 s
Selects DMC playback.
Restores the last edit point set.
LAST EDIT
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2 HOME Menu
Note
4-2-1 Selecting the Output
Signals(PB/EE)
When PB/PB is selected during shuttle mode, audio
output is muted for playback speeds of more than –1 or
+2 times normal speed.
The audio/video output signals from the line output
and monitor output connectors can be temporarily
changed from their current settings to another set of
settings by pressing the [F1] (PB/EE) button. The
video, digital audio, and analog cue channel output
signals are toggled to the other set of settings while the
button is pressed.
4-2-2 Record Inhibit Mode
(REC INH)
Record inhibit mode is selected by pressing the [F2]
(REC INH) button. Every time the button is pressed,
the setting toggles between off and <all, crash REC,
video/CTL, audio/CTL>.
Output Signal Selection
The record inhibit area is selected using the 003.REC
INHIBIT AREA select setting in the VTR SETUP
menu.
all: All recording is prohibited. (The REC INHIBIT
indicator will be lit.)
Output signal selection is made using the 017.PB/EE
SELECT MENU. Output signal types for different
operation modes of this VTR are shown below.
Output
Channel
crash REC: The normal record mode is disabled.
Use this setting when you want to record only
during assemble editing or insert editing.
video/CTL: Video and CTL signal recording is
inhibited.
Audio/CTL: Audio and CTL signal recording is
inhibited.
[casst]: This is displayed when recording is inhibited
because the record-protect plug is set. This setting
cannot be selected.
Video/Audio
VTR
Operation
Mode
PB/MU
EE/MU
Standby off
Standby on
Playback
Record
Edit
EE/EE
PB/MU
EE/EE
PB/PB1)
EE/EE
EE/EE
PB/PB
PB/PB
Shuttle3)
PB/MU
EE/EE
PB/PB
Jog
PB/PB
PB/PB
PB/MU
PB/MU
Variable
INPUT CHECK
button
INPUT2)
1) Output signals during playback are PB/PB only. Output
signals cannot be selected with 017.PB/EE SELECT
MENU.
2) When the INPUT CHECK button is held down, the
INPUT signals (audio and video) are output. Output
signals cannot be selected with 017.PB/EE SELECT
MENU. When the INPUT signals are output, only
monitor output is changed. Line output signals are not
changed.
REC INHIBIT indicator
3) Pressing the [F1] (PB/EE) button changes the output
signals during shuttle mode in the following ways.
VTR SETUP MENU 017. PB/
EE SELECT MENU settings
Output signals while the
[F1] (PB/EE) button is held
down
PB/MU
PB/PB
EE/EE
EE/EE
EE/EE
PB/MU
4-16
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2-5 Still-Picture Output
(FREEZE)
4-2-3 Selecting the Edit Mode
and Edit Channel (ASSEMBLE or
INS CUE)
For stillpicture output, press the ALT/[F3] (FREEZE)
button. The picture that was playing just before the
button was pressed will be frozen on the screen. Make
the field or frame selection using the 902.FREEZE
MODE setting in the VTR SETUP menu.
Select assemble or insert edit mode.
Selecting assemble edit mode
To maintain the still-picture
Press [F3] (ASSEMBLE) in the HOME menu.
Set 903. FREEZE CONTROL FROM KEY PANEL in
the VTR SETUP menu to latch.
The still-picture output is maintained until the [F3]
(FREEZE) button is pressed again.
Selecting the insert edit mode
Press one of the following buttons in the HOME menu:
[F4] (INS TC), [F5] (INS VIDEO), [F6] (INS A-CH1),
[F7] (INS A-CH2), [F8] (INS A-CH3), [F9] (INS A-
CH4), [F10] (INS CUE).
To temporarily output a still-picture
Set 903. FREEZE CONTROL FROM KEY PANEL in
the VTR SETUP menu to momentary. A still-picture
is output as long as you hold down the [F3] (FREEZE)
button.
For more information about editing operations, refer to
“Chapter 6 Editing” on page 6-1.
Stop-freeze function
4-2-4 Preread Settings
(PRE READ)
To automatically output a still-picture when the VTR
is changed to stop mode, set 905. STOP FREEZE
CONTROL in the VTR SETUP menu to enable.
This setting allows pre-reading (reading before
writing) in insert edit mode. To select pre-reading,
press the ALT/[F1] (PRE READ) button.
Pressing the button, cycles the settings from off, video,
audio, a/v.
off: No pre-reading
video: Pre-read the video signals (PREREAD
indicator will be lit)
Note
Regardless of the setting of 902.FREEZE MODE in
the VTR SETUP menu, stop-freeze is always a field-
freeze picture.
audio: Pre-read the audio signals (PREREAD
indicator will be lit)
a/v: Pre-read both audio and video signals
(PREREAD indicator will be lit)
[F1] button
PREREAD indicator
The pre-read function can be used for pre-read editing.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2 HOME Menu
4-2-6 Selecting the Capstan
Servo Lock Mode (CAP LOCK)
4-2-7 Setting the Preroll Time
(PREROLL TIME)
Press the ALT button, then the [F5] (CAP LOCK)
button to select the capstan servo lock mode when you
edit or play a tape with composite signals.
Set the preroll time by pressing the ALT button, then
press the [F6] (PREROLL TIME) button.
You can set a preroll time of 0 to 30 seconds in 1-
second units. During editing on this VTR, a preroll
time of 5 seconds or more is recommended.
2FD: The capstan servo is locked every 2 fields. The
color framing operation is disabled. This is the
normal setting for editing or playback of HD or
D1 signals.
Setting the preroll time
4LOCK: The capstan servo is locked to the color
frame every 4 fields. If color frames occur
intermittently during playback, the capstan servo
is locked when the next color frame appears.
4HOLD: The capstan servo is locked to the color
frame every 4 fields. If color frames occurs
intermittently during playback, the capstan servo
stays locked to that color frame.
1,3
2
Notes
• This setting is only active only when the frame
frequency of the unit is 29.97 Hz or 30 Hz.
• To lock composite signal output to four fields on this
VTR, select the signal input to the REF. IN SD
connector as a reference signal.
Setting the preroll time
1 Press the ALT button, then the [F6] (PREROLL
TIME) button.
A data entry window appears.
• Composite signal output cannot be locked to eight
fields on this VTR.
2 Change the setting with the G and g buttons.
You may also use the + and – buttons.
3 Press the [F6] (PREROLL TIME) button.
The data entry window disappears.
4-18
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-2-8 Selecting DMC Playback
(DMC)
4-2-9 Recalling Edit Points
(LAST EDIT)
In DMC (Dynamic Motion Control) playback mode,
the VTR plays back a tape segment at a specified
variable speed of –1 to +2 times normal playback
speed, memorizes the speed, then plays the segment
back at a later time at the memorized speed.
While editing, you can recall the last edit points by
pressing the ALT button, then the [F10] (LAST EDIT)
button.
The edit points appear in the display.
DMC playback is useful during on-the-spot telecasts of
sporting events for immediate playback and broadcast
of highlight scenes for which starting and ending
points have been set during recording.
CH.COND
GREEN
HOME
PB/EE
PB
BÅSEBÅLL EDIT SET
PLAY
LOCK
TCR
2FD F1
RECINH
off
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ
OUT 00:02:10:00
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00
ÅSSEM-
BLE
Edit points
IN 00:01:10:00
off
For detail on the procedure for DMC playback, see Section
5-4-4, “DMC Playback” on page 5-14.
INS
TC
off
INS
INS
INS
INS
INS
INS
CUE
VIDEO Å-CH1 Å-CH2 Å-CH3 Å-CH4
During tape editing using two HDW-F500 VTRs, you
can use DMC playback to control the playback speed
of the player VTR for editing at variable speeds (DMC
editing).
off off off off off
off
Recalling edit points (LAST EDIT)
For detail on the procedure for DMC editing, see Section
6-2-1, “Performing DMC Editing” on page 6-15.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-3 TC Menu
To activate the TC menu
Press the TC button.
The TC menu allows you to set time code-related
items through a single menu. The HOME, TC, PF1
and PF2 menus show information that includes the
VTR operation mode, time code of the current
position, and the time code type, etc.
To change the TC menu page
Press the ALT button.
INTRP (interpolation): This appears when time
code cannot be read correctly and correction
has been performed.
TCR: Time data type
(CTL/TCR/UBR/TCG/UBG/DUR)
REMAIN-T CH.COND
TC
TIMER
SEL
L 113min GREEN
Data entry window
TC
PLAY
LOCK
DF 2FD F1
TCR VITC INTRP
TIMER
RESET
VITC: Time code type (LTC/VITC)
F1: Field number (F1/F2)
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00
IN 00:01:10:00 OUT 00:02:10:00
TIMER
SET
DF: This appears when drop frame
mode data is being recorded or played
(DF/NDF).
AIN: Time data for an AUDIO IN point
AOUT: Time data for an AUDIO OUT point
IN: Time data for an IN point
TIMER
HOLD
OUT: Time data for an OUT point
TC
TCG
TCG
RUN
DF/NDF VITC
DF TCG
SEL
SOURCE MODE
MODE
VITC
int-L prst
rec
TC Menu
For details on operation modes, refer to “4-2 HOME
Menu” on page 4-14.
TC menu
Button
[F1]
Indication
Function
Settings
TIMER SEL
Selects time data type.
Resets the time counter.
Sets the time data.
CTL, TC, UBIT
TIMER RESET
TIMER SET
TIMER HOLD
TCR SEL
[F2]
[F3]
[F4]
Holds the time counter.
Sets the time code reader.
[F5]
VITC, auto, LTC
TCG SOURCE
[F6]
Selects the internal/external time code generator.
int-LTC, int-VITC
ext-LTC, ext-VITC
[F7]
[F8]
[F9]
TCG MODE
RUN MODE
Sets the time code generator.
regene, prst, auto
free, rec
Selects the running mode of the time code.
Selects drop frame mode.
DF, NDF, auto
DF/NDF
VITC
[F10]
Selects VITC input source
TCG, V IN
TAPE TIMER
ALT/[F1]
Selects the CTL display mode.
+/–12H, 24H
ALT/[F2]
PDPSET MENU
Activates the menu for presetting the pull-down
time code.
(when 23.98PsF/
24PsF mode is
selected)
ALT/[F3]
(when 25PsF/50i
mode is
selected)
TCCONV MENU
TCCONV MENU
Activates the menu for converting the time code
(24F to 25F).
ALT/[F3]
Activates the menu for converting the time code
(25F to 24F).
(when 23.98PsF/
24PsF mode is
selected)
ALT/[F4]
PDTC DISP
PD CHARA
Specifies whether or not to display pull down time
code.
on, off
on, off
ALT/[F5]
Specifies superimposition of character information
to the pull down output.
4-20
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Button
Indication
Function
Settings
ALT/[F6]
CHARA SUPER
Specifies superimposition of character information
to the HD SDI output and HD-SD converter output.
on, off
ALT/[F7]
ALT/[F8]
ALT/[F9]
CHARA H-POS
CHARA V-POS
VITC POS-1
Changes the superimposition position (horizontal).
Changes the superimposition position (vertical).
0-15
0-23
Selects the VITC insertion line in the HD-SD
converter output.
12-20(NTSC)
9-22(PAL)
ALT/[F10]
VITC POS-2
12-20(NTSC)
9-22(PAL)
4-3-1 Setting the Time Data
(TIMER SEL/RESET/SET/HOLD)
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min GREEN
TC
TIMER
SEL
TC
PLAY
LOCK
DF 2FD F1
TCR VITC
TIMER
RESET
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ
The display shows the following types of time data:
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00
IN 00:01:10:00 OUT 00:02:10:00
TIMER
SET
Time data for
edit points
Superimposed
Time data type
Indication
display
TIMER
HOLD
TCR LTC
TCR
TCR.
TCG
CTL
The LTC1) value read by the
time code reader during
playback.
The VITC1) value read by the
time code reader during
playback.
TC
TCG
TCG
RUN
DF/NDF VITC
DF TCG
SEL
SOURCE MODE
MODE
VITC
int-L prst
rec
TCR VITC
TCG
Selecting the time data display
The value generated by the
time code generator during
recording.
The number of CTL signals2)
on the tape during recording/
playing.
Press the [F1] (TIMER SEL) button repeatedly to
select the desired time data display.
CTL
CTL: Counts the CTL signals on the playback tape
or the CTL signals being recorded on the tape, and
displays the tape running time in hours, minutes,
seconds, and frames.
TC: Displays the value read by the time code reader
or the value generated by the time code generator.
To switch between VITC and LTC, press the [F5]
(TCR SEL) button.
UBIT: Displays user bits data inserted in time code
being played back, or the user bits data inserted in
time code being recorded. To switch between
VITC and LTC, press the [F5] (TCR SEL) button.
UBR
UBR.
UBG
DUR
The user bits3) value read by
the time code reader (LTC)
during playback.
UBR LTC
UBR VITC
UBG
The user bits value read by the
time code reader (VITC) during
playback.
The user bits value generated
by the time code generator
during recording.
DUR
Appears whenever a duration
between any two edit points
(IN, OUT, AUDIO IN or AUDIO
OUT points) is displayed.
Time data for IN, OUT, AUDIO IN and AUDIO OUT
points are also displayed.
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................
1) LTC and VITC
2) CTL signals
LTC cannot be read when the tape speed is very slow or
is changed suddenly. VITC, on the other hand, can be
read more accurately than LTC when the VTR is stopped
or the tape speed is very low. VITC, however, cannot be
read when the tape speed is very fast.
CTL (control) signals are pulse signals that are recorded
horizontally in each frame.
3) User bits
Comprising a part of the time code, user bits record
supplementary information and consist of an eight-digit
number or hexadecimal A to F.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-3 TC Menu
Selecting the time code and the user bits
to be recorded
Use the [F6] (TCG SOURCE), [F7] (TCG MODE),
[F9] (DF/NDF), and [F10] (VITC) buttons in the TC
menu to specify the time code and the user bits to be
recorded. The specifications for the various button
settings are shown in the following table.
[F10] (VITC)
[F7] (TCG
[F6] (TCG
[F9] (DF/NDF) Time code and user bits recorded
MODE)
SOURCE)
V IN
Records the time code and the user bits input from the HD SDI
INPUT or SDTI (OPTION) IN1) connector to the video signal
AUX data area. The time code value generated by the time
code generator specified by the [F6] and [F7] buttons and the
user bits value generated by the user bits generator are
recorded longitudinally on the tape.
TCG
prst
DF/NDF/
auto2)
The time code value generated by the time code generator and
the user bits value generated by the user bits generator are
recorded. Any time code can be specified for the time code
generator and the user bits generator. The running mode for
the recorded time code data conforms to that specified by the
[F9] button.
regene3)
int-LTC
The time code value generated by the time code generator and
the user bits value generated by the user bits generator are
recorded. The time code generator and the user bits generator
lock to the time data recorded longitudinally on the tape.
int-VITC
The time code value generated by the time code generator and
the user bits value generated by the user bits generator are
recorded. The time code generator and the user bits generator
lock to the time data recorded in the video signal AUX data
area on the tape.
ext-LTC
The time code value generated by the time code generator and
the user bits value generated by the user bits generator are
recorded. The time code generator and the user bits generator
lock to the time data input from the TIME CODE IN connector.
ext-VITC
The time code value generated by the time code generator and
the user bits value generated by the user bits generator are
recorded. The time code generator and the user bits generator
lock to the time data input from the HD SDI INPUT or SDTI
(OPTION) IN1) connector.
auto
“regene/int-LTC” is set in assemble or insert mode and “prst” is
set in other modes.
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................
1) The SDTI (OPTION) IN connector is operative only
when the optional HKDV-506A SDTI Board is installed
and 701.VIDEO INPUT select in the VTR SETUP menu
is set to SDTI.
3) Specify the signal to be regenerated with 608.TCG/UBG
REGENE MODE in the VTR SETUP menu. Signals not
specified by this menu item are automatically set to
Preset mode, regardless of the [F7] button setting.
2) The DF/NDF setting on the [F9] button is applied to the
time code only when prst is specified by the [F7] button;
the DF/NDF setting is always applied for the CTL timer.
4-22
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To cancel entered values
Press the CLR button.
Setting time codes
To set time codes, select prst with the [F7] (TCG
MODE) button in the TC menu and then follow the
steps below.
3 Press the SET button to set the entered
value.
If you pressed the + or – button, then entered a
value, the result of calculation appears in the
display.
Note
• Set the [F8] (RUN MODE) button to rec before
setting the time data for recording. When you select
rec, time data advances from a set value only during
recording. When you select free, time code advances
in real time after the initial value has been set.
• During recording, VITC is always written to the
AUX data area of the video signal.
SET is displayed.
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min GREEN
TC
01 00 30 00
TIMER
SEL
SET
TC
PLAY
LOCK
TCR VITC
2FD F1
TIMER
RESET
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00
IN 00:01:10:00 OUT 00:02:10:00
TIMER
SET
TIMER
HOLD
1 4
2
TC
TCG
TCG
RUN
DF/NDF VITC
DF TCG
SEL
SOURCE MODE
MODE
VITC
int-L prst
rec
4 Press the [F3] (TIMER SET) button.
The input value is set as the time code and appears
in the time data display section.
3
Setting time codes
Notes
• Time codes from an external time code generator
cannot be set.
• Time codes cannot be set when the internal time code
generator is locked to external time codes or to time
codes read by the time code reader.
1 Press the [F1] (TIMER SEL) button to select the
TC (time code) to be set.
2 Enter the new setting in the data entry window
with the numeric buttons.
For example, to enter 01H00M30S00F, press 1, 0,
0, 3, 0, 0, 0. (The leading 0 is not required. When
the entered value is less than eight digits, the
leading digit(s) is (are) set to 0 when you press the
SET button.)
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min GREEN
TC
01 00 30 00
TIMER
SEL
Data entry
window
TC
PLAY
LOCK
TCR VITC
2FD F1
TIMER
RESET
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00
IN 00:01:10:00 OUT 00:02:10:00
TIMER
SET
TIMER
HOLD
TC
TCG
TCG
RUN
DF/NDF VITC
DF TCG
SEL
SOURCE MODE
MODE
VITC
int-L prst
rec
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-3 TC Menu
Setting the CTL timer
Recording the current time
1 Select CTL using the [F1] (TIMER SEL) button.
1 Select DF by pressing the [F9] (DF/NDF) button.
2 Enter data in the data entry window using the
2 Select free by pressing the [F8] (RUN MODE)
number buttons.
button.
3 Press the SET button to set the data.
3 Enter the target time with the numeric buttons
while verifying the data in the data entry window.
4 Press [F3] (TIMER SET).
4 When the target time arrives, press the [F3]
(TIMER SET) button.
Note
When ±12H is selected in the 604.TAPE TIMER
DISPLAY setting in the VTR SETUP menu and a
value of 10H or more is entered, the first digit will be
dropped.
The time code generator starts operating from the
specified time.
To pause the current time
Resetting time data
Press the [F4] (TIMER HOLD) button.
The time is paused only while the button is held down.
Press the [F2] (TIMER RESET) button.
The internal time code generator is reset according to
the setting of the [F1] (TIMER SEL) button.
4-3-2 Setting the Time Code
Reader (TCR SEL)
Resetting TC or UBIT data
The internal time code generator is reset and the time
data display becomes 00H00M00S00F (TC) or 00 00
00 00 (UBIT). Edit points are not affected.
Press the [F5] (TCR SEL) button to select the time
code to be read by the time code reader during
playback.
VITC: Reads VITC.
Notes
auto: Reads VITC when the playback speed is +/–1/
2 times normal speed or less, and LTC when it is
greater than +/–1/2 times normal speed.
LTC: Reads LTC.
Depending on the time code recorded on a tape, VITC
or LTC appears on the display.
• Time data read by the time code reader cannot be
reset.
• Time data cannot be reset when the internal time code
generator is locked to external time codes or to time
codes read by the time code reader.
Note
Setting the user bit value
Time codes that are read by the time code reader or
played back are output from the TIME CODE OUT
connector.
1 Select UBIT by pressing the [F1] (TIMER SEL)
button.
2 Enter the desired user bit value in hexadecimal
notation using the numeric buttons.
(Press the 0 to 5 buttons while holding down the
SFT button to enter the letters A to F.)
3 Press the [F3] (TIMER SET) button.
4-24
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Regenerated signals are selected using the 608.TCG/
UBG REGENE MODE setting in the VTR SETUP
menu.
4-3-3 Setting the Time Code
Generator (TCG SOURCE/MODE)
To check the running of the internal time code
generator
Press the INPUT CHECK button.
There are two ways to record time codes on the VTR.
One way is to record the output of the VTR’s internal
time code generator. The other is to directly record
time codes that are input from an external time code
generator.
The output from the internal time code generator can
either be set to a specified initial value, or
synchronized with an external time code generator.
The internal time code generator time code settings are
made with the [F6] (TCG SOURCE)/[F7] (TCG
MODE) buttons. Menu selections and settings are
shown below.
4-3-4 Selecting the Time Code
Running Mode (RUN MODE)
Press the [F8] (RUN MODE) button to select the time
code running mode.
free: The time code advances when the power is on
regardless of the VTR’s operation mode.
rec: The time code advances only during recording.
Menu [F6] (TCG
[F7] (TCG
Setting
SOURCE)
MODE)
TCG
Internal
TCG
(Preset)
prst
Time codes can
be freely set
using the
internal time
code generator
4-3-5 Selecting the Drop Frame
Mode (DF/NDF)
Internal
TCG
(Regenerate)
int-LTC
int-VITC
ext-LTC
ext-VITC
regene
regene
regene
regene
Lock to the time
data recorded
on the time code
tracks
Press the [F9] (DF/NDF) button to select the running
mode for the CTL counter and the time code generator.
DF: Drop frame mode1) (DF is displayed.)
NDF: Non-drop frame mode2) (NDF is displayed.)
auto: The unit switches to drop frame mode when the
field frequency is 59.94 Hz, and switches to non-
drop frame mode when the field frequency is
60 Hz.
Lock to the time
data recorded
as video AUX
data on the tape
Lock to the time
data on the
TIME CODE IN
connector
Note
• This setting is only active when the frame frequency
of the unit is 29.97 Hz or 30 Hz.
• When the [F7] (TCG MODE) button is set to regene,
the drop frame mode is inoperative since the time
code generator is synchronized to the playback time
code.
Lock to the time
data in the video
signal on the HD
SDI INPUT
connector
auto
“int-LTC/regene”
is set in assemble
or insert mode
and “prst” is set in
other modes
Note
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................
1) Drop frame mode
2) Non-drop frame mode
In order to compensate for differences between time
code values from the time code generator and the actual
time that occurs when the field frequency of this unit is
59.94 Hz, the drop frame mode causes the time code
generator to omit the first two frames (frame 00 and 01)
in each minute except the tenth.
In this mode, drop frame mode processing is not
performed. Since there is no frame cutting, a
discrepancy of about 86 seconds occurs each day (in the
case of a field frequency of 59.94 Hz).
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-3 TC Menu
2 Press the [F2] (PDPSET MENU) key.
4-3-6 Inserting VITC input source
(VITC)
The PDPSET menu appears.
Press the [F10] (VITC) button to select the VITC
source to be written in the video signal AUX data area.
TCG: Inserts values generated by the internal time
code generator into the VITC.
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min GREEN
PDPSET
PRESET
MODE
TCR 00:00:00:00
24F
24F TC
PDTIME
SET
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
V IN: Inserts the VITC from the video input signal
directly.
30F TC
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
PDTC
EXIT
DF/NDF
NDF
4-3-7 Selecting CTL Display
Mode (TAPE TIMER)
3 Press the [F1] (PRESET MODE) key to select 24F
or 30F time code to be preset. The selected time
code is framed with the thick line.
Press the ALT button, then the [F1] (TAPE TIMER)
button to select a 12-hour or 24-hour clock for the
CTL display.
+/–12H: 12-hour clock
24H: 24-hour clock
24F: Presets the 24 frames time code. The A
frame of the pull down sequence is preset.
30F: Presets the 30 frames time code. The A
frame of the pull down sequence is preset.
4 •When 30F is selected in the step 3,
Press the [F6] (PDTC DF/NDF) key to select DF
or NDF.
4-3-8 Presetting Pull Down Time
Code (PDPSET MENU)
(when HKDV-507/507D is installed)
This selection is effective only for 30F time code.
DF: Drop frame mode
NDF: Non-drop frame mode
auto: The unit switches the running mode (DF/
NDF) automatically according to the frame
frequency of the unit. When the frame
frequency is 23.976 Hz, the unit switches to the
drop frame mode and switches to the non-drop
frame mode when it is 24 Hz.
To preset the pull down time code when this VTR is
operated in 23.98PsF/ 24PsF mode, follow the steps
below.
4
3
5 6
2,7
•When 24F is selected in the step 3,
Skip this step.
5 Enter the time code data in the data entry window
with numeric keys.
1
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min GREEN
PDPSET
PRESET
MODE
Data entry
window
01 00 30 00
TCR 00:00:00:00
24F
1 Press the TC button, then press the ALT button.
24F TC
PDTIME
SET
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
The ALT+TC menu appears.
30F TC
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
PDTC
EXIT
DF/NDF
DF
4-26
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 Press the SET button to set the input data.
4-3-9 Presetting for Conversion
From 24-frame Into 25-frame
Time Code (TCCONV MEMU)
SET is
displayed.
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min GREEN
PDPSET
01 00 30 00
TCR 00:00:00:00
PRESET
MODE
SET
24F
24F TC
PDTIME
SET
When the VTR is operated in 25PsF/50i mode, follow
the steps below to make the settings for 25-frame
converted time code.
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
30F TC
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
PDTC
2
EXIT
DF/NDF
DF
7 Press the [F2] (PDTIME SET) key.
3
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min GREEN
PDPSET
PRESET
MODE
TCR 00:00:00:00
24F
24F TC
PDTIME
SET
1
01Ó00µ30ß00ƒ
1 Press the TC button, and then press the ALT
30F TC
button.
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
PDTC
The ALT+TC menu appears.
EXIT
DF/NDF
DF
2 Press the [F3] (TCCONV MENU) button.
The TC CONVERT menu appears.
Notes
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min GREEN
TC CONVERT
• Once the time code is preset, it cannot be reverted.
• Operation information display cannot be displayed
while the pull down time code appears.
• The pull down time code cannot be displayed while
the machine-to-machine editing display appears.
TCR 00:00:00:00
24F STARTING TC
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
24F JUMPING TC
TC
CONV
21Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
on
24F CURRENT TC
ORG TC
DISP
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
START START
on
JUMP
EXIT
TC PST TC ENT TC SEL
-3H
24F STARTING TC: Time code used as a reference
when converting 24-frame time code into 25-
frame time code.
24F JUMPING TC: The loopback point for
converting 24-frame time code to 25-frame time
code with 24F STARTING TC as the reference
and the conversion done in both forward and
reverse directions. Note that the part of the 25-
frame time code before 24F JUMPING TC is not
consecutive with the part after 24F JUMPING TC.
(Continued)
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-3 TC Menu
The table below shows an example of how the 25-
frame time code is not consecutive when 24F
STARTING TC is set to 01:00:00:00 and 24F
JUMPING TC is set to 22:00:00:00 (i.e., JUMP TC
SEL is set to –3H).
To preset the 24F STARTING TC using the
numeric buttons
24 Frames TC 25 Frames TC
2
3 4
JUMPING TC
22:00:00:00
20:09:36:00
:
:
01:00:01:01
01:00:01:00
:
01:00:01:00
01:00:00:24
:
Forward direction
>
STARTING TC 01:00:00:00
01:00:00:00
00:59:59:24
:
>
00:59:59:23
Reverse direction
:
1
22:00:00:01
22:07:12:01
21:09:36:00
Non-consecutive
part
1 Press the TC button, and then press the ALT
button.
JUMPING TC
22:00:00:00
The ALT+TC menu appears.
3 If necessary, use the function buttons to change the
settings.
2 Press the [F3] (TCCONV MENU) button.
For details on the settings made by these buttons,
see the table below.
The TC CONVERT menu appears.
3 Enter the time code in the data entry window with
TC CONVERT menu
the numeric buttons.
Indication
Function
Button
[F3]
TC CONV
Specifies whether the time code
is converted to 25-frame time
code or not.
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min GREEN
TC CONVERT
01 00 00 00
Data entry window
TCR 00:00:00:00
24F STARTING TC
[F4]
ORG TC DISP Specifies whether the 24-frame
time code is displayed or not on
two lines in the HOME, TC, and
PF menus along with the
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
24F JUMPING TC
TC
CONV
21Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
on
24F CURRENT TC
ORG TC
DISP
converted time code.
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
START START
on
[F6]
[F7]
[F8]
START TC
PST
Press to preset the 24F
STARTING TC using the
numeric buttons.
JUMP
EXIT
TC PST TC ENT TC SEL
-3H
START TC
ENT
Press to enter the current time
code as the 24F STARTING
TC.
4 Press the SET button to set the time code.
JUMP TC SEL Selects the 24F JUMPING TC
as an interval from 24F
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min GREEN
TC CONVERT
STARTING TC.
Selectable values: –3H, –2H, –
TCR 00:00:00:00
24F STARTING TC
1H, +1H, +2H, +3H, 0H
01Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
[F10]
EXIT
Select to exit the TC CONVERT
menu.
24F JUMPING TC
TC
CONV
22Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
on
24F CURRENT TC
ORG TC
DISP
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
START START
on
JUMP
EXIT
TC PST TC ENT TC SEL
-3H
4-28
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-3-10 Conversion of Time Code
During Playback in 25F Mode (TC
CONV)
4-3-11 Displaying the Pull Down
Time Code (when HKDV-507/
507D is installed)
When the cassette tape recorded in 24F mode is played
back in 25F mode (off-speed playback), it is possible
to convert 24-frame time code to the 25-frame time
code.
To display the pull down time code, follow the steps
below.
1 Press the TC button, then press the ALT button.
To convert the time code, follow the steps below.
2
2,3
1
1
2 Press the [F4] (PDTC DISP) key to select “on”.
on: Displays the pull down time code.
1 Press the TC button, and then press the ALT
button.
off: Does not display the pull down time code.
The ALT+TC menu appears.
CH.COND
GREEN
ALT+TC
TAPE
2 Press the [F3] (TCCONV MENU) button.
TIMER
PLAY
LOCK
12H
The TC CONVERT menu appears.
TCR
2FD F1
PDPSET
MENU
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
3 Press the [F3] (TC CONV) button to select “on.”
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00
IN 00:01:20:00 OUT 00:02:20:00
PD
TC
CONV
Each time you press the button, “on” and “off”
off
alternate.
PDTC
DISP
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
on: 24-frame time code is converted to 25-frame time
off
PD
CHARA CHARA CHARA
VITC
VITC
code.
CHARA SUPER H-POS V-POS POS-1 POS-2
off off 10 10 16 16
off: 24-frame time code is not converted to 25-frame
time code.
Notes
• This setting is only active when the frame frequency
of the unit is 25PsF or 50i.
• This setting is effective only for the VITC and time
code of SONY 9PIN protocol. From the TIME
CODE OUT connector, 24 frames time code is
output.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-3 TC Menu
1 Types of time data
4-3-12 Superimposition of
Character Information (PD
CHARA/CHARA SUPER/H-POS/
V-POS)
Symbol
Meaning
CTL
CTL counter data
TCR
LTC reader time code data
LTC reader user bit data
UBR
TCR.
UBR.
TCG
VITC reader time code data
VITC reader user bit data
Time code data from the time code generator
User bit data from the time code generator
To superimpose the characters representing time code
data and operation mode information on the output
signals, use the [F4] (PD CHARA) and [F6] (CHARA
SUPER) buttons.
UBG
Button Setting Connector to which the
characters are superimposed
Note
ALT/[F4] on
PULL DOWN OUT connector (on two
connectors)
When time data or user bits are not read correctly, a
“*” will be displayed in this block so that the symbols
become “T*R”, “U*R”, etc.
ALT/[F6] on
•HD SDI MONITOR connector
•COMPOSITE (SUPER) connector
of D CONV. OUT(OPTION)
•3(SUPER) of connector D CONV. SDI
OUT(OPTION)
2 Time code reader drop frame marks
“ • ”: drop frame mode
“ : ”: non-drop frame mode
3 Time code generator drop frame marks
“ • ”: drop frame mode
Contents of superimposed data
“ : ”: non-drop frame mode
1 Types of time data
4 VITC data field marks
“
”: (blank space) fields 1 and 3
Time data
“ * ”: fields 2 and 4
2 Drop frame mark of the time
code reader
5 Operation mode
3 Drop frame mark of the time
The contents are divided into blocks A and B as shown
below.
code generator
A block indicates the operation mode.
B block indicates the tape speed or servo lock status.
4 Field mark of the
VITC data
T
C
R
S
.
2
3
T
:
5
L
9
.
4
0
T
.
I
1
L
8
L
*
H
U
T
E
S
5 Control VTR indication
Contents of superimposed data
A
B
Note
The example above shows the factory-set contents of
data.
By changing the 626.DISPLAY INFORMATION
select setting in the VTR SETUP menu, different types
of information can also be displayed on the second
line.
4-30
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation modes
Operation mode
Display
A block
B block
TAPE UNTHREAD
STANDBY OFF
T.RELEASE
STOP
Cassette not inserted
Standby off mode
Tension release mode
Stop mode
PREROLL
PLAY
Preroll mode
Playback mode (servo unlocked)
Playback mode (servo locked)
Capstan override mode
PLAY
LOCK
PLY-SPD
Speed shift from
normal speed (%)
REC
Record mode (servo unlocked)
Record mode (servo locked)
Edit mode (servo unlocked)
Edit mode (servo locked)
Still-picture jog mode
Forward jog (” is lit)
Reverse jog (“ is lit)
Shuttle mode
REC
LOCK
EDIT
EDIT
LOCK
JOG
STILL
JOG
FWD
JOG
REV
SHUTTLE
VAR
(speed)
(speed)
(speeda))
(speeda))
Variable mode
DMC
DMC memorize mode
DMC edit preview mode
DMC edit mode
D-PREV
DMC EDIT
DMC-SPD
PREVIEW
AUTO EDIT
REVIEW
(speed)
DMC initial speed setting
Preview mode
Auto edit mode
Review mode
a) Initial speed or memorized speed
For details about the warning messages, see “Warning
Messages” on page A-10.
To display a warning message
When there are multiple warning messages, each
message flashes twice before it is replaced by the next
message. When there is no warning message, the
items set in 626. DISPLAY INFORMATION select in
the VTR SETUP menu flashes on the second line
instead.
T C R . 2 3 : 5 9 : 4 0 : 1 8
*
O
E X T E R N A L
R E F E
N
The first 16 characters of the
warning message
Set 626. DISPLAY INFORMATION select in the
VTR SETUP menu to any setting other than time data
only and set 627. CHAR WARNING DISPLAY at
dual line mode in the VTR SETUP menu to on. The
first 16 characters of the warning message flashes on
the second line.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-3 TC Menu
To display remaining time on the tape
Use the 628.REMAIN TIME DISPLAY to display
remaining time on the tape.
4-3-13 Setting the VITC Insertion
Line (VITC POS-1/POS-2)
off: Do not display remaining time.
10min: Display remaining time when it is 10
minutes or less.
VITC signals can be inserted at two positions in the
output signal from the HD-SD converter.
on: Always display remaining time.
When remaining time is 23 minutes.
T C R . 2 3 : 5 9 : 4 0 : 1 8 R 2 3
*
When remaining time is five minutes.
1,3 2
T C R . 2 3 : 5 9 : 4 0 : 1 8
R
R
5
*
Setting the VITC insertion line (VITC POS-1/POS-2)
When remaining time is 100 minutes or over.
1 Press the ALT button, then the [F9] (VITC POS-1)
button.
T C R . 2 3 : 5 9 : 4 0 : 1 8
*
- -
The setting display part is lit.
Examples of remaining time display
2 Press the G or g button to change the value.
Changing the superimpose position
You can also use the + or – button.
The superimpose position can be set to 16 different
positions in the horizontal directions (0-15) and 24
different positions in the vertical directions (0-23).
3 Press the [F9] (VITC POS-1) button.
The data setting is completed and the setting
display disappears. Switching to another menu also
completes the setting display disappears.
Following the same steps but using the [F10] (VITC
POS-2) button, VITC can be inserted on another line.
2
1,3
1 Press the ALT/[F7] (CHARA H-POS) button to
change the horizontal position and the [F8]
(CHARA V-POS) to change the vertical position.
The setting display part is lit.
2 Use the [<] and [>] buttons to change the value.
The + and – buttons can also be used.
3 Press the ALT/[F7] (CHARA H-POS) button or the
[F8] (CHARA V-POS) button. The positions are
set and the setting display disappears.
The positions are also set if another menu is
selected.
4-32
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The table below shows an example of how the 24-
frame time code is not consecutive when 25F
STARTING TC is set to 01:00:00:00 and 25F
JUMPING TC is set to 22:00:00:00 (i.e., JUMP TC
SEL is set to –3H).
4-3-14 Presetting for Conversion
From 25-frame Into 24-frame
Time Code (TCCONV MENU)
When the VTR is operated in 23.98PsF/24PsF mode,
follow the steps below to make the settings for 24-
frame converted time code.
25 Frames TC 24 Frames TC
JUMPING TC
22:00:00:00
22:52:30:00
:
:
01:00:01:24
01:00:00:23
:
01:00:01:00
01:00:00:23
:
Forward direction
2
>
STARTING TC 01:00:00:00
01:00:00:00
00:00:59:23
:
>
00:00:59:24
Reverse direction
:
3
22:00:00:01
21:52:30:01
22:52:30:00
Non-consecutive
part
JUMPING TC
22:00:00:00
1
3 If necessary, use the function buttons to change the
settings.
1 Press the TC button, and then press the ALT
button.
For details on the settings made by these buttons,
see the table below.
The ALT+TC menu appears.
TC CONVERT menu
2 Press the [F3] (TCCONV MENU) button.
Indication
Function
Button
The TC CONVERT menu appears.
[F3]
TC CONV
Specifies whether the time code
is converted to 24-frame time
code or not.
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min GREEN
TC CONVERT
TCR 00:00:00:00
[F4]
ORG TC DISP Specifies whether the 25-frame
time code is displayed or not on
two lines in the HOME, TC, and
PF menus along with the
25F STARTING TC
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
25F JUMPING TC
TC
CONV
converted time code.
21Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
on
25F CURRENT TC
ORG TC
DISP
[F6]
[F7]
[F8]
START TC
PST
Press to preset the 25F
STARTING TC using the
numeric buttons.
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
START START
on
JUMP
EXIT
TC PST TC ENT TC SEL
-3H
START TC
ENT
Press to enter the current time
code as the 25F STARTING
TC.
JUMP TC SEL Selects the 25F JUMPING TC
as an interval from 25F
25F STARTING TC: Time code used as a reference
when converting 25-frame time code into 24-
frame time code.
25F JUMPING TC: The loopback point for
converting 25-frame time code to 24-frame time
code with 25F STARTING TC as the reference
and the conversion done in both forward and
reverse directions. Note that the part of the 24-
frame time code before 25F JUMPING TC is not
consecutive with the part after 25F JUMPING TC.
STARTING TC.
Selectable values: –3H, –2H, –
1H, +1H, +2H, +3H, 0H
[F10]
EXIT
Select to exit the TC CONVERT
menu.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-3 TC Menu
To preset the 25F STARTING TC using the
numeric buttons
4-3-15 Conversion of Time Code
During Playback in 24F Mode (TC
CONV)
When the cassette tape recorded in 25F mode is played
back in 24F mode (off-speed playback), it is possible
to convert 25-frame time code to the 24-frame time
code.
2
3 4
To convert the time code, follow the steps below.
2,3
1
1 Press the TC button, and then press the ALT
button.
The ALT+TC menu appears.
2 Press the [F3] (TCCONV MENU) button.
1
The TC CONVERT menu appears.
1 Press the TC button, and then press the ALT
3 Enter the time code in the data entry window with
button.
the numeric buttons.
The ALT+TC menu appears.
2 Press the [F3] (TCCONV MENU) button.
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min GREEN
TC CONVERT
01 00 00 00
Data entry window
The TC CONVERT menu appears.
TCR 00:00:00:00
25F STARTING TC
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
3 Press the [F3] (TC CONV) button to select “on.”
25F JUMPING TC
TC
Each time you press the button, “on” and “off”
CONV
21Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
on
alternate.
25F CURRENT TC
ORG TC
DISP
on: 25-frame time code is converted to 24-frame time
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
START START
on
code.
JUMP
EXIT
TC PST TC ENT TC SEL
-3H
off: 25-frame time code is not converted to 24-frame
time code.
Notes
4 Press the SET button to set the time code.
• This setting is only active when the frame frequency
of the unit is 23.98PsF or 24PsF.
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min GREEN
TC CONVERT
• This setting is effective only for the VITC and time
code of SONY 9PIN protocol. From the TIME
CODE OUT connector, 25 frames time code is
output.
TCR 00:00:00:00
25F STARTING TC
01Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
25F JUMPING TC
TC
CONV
22Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
on
25F CURRENT TC
ORG TC
DISP
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
START START
on
JUMP
EXIT
TC PST TC ENT TC SEL
-3H
4-34
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4 CUE Menu
The HDW-F500 allows you to register up to 100 cue
points (0 to 99), and to manage cue points in groups of
10 (per page).
Cue point settings, deletions, and page settings are
done through the CUE menu.
Note
Cue point data is factory set to be erased when a
cassette is inserted.
To select whether to erase cue point data
when a cassette is inserted.
Press the [F10] (M-CUE CLEAR) button to select
whether to erase cue point data when a cassette is
inserted.
For details on storing cue point data, refer to “4-1-5
Memory Card Function” on page 4-6.
To activate the CUE menu
Press the CUE button.
on: Erase cue point data.
off: Do not erase cue point data.
Data entry window
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min
EOS 00:00:00:00 TCR 00:00:00:00
[I ÅM CUE TITLE
CUE
PREV
PÅGE
]
Title
NEXT
PÅGE
PÅGE: 0
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
00:01:10:00
00:02:10:00
00:03:10:00
00:04:10:00
00:05:10:00
00:06:10:00
00:07:10:00
00:08:10:00
00:09:10:00
00:10:10:00
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Page number indication
Cue point indication
TELE
FILE
CUE
PÅGE CUENUM M-CUE
SET SET CLEAR
P-ROLL
CUE menu display
CUEmenu
Button
[F1]
Indication
Function
Settings
PREV PAGE
NEXT PAGE
TELEFILE
Showsthepreviouspage.
Showsthenextpage.
[F2]
[F4]
OpenstheTELEFILEmenu.
[F5]
Specifiestheprerolltimetoacuepoint.
Specifiesthepagenumber.
CUE P-ROLL
PAGE SET
0 to 30 s
on,off
[F8]
[F9]
CUENUM SET
M-CUE CLEAR
PAGE MODE
EXTEND MODE
Specifiesthecuenumber.
Erasescuepointdatawhenacassetteisinserted.
SelectsPAGEmode.
[F10]
ALT/[F8]
ALT/[F9]
SelectsEXTENDmode.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4 CUE Menu
4-4-2 Registering Cue Points
4-4-1 Selecting a Multi-Cue Mode
There are two ways to register cue points: (1) by direct
registration of the tape address when the ENTRY
button is pressed, and (2) by the entry of cue point data
with the numeric buttons.
The HDW-F500 has the following two multi-cue
modes.
PAGE mode
Registering cue points by pressing the
ENTRY button
Press the ALT button, then the [F8] (PAGE MODE)
button.
In PAGE mode, cue point data can be accessed by
page number, thus speeding up cue point registration
and cuing operations.
2
Display
Cue points are displayed in groups of 10, number 0 to
9, 10 to 19, etc. Each display is a page.
Selecting a page
There are the three following ways to select a page:
• Press the [F1] (PREV PAGE) button.
The previous page is shown.
• Press the [F2] (NEXT PAGE) button.
The next page is shown.
1 5 3
4
Registering cue points by pressing the ENTRY button
• Enter the desired page number with the numeric
button, then press the [F8] (PAGE SET) button.
If you enter 1, for example, page one appears,
containing cue point numbers 10 to 19.
1 Press the ALT button, then the [F8] (PAGE
MODE) button or the [F9] (EXTEND MODE)
button.
2 If you selected PAGE mode, press the [F1] (PREV
PAGE) button or [F2] (NEXT PAGE) button (or
use the numeric buttons to enter the page number
in the data entry window, then press the [F8]
(PAGE SET) button).
EXTEND mode
Press the ALT button, then the [F9] (EXTEND
MODE) button.
In EXTEND mode, you can do operations that cannot
be done in page units, such as the consecutive
registration of more than 10 cue points.
3 Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to
the cue number to be registered.
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min
EOS 00:00:00:00 TCR 00:00:00:00
[I ÅM CUE TITLE
CUE
PREV
PÅGE
Display
The screen displays a list of 100 consecutive cue
points which can be scrolled. Press the G or g button
to scroll the list. Page columns are not displayed.
]
NEXT
PÅGE
PÅGE: 0
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
00:01:10:00
00:02:10:00
00:03:10:00
00:04:10:00
00:05:10:00
00:06:10:00
00:07:10:00
00:08:10:00
00:09:10:00
00:10:10:00
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
To quickly scroll through a list
Press the G or g button while holding down the SFT
button.
TELE
FILE
CUE
PÅGE CUENUM M-CUE
SET SET CLEAR
P-ROLL
4-36
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To select the cue number directly by
numeric buttons
Enter the cue number in the data entry window
with the numeric buttons, then press the [F9]
(CUENUM SET) button.
Registering cue points by the numeric
buttons
2
4
4 Press the JOG or VAR button, then rotate the
search dial to find the position where you want to
register the cue point.
5 Press the ENTRY button at the selected position.
The current tape address of the position where the
button is pressed is registered as a cue point.
Press the ENTRY button repeatedly to register the
cue point repeatedly. The cue number will
automatically increment by one each time.
1 5 3
Registering cue points by the numeric buttons
1 Press the ALT button, then the [F8] (PAGE
MODE) button or the [F9] (EXTEND MODE)
button.
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min
EOS 00:00:00:00 TCR 00:00:00:00
[I ÅM CUE TITLE
CUE
PREV
PÅGE
]
NEXT
PÅGE
PÅGE: 0
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
00:01:10:00
00:02:10:00
00:03:10:00
00:04:10:00
00:05:10:00
00:06:10:00
00:07:10:00
00:08:10:00
00:09:10:00
00:10:10:00
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2 If you selected PAGE mode, press the [F1] (PREV
PAGE) button or [F2] (NEXT PAGE) button (or
use the numeric buttons to enter the page number
in the data entry window, then press the [F8]
(PAGE SET) button).
TELE
FILE
CUE
PÅGE CUENUM M-CUE
SET SET CLEAR
P-ROLL
3 Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to
the cue number to be registered.
Note
In PAGE mode, the cue number advances only within
the current page when the ENTRY button is pressed
repeatedly. For example, after cue number 19 is
registered and the ENTRY button is pressed, the cue
point 10 comes up as the next cue point. In EXTEND
mode, if you press the ENTRY button after registering,
for example, cue point No.99, the next cue point is
registered to cue point No.99 again.
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min
EOS 00:00:00:00 TCR 00:00:00:00
[I ÅM CUE TITLE
CUE
PREV
PÅGE
]
NEXT
PÅGE
PÅGE: 0
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
00:01:10:00
00:02:10:00
00:03:10:00
00:04:10:00
00:05:10:00
00:06:10:00
00:07:10:00
00:08:10:00
00:09:10:00
00:10:10:00
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TELE
FILE
CUE
PÅGE CUENUM M-CUE
SET SET CLEAR
P-ROLL
To select the cue number directly by the
numeric buttons
Enter the cue number in the data entry window
with the numeric buttons, then press the [F9]
(CUENUM SET) button.
(Continued)
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4 CUE Menu
4 Enter the cue point data in the data entry window
with the numeric buttons, then press the SET
button.
4-4-3 Erasing Cue Point Data
To erase any cue point data, blank out the data entry
window, then do the cue point registration procedure.
For example, to enter 00:01:30:00, press 0, 0, 1, 3,
0, 0, 0. (The leading 0 is not required. When the
entered value is less than eight digits, the leading
digit(s) is (are) set to 0 when you press the SET
button.)
2
4
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min
CUE
00 01 30 00
TCR 00:00:00:00
PREV
PÅGE
SET
Entered data
[I ÅM CUE
TITLE
]
NEXT
PÅGE
PÅGE: 0
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
00:01:10:00
00:02:10:00
00:03:10:00
00:04:10:00
00:05:10:00
00:06:10:00
00:07:10:00
00:08:10:00
00:09:10:00
00:10:10:00
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 5 3
TELE
FILE
Erasing cue point data
CUE
PÅGE CUENUM M-CUE
SET SET CLEAR
P-ROLL
1 Press the ALT button, then the [F8] (PAGE
MODE) button or the [F9] (EXTEND MODE)
button.
To modify current cue point data
Press the + or – button, enter the value to be added
or subtracted, then press the SET button.
The computation is performed and the results
appear in the data entry window.
2 If you selected PAGE mode, press the [F1] (PREV
PAGE) button or [F2] (NEXT PAGE) button (or
use the numeric buttons to enter the page number
in the data entry window, then press the [F8]
(PAGE SET) button).
5 Press the ENTRY button to set the entered data.
The data are registered in the cue point data
indication.
3 Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to
the cue number to be erased.
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min
EOS 00:00:00:00 TCR 00:00:00:00
[I ÅM CUE TITLE
CUE
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min
CUE
PREV
PÅGE
PREV
PÅGE
TCR 00:00:00:00
]
[I ÅM CUE
TITLE
]
NEXT
PÅGE
NEXT
PÅGE
PÅGE: 0
PÅGE: 0
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
00:01:10:00
00:02:10:00
00:03:10:00
00:04:10:00
00:05:10:00
00:06:10:00
00:07:10:00
00:08:10:00
00:09:10:00
00:10:10:00
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
00:01:10:00
00:01:30:00
00:03:10:00
00:04:10:00
00:05:10:00
00:06:10:00
00:07:10:00
00:08:10:00
00:09:10:00
00:10:10:00
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TELE
FILE
TELE
FILE
CUE
PÅGE CUENUM M-CUE
SET SET CLEAR
CUE
PÅGE CUENUM M-CUE
SET SET CLEAR
P-ROLL
P-ROLL
To select the cue number directly by
the numeric buttons
Enter the cue number in the data entry window
with the numeric buttons, then press the [F9]
(CUENUM SET) button.
4-38
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Press the CLR button then the SET button.
4-4-4 Prerolling to a Cue Point
“SET” appears in the data entry window.
Select the preroll time to a cue point with pressing the
[F5] button.
You can set a preroll time of 0 to 30 seconds in 1-
second units.
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min
EOS 00:00:00:00 TCR 00:00:00:00
[I ÅM CUE TITLE
CUE
PREV
PÅGE
SET
Data entry
window
]
NEXT
PÅGE
PÅGE: 0
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
00:01:10:00
00:02:10:00
00:03:10:00
00:04:10:00
00:05:10:00
00:06:10:00
00:07:10:00
00:08:10:00
00:09:10:00
00:10:10:00
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Prerolling to a cue point
TELE
FILE
CUE
PÅGE CUENUM M-CUE
SET SET CLEAR
P-ROLL
2
5 Press the ENTRY button.
Data for the specified cue number are erased and
the data column becomes blank.
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min
EOS 00:00:00:00 TCR 00:00:00:00
[I ÅM CUE TITLE
CUE
PREV
PÅGE
1
3 4
]
NEXT
PÅGE
PÅGE: 0
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
00:01:10:00
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Erased cue point
00:03:10:00
00:04:10:00
00:05:10:00
00:06:10:00
00:07:10:00
00:08:10:00
00:09:10:00
00:10:10:00
Prerolling to a cue point
TELE
FILE
1 Press the ALT button, then the [F8] (PAGE
MODE) button or the [F9] (EXTEND MODE)
button.
CUE
PÅGE CUENUM M-CUE
SET SET CLEAR
P-ROLL
2 If you selected PAGE mode, press the [F1] (PREV
PAGE) button or [F2] (NEXT PAGE) button (or
use the numeric buttons to enter the page number
in the data entry window, then press the [F8]
(PAGE SET) button).
To erase all cue point data
Press the CLR button while holding down the SFT
button. A message asking you to confirm the
operation appears in the display.
In EXTEND mode, press the CLR button while
holding down the SFT button again to erase all
data for cue points No. 0 to No. 99.
In PAGE mode, press the CLR button while
holding down the SFT button again to erase data
for the cue points on the current page.
3 Press the G or g button to move the cursor (z) to
the cue number.
To select the cue number directly by the
numeric buttons
Enter the cue number in the data entry window
with the numeric buttons, then press the [F9]
(CUENUM SET) button.
4 Press the PREROLL button.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4 CUE Menu
4-4-5 Changing a Cue Point Into
an Edit Point
4-4-6 Backspace Editing
You can perform backspace editing with the CUE
menu. In backspace editing, assemble editing is
performed from the recording end point. Since the
data specifying recording end point are cleared when
you eject the tape, after inserting a tape, you must
record for at least one minute or so on the tape before
you can do backspace editing. After recording, the
present end of the recorded position becomes the
recording end point. When you press the REC/EDIT
button afterwards, the VTR automatically prerolls a
few seconds before the recording end point and starts
assemble editing. If no data for the recording end
point exist, backspace editing is not performed.
Follow the procedures below to change a selected cue
point into an edit point.
To change an edit point into an IN point
Press the SET button while hoding down the IN
button.
To change an edit point into an OUT point
Press the SET button while holding down the OUT
button.
To change an edit point into an AUDIO IN
point
Note
Press the SET button while holding down the AUDIO
IN button.
Cue point data is cleared when a cassette is inserted.
However, cue point data recalled from a memory card
before a cassette is inserted is not cleared when a
cassette is inserted.
To change an edit point into an AUDIO OUT
point
Press the SET button while holding down the AUDIO
OUT button.
AUDIO IN button AUDIO OUT button
IN button
SET button
OUT button
4-40
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4-7 TELE FILE Menu
Use the TELE FILE menu to read and update cue point
information, log(IN/OUT points) information and
cassette-management information on optional MLB-
1B-100 memory labels.
Operations through the TELE FILE menu can be
carried out from either the control panel of the VTR or
a personal computer connected to the VTR. To use the
control panel, specify “control panel” for item
123.Tele-File CONTROL MODE in the VTR SETUP
menu. To use a personal computer, specify “RS-
232C.”
Exiting the TELE FILE menu
Press the [F10] (WRITE/EXIT) button. The entered or
modified data is saved to the memory label and the
VTR exits the TELE FILE menu.
Note
If TELE FILE menu operations are prohibited (see
page 4-39) while the contents of a memory label are
being modified, only the data modified prior to the
prohibition will be saved to the memory label when the
[F10](WRITE/EXIT) button is pressed.
Note
Before you can use the menu to operate the VTR from
a personal computer, the optional MLZ-100 memory
label application software must be installed in the
computer.
To exit the TELE FILE menu without saving
data to a memory label
Press the EJECT button. Or, press the ALT/[F2]
(UNDO ALL) buttons to display a message (in the
control panel display) requesting confirmation of the
undoing operation. Then press the [F2](UNDO ALL)
button while pressing down the SFT button. All
changes to the memory label will be cancelled.
For details on the use of a personal computer, refer to the
operation manual supplied with the optional MLZ-100
memory label application software.
The explanations of menu operations in this chapter
assume the use of the VTR control panel.
Note
When you press the EJECT button, all controls on the
VTR will become inoperable until the cassette is
completely ejected.
Opening the TELE FILE menu
If you accidentally press the EJECT button
before saving data to a memory label
Insert the cassette again within 30 seconds after the
ejection and press the [F10](WRITE/EXIT) button.
The data that existed before the ejection of the cassette
is saved to the memory label.
Do one of the following:
• Press the [F4] (TELE FILE) button while in the CUE
menu.
• Select “on” for item 124.Tele-File MENU auto popup
in the VTR SETUP menu. Then, with the HOME,
TC, CUE, or SETUP menu open, insert a cassette
bearing an optional MLB-1B-100 memory label into
the VTR.
To change the information displayed in the
TELE FILE menu
Press the [<] or [>] button.
To display log data (IN or OUT points) in the
TELE FILE menu
Do one of the following:
• Press the [F2] (ENTRY POINT) button while in the
TELE FILE menu. Then select “INPUT.”
• Select “IN/OUT Point” for item 126.Tele-File
ENTRY POINT in the VTR SETUP menu.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4 CUE Menu
Four levels of information can be displayed in the TELE File menu and the levels can be scrolled to the left or
right by pressing the [<] or [>] button.
CH.COND
TELE FILE
CUE
CH.COND
TELE FILE
CUE
SCAN
1
2
SCAN
TCR 00:00:00:00
Rest 50%
TCR 00:00:00:00
Rest 50%
REC DATE[1998/02/10]
ENTRY
POINT
REC DATE[1998/02/10]
ENTRY
POINT
TITLE[NAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL]
TITLE[NAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL]
No.
Time
Mrk
NG
KP
OK
OK
NG
OK
IN
No.
OUT
Tk
1
Cut
0015
0015
0015
017~
Scn
A01
A01
A01
A01
B20
B20
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
00:01:02:03
--:--:--:--
00:03:04:03
00:04:04:03
00:05:05:03
00:06:06:03
--:--:--:--
00:01:01:03
--:--:--:--
00:03:03:03
00:04:03:03
00:05:04:03
00:06:05:03
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
00:01:02:03
--:--:--:--
00:03:04:03
00:04:05:03
00:05:06:03
00:06:07:03
--:--:--:--
COMMNT
EDIT
COMMNT
EDIT
2
@
3
1
1
CHANGE
DATA
CHANGE
DATA
2
DEL
MARK
PRO-
TECT
TAPE CUENUM WRITE/
DEL
MARK
PRO-
TECT
TAPE CUENUM WRITE/
POINT
INFO
POINT
EXIT
POINT
INFO
POINT
EXIT
3
45
8
9
!º
Line number
TELE FILE menu display 1
TELE FILE menu display 3
CH.COND
TELE FILE
CUE
CH.COND
TELE FILE
CUE
SCAN
SCAN
TCR 00:00:00:00
Rest 50%
TCR 00:00:00:00
Rest 50%
REC DATE[1998/02/10]
ENTRY
POINT
REC DATE[1998/02/10]
ENTRY
POINT
TITLE[NAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL]
TITLE[NAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL]
No. IN
OUT
No.
Comment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
00:01:02:03
00:01:03:03
--:--:--:--
00:04:05:03
00:05:05:03
00:06:06:03
00:07:05:03
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Noisy
COMMNT
EDIT
COMMNT
EDIT
--:--:--:--
00:03:04:03
00:04:04:03
00:05:05:03
00:06:06:03
--:--:--:--
Holiday
Pretty Good
for NG Awards
Goal
!¡
CHANGE
DATA
CHANGE
DATA
Celebration
DEL
MARK
PRO-
TECT
TAPE CUENUM WRITE/
DEL
MARK
PRO-
TECT
TAPE CUENUM WRITE/
INFO
POINT EXIT
POINT
INFO
POINT
EXIT
POINT
6
7
TELE FILE menu display 2
TELE FILE menu display 4
1REC DATE
Displays the date the memory label contents were last
modified.
8Tk
Displays the take number of the cue point.
2TITLE
9Cut
Displays the cassette title.
Displays the cut number of the cue point.
3Time
!ºScn
Displays the time data of the cue point.
Displays the scene number of the cue point.
4Mrk
!¡Comment
Displays the cue point attribute (OK/NG/KP/no
attribute).
Displays the comment for a cue point.
5Recording start point setting
Recording start points are indicated by an @ mark.
6IN
Displays IN point data.
7OUT
Displays OUT point data.
4-42
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TELEFILEmenu
Formatting a memory label
Button Indication
Function
[F1]
CUE SCAN
Specifiesthedirectionofthe
cursormovementwhenthe
PREROLLbuttonispressed.
1 Press the ALT/[F1] (FORMAT T-Fil) buttons.
2 Press the [F1] (FORMAT T-Fil) button while
[F2]
SpecifieswhetherINand
OUTpointdataaredisplayed
ornotintheTELEFILE
menu.
ENTRY POINT
pressing down the SFT button.
A message appears (in the control panel display)
requesting confirmation of the formatting operation.
[F3]
COMMNT EDIT Editsthecontentsofthe
Commentsection.
CHANGEDATA
To cancel the formatting operation
Press the CLR button.
[F4]
[F5]
Modifiesthespecifieddata.
DEL POINT
Deletesthetimedataofthe
cuepoint.
3 Press the [F1] (FORMAT T-Fil) button while
pressing down the SFT button.
MARK
[F6]
[F7]
[F8]
[F9]
ChangesthedataintheMrk
section.
Write-protectsthecuepoint
data.
DisplaystheTAPE
INFORMATIONwindow.
Movesthecursortotheline
specifiedbythenumeric
buttons.
PROTECT
TAPE INFO
CUENUM POINT
“COMPLETED” appears in the control panel display.
Selecting the device to be used for TELE
FILE menu operations
WRITE/EXIT
[F10]
ClosestheTELEFILEmenu
aftersavingchangestothe
memorylabel.
With no cassette inserted, press the ALT/[F5] (T-Fil
MODE) buttons to select the device.
232C: The device connected to the RS-232C
connector on the VTR is used.
ALT/[F1] FORMATT-Fil
Formatsthememorylabel.
Undoesallchanges.
ALT/[F2] UNDOALL
panel: The VTR control panel is used.
ATTRIB EDIT
ChangestheID, ADMIN, or
TITLE data in the TAPE
INFORMATIONwindow.
Copiesthetimedataofacue
pointtoanothercuepoint
indicatedintheCUEmenu.
Selectsthedevicetobeused
forTELEFILEmenu
ALT/[F3]
Prohibiting TELE FILE menu operations
ALT/[F4] COPY to CUE
Press the ALT/[F7] (WRITE PRTEC) buttons.
on: All TELE FILE menu operations are prohibited.
off: All TELE FILE menu operations are permitted.
T-Fil MODE
ALT/[F5]
operations.
Note
Thissettingcanbedoneonly
whennocassetteisinserted
in the VTR.
WRITE PRTEC
ProhibitsTELEFILEmenu
operations.
ALT/[F7]
ALT/[F10] WRITE/EXIT
ClosestheTELEFILEmenu
aftersavingchangestothe
memorylabel.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4 CUE Menu
4 Press the[F7] (SET LETTER) button or the center
cursor button.
Changing a title
The selected character is entered.
2
EDIT TITLE
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;
$#%&,."\^_'/~
' {}
HD1D2CAM
BÅCK
SET
SÅVE/
EXIT
SPÅCE
SPÅCE LETTER
4 6 2,3
1
1 Press the ALT/[F3](ATTRIB EDIT) buttons.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters.
2 Press the G or g button to select TITLE, and then
To enter a space
Press the [F5] (SPACE) button.
press the ENTRY button.
CH.COND
ALT+TELE FI
FORMAT
T-Fil
If you enter a wrong character
Press the [F6] (BACK SPACE) button to go back.
Then re-enter the character.
TCR 00:00:00:00
Rest 50%
REC DATE[1998/02/10]
UNDO
ALL
TITLE[NAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL]
No.
ATTRIB EDIT SELECT
Scn
A01
A01
A01
A01
B20
B20
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
00:
ATTR
EDIT
00:
TITLE
00:
ID
00:
ADMIN
To start the procedure over again
Press the [F9] (CANCEL) button to start again.
00:
00:
COPY
Press [ENTRY]to edit
toCUE
--:
Press [CLR]to CANCEL
T-Fil
MODE
WRITE
PRTEC
To change a character
Press the G button to move the cursor to the title
box. Then press the f or F button to change the
insertion position.
3 Press the f or F button to select a character.
If entered title exceeds the length of the
title box
“p or p” appears to the left or right of the box.
EDIT TITLE
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;
6 Press the [F10] (SAVE/EXIT) button. The screen
that was on before the title was entered is
displayed again.
$#%&,."\^_'/~
' {}
HD1D2CAM
BÅCK
SET
SÅVE/
EXIT
SPÅCE
SPÅCE LETTER
4-44
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To delete a time code
Changing time data
1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the
To enter the current time data
Time section to be deleted.
1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor (”) to
To move the cursor using the numeric
buttons
the line where the time code will be written.
With the cursor specifying Time, Mrk, IN, OUT or
the recording starting point section in the TELE
FILE menu display, enter the line number using
the numeric buttons. Then press the [F9]
(CUENUM POINT) button. The cursor will move
to the line specified by the numeric buttons.
To move the cursor using the numeric
buttons
With the cursor specifying Time, Mrk, IN, OUT or
the recording starting point section in the TELE
FILE menu display, enter the line number using
the numeric buttons. Then press the [F9]
(CUENUM POINT) button. The cursor will move
to the line specified by the numeric buttons.
2 Press the [F5](DEL POINT) button.
A message appears (in the control panel display)
requesting confirmation of the deletion operation.
Note
If the cursor (”) is not linked with the cursor
buttons, the cursor (”) will not move when the
cursor buttons are pressed.
To delete the line as well as the time code
Press the [F5] (DEL POINT) button while pressing
down the SFT button.
To link the cursor (”) with the cursor
buttons
The line is deleted and all the lines below are
moved up by one.
Press the center cursor button. Each press of the
button alternately links and unlinks the cursor (”) .
3 Then, press the [F5] (DEL POINT) button while
pressing down the SFT button.
2 Press the ENTRY button.
The time code section becomes blank and is ready
for new time code input.
The time data in the column specified by the cursor
(”) changes to the current time code.
CH.COND
TELE FILE
CUE
Note
SCAN
TCR 00:00:00:00
Rest 50%
If the cursor (”) is not on the screen when the
ENTRY button is pressed, the time data on the line
currently specified by the cursor (”) changes to the
current time data, and the line is automatically
displayed.
REC DATE[1998/02/10]
ENTRY
POINT
TITLE[NAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL]
No.
Time
Mrk
NG
KP
OK
OK
NG
OK
IN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
00:01:02:03
--:--:--:--
00:03:04:03
00:04:04:03
00:05:05:03
00:06:06:03
--:--:--:--
00:01:01:03
--:--:--:--
00:03:03:03
00:04:03:03
00:05:04:03
00:06:05:03
COMMNT
EDIT
@
CHANGE
DATA
DEL
MARK
PRO-
TECT
TAPE CUENUM WRITE/
INFO
POINT EXIT
To insert the current time data on a new line
POINT
1 Use the cursor buttons to position the cursor (”)
below the line where the time code will be
inserted.
To undo the deletion of a time code or line
Press the ALT/[F2] (UNDO ALL) buttons.
A message appears (in the control panel display)
requesting confirmation of the undo operation.
Press the [F2] (UNDO ALL) button while pressing
down the SFT button. To cancel the undo
operation, press the CLR button.
For details on how to move the cursor, see “To enter the
current time data” above.
2 Press the ENTRY button while pressing down the
SFT button.
A new line is inserted above the line specified by
where the cursor (”) is placed and the current time
code is entered on that line.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4 CUE Menu
To copy time data of a cue point to another
cue point specified in the CUE menu
Entering and modifying IN/OUT point data
You can use either the ENTRY button or the numeric
buttons to enter and modify IN/OUT point data.
1 Press the ALT/[F4] (COPY to CUE) buttons.
A message appears (in the control panel display)
requesting confirmation of the copy operation.
To enter or modify IN/OUT point data using
the ENTRY button
To cancel the copy operation
Press the CLR button.
2 Press the [F4] (COPY to CUE) button while
pressing down the SFT button.
The time data of the cue point is copied to the cue
point indicated in the CUE menu.
Changing Mrk data
2 1
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the line
with the mark attribute to be changed, and then press
the [F6] (MARK) button. Or, move the cursor directly
to the mark attribute to be changed, and then press the
[F4] (CHANGE DATA) button. In both cases, each
press of the button changes the attribute as follows:
OK n NG nKP (keep temporarily) n blank (no
attribute).
1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the
IN/OUT section on which the current time code is
to be entered or replaced.
To move the cursor using the numeric
buttons
With the cursor specifying Time, Mrk, IN, OUT or
the recording starting point section in the TELE
FILE menu display, enter the line number using
the numeric buttons. Then press the [F9]
(CUENUM POINT) button. The cursor will move
to the line specified by the numeric buttons.
Changing the recording starting point
setting
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the
recording starting point section. Then press the [F4]
(CHANGE DATA) button. Each press of the button
turns the setting on (the @ indication appears) or off
(the @ indication disappears).
2 Press the IN button (to enter IN point data) or OUT
button (to enter OUT point data) while pressing
down the ENTRY button.
The current time code is entered as the IN/OUT
point data or it replaces the existing IN/OUT point
data.
Note
If the cursor is not on the IN/OUT section when
pressing the IN/OUT button while pressing down
the ENTRY button, the current time code is
entered as the Time data or it replaces the existing
Time data. When pressing the ENTRY button
only, the Time data is entered or replaced
regardless of the cursor position.
4-46
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To enter or modify IN/OUT point data using
the numeric buttons
3 Press the IN button (to enter IN point data) or OUT
button (to enter OUT point data).
The number is entered as the time code or it
replaces the existing IN/OUT point data.
2
To clear the IN/OUT point data
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the IN/
OUT section to be cleared, and then press the CLR
button while pressing the IN button (to clear IN point
data) or OUT button (to clear OUT point data), or
press the IN or OUT button (to clear both IN and OUT
point data) while pressing the CLR button.
1
1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the
To increase or decrease IN/OUT point data
one frame at a time
IN/OUT section to be entered or modified.
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the IN/
OUT section to be increased or decreased, and then
press the + button (to increase the time data) or the –
button (to decrease the time data) while pressing the
IN button or the OUT button. Each time you press the
+ or – button, the time data is increased or decreased
by one frame, respectively.
To move the cursor using the numeric
buttons
With the cursor specifying Time, Mrk, IN, OUT or
the recording starting point section in the TELE
FILE menu display, enter the line number using
the numeric buttons. Then press the [F9]
(CUENUM POINT) button. The cursor will move
to the line specified by the numeric buttons.
To recall IN/OUT point data to the data entry
window
2 Use the numeric buttons to enter the time data in
the data entry window, and then press the SET
button.
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the IN/
OUT section to be recalled, and then press the RCL
button while pressing the IN button (to recall IN point
data) or the OUT button (to recall OUT point data).
For example, to enter 00:01:30:00, press the
numeric buttons as follows: 0, 0, 1, 3, 0, 0, 0.
(There is no need to enter the first zero. When you
enter a number that is less than eight digits long,
the unspecified digits are automatically set to zero
when the SET button is pressed.
CH.COND
TELE FILE
00 01 30 00
CUE
SCAN
SET
Entered time
data
TCR 00:00:00:00
REC DATE[1998/02/10]
Rest 50%
ENTRY
POINT
TITLE[NAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL]
No.
Time
Mrk
NG
KP
OK
OK
NG
OK
IN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
00:01:02:03
00:01:30:00
00:03:04:03
00:04:04:03
00:05:05:03
00:06:06:03
--:--:--:--
00:01:01:03
--:--:--:--
00:03:03:03
00:04:03:03
00:05:04:03
00:06:05:03
COMMNT
EDIT
@
CHANGE
DATA
DEL
MARK
PRO-
TECT
TAPE CUENUM WRITE/
INFO
POINT EXIT
POINT
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4 CUE Menu
To enter the current time code continuously
To preroll to an IN/OUT point
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the IN/
OUT section and press the IN button (to preroll to an
IN point) or OUT button (to preroll to an OUT point)
while pressing the PREROLL button. The VTR
prerolls to the point and stops.
1 Set item 127.Tele-File IN OUT input in the VTR
SETUP menu to “on.”
2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the
IN/OUT section to be entered.
For details on setting the preroll time, see “4-2-7 Setting the
Preroll Time” on page 4-18.
To move the cursor using the numeric
buttons
Note
With the cursor specifying Time, Mrk, IN, OUT or
the recording starting point section in the TELE
FILE menu display, enter the line number using
the numeric buttons. Then press the [F9]
(CUENUM POINT) button. The cursor will move
to the line specified by the numeric buttons.
If the cursor is not on the IN/OUT section when
pressing the IN/OUT button while pressing the
PREROLL button, the VTR prerolls to the cue point.
When pressing the PREROLL button only, the VTR
prerolls to the cue point regardless of the cursor
position.
3 Press the IN button (to enter IN point data) or OUT
button (to enter OUT point data) while pressing
down the ENTRY button.
Automatic time data changes during IN/OUT
point data entry or modification
The table below shows the automatic changes that
occur in time data when either the IN point or OUT
point is changed.
The movement of the cursor is automatic (as
described in the table below) and time code is
entered continuously.
When IN point data is entered or modified
Status of input data
IN point
OUT point
Thetimesequenceofthe
IN/OUTpointdatais
correct.
Thedatais
changed.
Thedatais
unchanged.
Input condition When the IN button is When the OUT
pressed while
pressing the ENTRY
button
button is pressed
while pressing the
ENTRY button
Thetimesequenceofthe
IN/OUTpointdataisnot
correct.
Thedatais
changed.
Thedatais
deleted.
OnlyINpoint
datahas
INpointdatais
modifiedandthe
OUTpointdatais
enteredandthe
TheOUTpointhasnot
beeninput.
Thedatais
changed.
Thedatais
unchanged.
beenentered cursorstaysontheIN cursormovestothe
pointdata.
nextINpoint.
OnlyOUT
INpointdatais
OUTpointdatais
modifiedandthe
cursorstaysonthe
OUTpoint.
When OUT point data is entered or modified
pointdatahas enteredandthe
beenentered cursormovestothe
nextINpoint.
Status of the input data IN point
OUT point
Thetimesequenceofthe
IN/OUTpointdatais
correct.
Thedatais
unchanged.
Thedatais
changed.
BothIN/OUT INpointdatais
pointdata
havenot
beenentered ontheINpointdata.
orhavebeen
entered
OUTpointdatais
enteredormodified
andthecursorstays
ontheOUTpoint
data.
enteredormodified
andthecursorstays
Thetimesequenceofthe
IN/OUTpointdataisnot
correct.
Thedatais
unchanged.
Thedatais
unchanged.
TheINpointhasnotbeen Thedatais
Thedatais
changed.
input.
unchanged.
To display the duration between an IN point
and an OUT point
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the IN/
OUT section and press the IN button and OUT button
at the same time. The duration between two points
appears while the buttons are pressed.
4-48
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Press the [F4] (CHANGE DATA) button.
Changing Tk data
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the take
data to be changed. Then use the numeric buttons to
change the value. Note that only 1-digit or 2-digit
values can be entered. Or, move the cursor to the take
data, and press the [F4] (CHANGE DATA) button or
the + button repeatedly to increase the value in
increments of 1. Press the – button repeatedly to
decrease the value in increments of 1. Note that the
value cannot go below 0.
CUT No. EDIT
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;
$#%&,."\^_'/~
' {}
HD1D2CAM
BÅCK
SET
SÅVE/
EXIT
SPÅCE
SPÅCE LETTER
3 Press the f or F button to select a character.
Changing Cut data
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the cut
data to be changed, and then enter the new data using
the numeric buttons and +/– buttons. Pressing the –
button enters the tilde (~). Press the numeric buttons
while pressing down the SFT button to enter uppercase
letters (A to J). Note that a maximum of four
characters can be entered.
CUT No. EDIT
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;
$#%&,."\^_'/~
' {}
HD1D2CAM
BÅCK
SET
SÅVE/
EXIT
SPÅCE
SPÅCE LETTER
Or, do the procedure below to change the data.
4 Press the [F7] (SET LETTER) button or the center
cursor button.
The selected character is entered.
CUT No. EDIT
B
4 6 1,3
2
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;
$#%&,."\^_'/~
' {}
HD1D2CAM
1 Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the
cut data to be changed.
BÅCK
SET
SÅVE/
EXIT
SPÅCE
CÅNCEL
SPÅCE LETTER
To move the cursor using the numeric
buttons
With the cursor specifying Time, Mrk, IN, OUT or
the recording starting point section in the TELE
FILE menu display, enter the line number using
the numeric buttons. Then press the [F9]
(CUENUM POINT) button. The cursor will move
to the line specified by the numeric buttons.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters.
To enter a space
Press the [F5] (SPACE) button.
If you enter a wrong character
Press the [F6] (BACK SPACE) button to go back.
Then re-enter the character.
(Continued)
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4 CUE Menu
To start the procedure over again
Press the [F9] (CANCEL) button to start again.
2 Press the [F4] (CHANGE DATA) button.
To change a character
SCENE No. EDIT
Press the G button to move the cursor to the cut
data to be changed. Then press the f or F button
to move the insertion position.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;
$#%&,."\^_'/~
' {}
HD1D2CAM
6 Press the [F10] (SAVE/EXIT) button.
The screen that was on before the cut data was
changed is displayed again.
BÅCK
SET
SÅVE/
EXIT
SPÅCE
SPÅCE LETTER
To copy Cut data
3 Press the f or F button to select a character.
Move the cursor to the line to which the copied data is
to be pasted. Then press the RCL button. The cut data
from the line above is copied to the selected line.
SCENE No. EDIT
Changing scene data
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the scene
data to be changed. Then enter the characters using
the numeric buttons and +/– buttons. Press the
numeric buttons while pressing down the SFT button
to enter uppercase letters (A to J). A maximum of
three characters can be entered.
$#%&,."\^_'/~
' {}
HD1D2CAM
BÅCK
SET
SÅVE/
EXIT
SPÅCE
SPÅCE LETTER
4 Press the [F7] (SET LETTER) button or the center
cursor button.
Or, do the procedure below to change the data.
The selected character is entered.
SCENE No. EDIT
B
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;
$#%&,."\^_'/~
' {}
HD1D2CAM
4 6 1,3
2
BÅCK
SET
SÅVE/
EXIT
SPÅCE
CÅNCEL
SPÅCE LETTER
1 Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the
scene data to be changed.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters.
To move the cursor using the numeric
buttons
To enter a space
Press the [F5] (SPACE) button.
With the cursor specifying Time, Mrk, IN, OUT or
the recording starting point section in the TELE
FILE menu display, enter the line number using
the numeric buttons. Then press the [F9]
(CUENUM POINT) button. The cursor will move
to the line specified by the numeric buttons.
If you enter a wrong character
Press the [F6] (BACK SPACE) button to go back.
Then re-enter the character.
4-50
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To start the procedure over again
Press the [F9] (CANCEL) button to start again.
To move the cursor using the numeric
buttons
With the cursor specifying Time, Mrk, IN, OUT or
the recording starting point section in the TELE
FILE menu display, enter the line number using
the numeric buttons. Then press the [F9]
(CUENUM POINT) button. The cursor will move
to the line specified by the numeric buttons.
To change a character
Press the G button to move the cursor to the scene
data to be changed. Then press the f or F button
to move the insertion position.
6 Press the [F10](SAVE/EXIT) button.
The screen that was on before the scene data was
entered is displayed again.
2 Press the [F3] (COMMNT EDIT) button.
To copy Scn data
COMMENT EDIT
Move the cursor to the line to which the copied data is
to be pasted. Then press the RCL button.
The scene data from the line above is copied to the
selected line.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;
$#%&,."\^_'/~
' {}
HD1D2CAM
BÅCK
SET
SÅVE/
EXIT
SPÅCE
Changing Comment data
SPÅCE LETTER
To display comment data, press the [>] button several
times.
3 Press the f or F button to select a character.
CH.COND
TELE FILE
CUE
SCAN
TCR 00:00:00:00
Rest 50%
REC DATE[1998/02/10]
ENTRY
POINT
COMMENT EDIT
TITLE[NAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL]
B
No.
Comment
Noisy
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COMMNT
EDIT
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;
Pretty Good
for NG Awards
Goal
$#%&,."\^_'/~
' {}
HD1D2CAM
CHANGE
DATA
Celebration
Å@Å@
DEL
MARK
PRO-
TECT
TAPE CUENUM WRITE/
INFO
POINT EXIT
BÅCK
SET
SÅVE/
EXIT
POINT
SPÅCE
SPÅCE LETTER
To change Comment data
4 Press the [F7] (SET LETTER) button or the center
cursor button. The selected character is entered.
COMMENT EDIT
B
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;
$#%&,."\^_'/~
' {}
HD1D2CAM
4 6 1,3
2
BÅCK
SET
SÅVE/
EXIT
SPÅCE
CÅNCEL
SPÅCE LETTER
1 Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the
(Continued)
comment to be changed.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4 CUE Menu
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters.
Write-protecting cue point data
Up to 80 characters can be entered.
Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the line
that is to be write-protected. Then press the [F7]
(PROTECT) button. appears between the Time and
Mrk columns to indicate that the time data, mark data,
and recording starting point setting on that line are
write-protected.
Note
If excessive comment data are entered, the input of
cue point data may become disabled. To prevent
this, press the [F8] (TAPE INFO) button to check
the available memory.
To enter a space
CH.COND
TELE FILE
CUE
SCAN
Press the [F5] (SPACE) button.
TCR 00:00:00:00
Rest 50%
REC DATE[1998/02/10]
ENTRY
POINT
TITLE[NAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL]
If you enter a wrong character
Press the [F6] (BACK SPACE) button to go back.
Then re-enter the character.
No.
Time
Mrk
NG
KP
OK
OK
NG
OK
IN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
00:01:02:03
--:--:--:--
00:03:04:03
00:04:04:03
00:05:05:03
00:06:06:03
--:--:--:--
00:01:01:03
--:--:--:--
00:03:03:03
00:04:03:03
00:05:04:03
00:06:05:03
COMMNT
EDIT
@
CHANGE
DATA
To start the procedure over again
Press the [F9] (CANCEL) button to start again.
DEL
MARK
PRO-
TECT
TAPE CUENUM WRITE/
INFO
POINT EXIT
POINT
To change a character
Press the G button to move the cursor to the
comment to be changed. Then press the f or F
button to move the insertion position.
To cancel a write-protection
Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the line
for which write-protection is to be cancelled. Then
press the [F7] (PROTECT) button. A message appears
(in the control panel display) requesting confirmation
of cancellation operation. Press the [F7] (PROTECT)
button while pressing down the SFT button.
If the entered text is longer than the
comment box
“p or p” appears to the left or right of the box.
6 Press the [F10] (SAVE/EXIT) button.
The screen that was on before the comment data
was changed is displayed again.
Prerolling to a cue point
1 Press the [F1] (CUE SCAN) button repeatedly to
specify the direction in which the cursor moves
when the PREROLL button is pressed.
Each press of the button changes the direction as
follows: FWD (forward) n REW (reverse) n
unspecified.
FWD: Pressing the PREROLL button causes the
cursor to move to the next line, and the VTR to
preroll to the time code on that line. Invalid
time codes are ignored.
REW: Pressing the PREROLL button causes the
cursor to move to the previous line, and the
VTR to preroll to the time code on that line.
Invalid time codes are ignored.
2 Press the PREROLL button.
4-52
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Inserting a new line
Deleting a line
1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the
Press the cursor button to move the cursor to the line to
be deleted, and then press the [F5] (DEL POINT)
button while pressing down the SFT button. The line
is deleted and all proceeding lines move up by one.
line that will be under the new line to be inserted.
To move the cursor using the numeric
buttons
With the cursor specifying Time, Mrk, IN, OUT or
the recording starting point section in the TELE
FILE menu display, enter the line number using
the numeric buttons. Then press the [F9]
(CUENUM POINT) button. The cursor will move
to the line specified by the numeric buttons.
Displaying other information saved to the
memory label
Press the [F8] (TAPE INFO) button. The TAPE
INFORMATION window appears, showing other
information concerning the videocassette.
Note
If the movement of the cursor (”) is not linked
with the cursor buttons, the cursor (”) will not
move when the cursor buttons are pressed.
CH.COND
TELE FILE
CUE
SCAN
TCR 00:00:00:00
Rest 50%
REC DATE[1998/02/10]
TAPE INFORMATION
TITL
ENTRY
POINT
ID: 001234567
ADMIN: Kanrisha
TITLE
No.
Scn
A01
A01
A01
A01
B20
B20
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
COMMNT
EDIT
MODEL: HDW-700
SERIAL NUMBER:000123
To link the cursor (”) with the cursor
buttons
WRITE PROTECT: ON
TAPE THREAD COUNT: 123
CHANGE
DATA
CUE POINT NUMBER:
CONTROL MODE: panel
5
Press the center cursor button. Each press of the
button alternately links and unlinks the cursor (”).
SIZE: 1024
USED: 234
DEL
MARK
PRO-
TECT
TAPE CUENUM WRITE/
INFO
POINT EXIT
POINT
2 Press the ENTRY button while pressing down the
SFT button.
To close the window
Press the [F8] (TAPE INFO) button again.
A new line is inserted above the line where the
cursor (”) is located, and the current time code is
entered on the new line.
To change ID or ADMIN data
Moving a line
2
Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the Time
data of the line to be moved. Then press the + or –
button. Each press of the + button moves the line up,
while each press of the – button moves the line down.
Note
If you perform the procedure above while the cursor is
on any other data other than the Time data, only the
contents selected by the cursor will be moved. To
move the entire line, be sure that the cursor is placed
on the Time data.
4 6 2,3
1
1 Press the ALT/[F3] (ATTRIB EDIT) buttons.
(Continued)
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4 CUE Menu
To start the procedure over again
Press the [F9] (CANCEL) button to start agai.
2 Press the G or g button to select ID (tape ID) or
ADMIN (administrator), then press the ENTRY
button.
To change a character
Press the G button to move the cursor to the data
to be changed. Then press the f or F button to
move the insertion position.
CH.COND
ALT+TELE FI
FORMAT
T-Fil
TCR 00:00:00:00
Rest 50%
REC DATE[1998/02/10]
UNDO
ALL
TITLE[NAGANO JUMP LARGE HILL]
No.
ATTRIB EDIT SELECT
Scn
A01
A01
A01
A01
B20
B20
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
00:0
ATTR
EDIT
00:0
TITLE
If entered text is longer than the ID or
ADMIN box
00:0
ID
00:0
ADMIN
00:0
COPY
00:0
Press [ENTRY]to edit
“p or p” appears to the left or right of the box.
toCUE
--:-
Press [CLR]to CANCEL
T-Fil
MODE
WRITE
PRTEC
6 Press the [F10] (SAVE/EXIT) button.
The screen that was on before the cut data was
changed is displayed again.
3 Press the f or F button to select a character.
Id Edit
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;
$#%&,."\^_'/~
' {}
HD1D2CAM
BÅCK
SET
SÅVE/
EXIT
SPÅCE
SPÅCE LETTER
4 Press the[F7] (SET LETTER) button or the center
cursor button.
The selected character is entered.
Id Edit
B
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789[]()<>@+-*=!?:;
$#%&,."\^_'/~
' {}
HD1D2CAM
BÅCK
SET
SÅVE/
EXIT
SPÅCE
CÅNCEL
SPÅCE LETTER
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter more characters.
To enter a space
Press the [F5] (SPACE) button.
If you enter a wrong character
Press the [F6] (BACK SPACE) button to go back.
Then re-enter the character.
4-54
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-5 PF1 Menu (Factory Settings)
For details on registration methods, see Section 4-1-3,
The PF (Personal Function) 1 menu is used to register
frequently used menu items.
“Registering Items to the PF1/2 Menus” on page 4-3, and
on restoring factory-set menu items, see Section 4-1-4,
“VTR Memory Bank Function” on page 4-4.
When shipped from the factory, the PF1 menu contains
the adjustment menu for video signals. If you later use
the PF1 menu to register items from other menus, you
can restore the PF1 menu to its original factory settings
by recalling SETUP BANK F from the VTR memory
banks.
To activate the PF1 menu screen
Press the PF1 button.
REMAIN-T CH.COND
PF1
VIDEO
IN
L 113min
SDI
PLAY
LOCK
TCR
2FD F1
SERVO
REF
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
input
ÅIN --:--:--:-- ÅOUT --:--:--:--
IN --:--:--:-- OUT --:--:--:--
MASTER
(HD)
prst
Y
PB
PR
SETUP H PHAS FINE
(HD)
(HD)
(HD)
(HD)
(HD)
(HD)
prst
prst
prst
prst
prst
prst
PF1 menu display
PF1menu(factorysettings)
Indication
Settings
Button
Function
VIDEO IN
[F1]
Selectstheinputvideosignal.
SDI, SDTI
Note
TheSDTIselectionisoperativeonlywhenthe
optionalHKDV-506ASDTIBoardisinstalled.
[F2]
[F4]
Selectsthereferencesignalfor
output.
SERVO REF
ext,input,auto
AdjuststheY, PB,andP
simultaneously.
R
outputlevels prst, 0.0to141.3%
MASTER LEVEL (HD)
Y LEVEL (HD)
prst, 0.0to141.3%
[F5]
[F6]
[F7]
[F8]
[F9]
[F10]
AdjuststheYoutputlevel.
AdjuststheP Boutputlevel.
P
B
LEVEL (HD)
LEVEL (HD)
prst, 0.0to141.3%
prst, 0.0to141.3%
prst, –10.0 to +10.0
prst, –128 to +127
prst, 0 to 1024
PR
AdjuststheP
R
outputlevel.
SETUP LEVEL (HD)
SYNC PHASE (HD)
FINE (HD)
Adjuststhesetuplevel.
Adjuststhesyncphase.
Fineadjustmentofthesyncphase
ALT/[F1] MASTER LEVEL (D1)
AdjuststheY,B-Y,andR-Youtput
levelssimultaneously.
prst, 0.0 to 141.3%
ALT/[F2]
AdjuststheYoutputlevel.
AdjuststheB-Youtputlevel.
AdjuststheR-Youtputlevel.
Adjuststhevideolevel.
Y LEVEL (D1)
prst, 0.0 to 141.3%
prst, 0.0 to 141.3%
B-Y LEVEL (D1)
ALT/[F3]
ALT/[F4] R-Y LEVEL (D1)
prst, 0.0 to 141.3%
prst, 0.0 to 141.3%
prst, 0.0 to 141.3%
prst, –30 to +30
ALT/[F5] VIDEO LEVEL (D2)
ALT/[F6] CHROMA LEVEL (D2) Adjuststhechromalevel.
ALT/[F7] HUE (D2)
Adjuststhehue.
SETUP LEVEL (D1/D2)
ALT/[F8]
Adjuststhesetuplevel.
Adjuststhesyncphase.
Fineadjustmentofthesyncphase
prst, 0to+10.0
prst, –128 to +127
prst, 0 to 1024
ALT/[F9] SYNC PHASE (SD)
ALT/[F10] FINE (SD)
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-5 PF1 Menu (Factory Settings)
4-5-1 Selecting the Input Video
Signal (VIDEO IN)
4-5-3 Adjusting the Output Video
Signal (MASTER LEVEL to FINE)
Press the [F1] (VIDEO IN) button repeatedly to select
the video signal to input.
Adjusting the output video signal
SDI:
connector
SDTI
SDIvideosignalinputtotheHDSDIINPUT
Follow the procedure below to adjust the output video
signal.
(OnlyiftheoptionalHKDV-506ASDTIBoard
isinstalled.): Dubbingsignal(270Mbps)inputto
the SDTI (OPTION) IN connector.
Notes
The time codes to be recorded depend on the settings
of the TC menu.
1,3
2
4-5-2 Selecting the Reference
Signal (SERVO REF)
Adjusting the output video signal
Press the [F2] (SERVO REF) button to select the
signal to be used as the reference signal for VTR
operations.
1 Press the function button ([F4] to [F10]) whose
setting you wish to set.
ext:
TheservoreferencesignalisforcedtobeEXT.
ThesignalfromtheHDSDIINPUTorSDTI
The setting display section lights up.
input:
(OPTION) IN is used as the reference signal for
VTR operations. The [F1] (VIDEO IN) button
switches the video input signal.
2 Change the numerical value by pressing the G or
g button (or + or – button).
To change the value quickly, press the buttons
while holding down the SFT button.
auto:
Duringrecordingoreditpreset,thesignalfrom
the HD SDI INPUT or SDTI (OPTION) IN is
used as a reference signal. In all other cases, the
servo operates using the signal setting of item
006.EXTERNAL REFERENCE select in the VTR
SETUP menu. If the signal selected in
006.EXTERNAL REFERENCE select is not
present, the servo operates using an internal
reference.
To set the preset value
Press the center cursor button.
prst appears over the respective function button.
3 Press the function button ([F4] to [F10]) after
adjusting the numerical value.
4-56
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the master output level (HD)
Adjusting the sync phase (HD)
Make this adjustment with the [F4] (MASTER
LEVEL) button.
Use this setting to precisely match the output phase of
the VTR to the reference signal or when using a
switcher or other device connected to another VTR to
create special effects such as fading, wrapping, and
dissolving.
pr:st
100%(4000H)
u:evalNumaclire
rangAe:duaebjtsl
0.0to141.3%
–∞to+3dB
To adjust the output signal sync phase with respect to
the reference input, make this adjustment with the [F9]
(SYNC PHASE) button.
Adjusting the Y output level (HD)
:tpsr
u:evalNumaclire
ranAge:duajebtsl
0(0)
Make this adjustment with the [F5] (Y LEVEL) button.
pr:st
–128to+127
–1.4to+1.4H
u:evalNumaclire
rangAe:duaebjtsl
0.0to141.3%
–∞to+3dB
Fine adjustment of the sync phase (HD)
Adjusting the PB output level (HD)
Make this adjustment with the [F10] (FINE) button.
:tpsr
u:eval Numalcire
ranAge:duajtbesl
0(0)
Make this adjustment with the [F6] (PB LEVEL)
button.
0to1024
0to323nsec
pr:st
100%(4000H)
u:evalNumaclire
rangAe:duaebjtsl
0.0to141.3%
–∞to+3dB
Adjusting the master output level (D1)
Make this adjustment with the ALT/[F1] (MASTER
LEVEL) buttons.
Adjusting the PR output level (HD)
prst: 100% (4000H)
u:evalNumaclire
rangAe:duaebjtsl
Make this adjustment with the [F7] (PR LEVEL)
button.
0.0to141.3%
–∞to+3dB
pr:st
100%(4000H)
u:evalNumaclire
rangAe:duaebjtsl
0.0to141.3%
–∞to+3dB
Adjusting the Y output level (D1)
Make this adjustment with the ALT/[F2] (Y LEVEL)
buttons.
Adjusting the setup level (HD)
pr:st
u:evalNumaclire
rangAe:duaebjtsl
100%(4000H)
Make this adjustment with the [F8] (SETUP LEVEL)
button.
0.0to141.3%
–∞to+3dB
:ptsr
0%(0)
u:vealNumaclire
range:Adauebtjsl
–10.0to+10.0
–10to+10%
Adjusting the B–Y output level (D1)
Make this adjustment with the ALT/[F3] (B–Y
LEVEL) buttons.
pr:st
100%(4000H)
u:evalNumaclire
rangAe:duaebjtsl
0.0to141.3%
–∞to+3dB
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-5 PF1 Menu (Factory Settings)
Adjusting the R–Y output level (D1)
Adjusting the sync phase (D1/D2)
Make this adjustment with the ALT/[F4] (R–Y
LEVEL) buttons.
Use this setting to precisely match the output phase of
the VTR to the reference signal or when using a
switcher or other device connected to another VTR to
create special effects such as fading, wrapping, and
dissolving.
pr:st
100%(4000H)
u:evalNumaclire
rangAe:duaebjtsl
0.0to141.3%
–∞to+3dB
To adjust the output signal sync phase with respect to
the reference input, make this adjustment with the
ALT/[F9] (SYNC PHASE) buttons.
Adjusting the video output level (D2)
:tpsr
u:evalNumaclire
ranAge:duajebtsl
0(0)
Make this adjustment with the ALT/[F5] (VIDEO
LEVEL) buttons.
–128to+127
–0.5to+0.5H
pr:st
100%(4000H)
u:evalNumaclire
rangAe:duaebjtsl
0.0to141.3%
–∞to+3dB
Fine adjustment of the sync phase (D1/D2)
Make this adjustment with the ALT/[F10] (FINE)
buttons.
Adjusting the chroma output level (D2)
:tpsr
u:eval Numalcire
ranAge:duajtbesl
0(0)
Make this adjustment with the ALT/[F6] (CHROMA
GAIN) buttons.
0to1024
0to296nsec
pr:st
100%(4000H)
u:evalNumaclire
rangAe:duaebjtsl
0.0to141.3%
–∞to+3dB
Adjusting the hue (D2)
Make this adjustment with the ALT/[F7] (HUE)
buttons.
:ptsr
0°(0)
u:eval Numalcire
rangAe:duaebjtsl
–30to+30
–30°to+30°
Adjusting the setup level (D2)
Make this adjustment with the ALT/[F8] (SETUP
LEVEL) buttons.
prs:t
u:eval Numalcire
raAnged:uajtbsel
7.5IRE(7.5)
0to+10.0
0to+10.0IRE
4-58
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-6 PF2 Menu (Factory Settings)
For details on registration methods, see Section 4-1-3,
The PF2 menu is used to register frequently used menu
items.
“Registering Items to the PF1/2 Menus” on page 4-3, and
on restoring factory-set menu items, see Section 4-1-4,
“VTR Memory Bank Function” on page 4-4.
When shipped from the factory, the PF2 menu contains
the adjustment menu for audio signals. If you later use
the PF2 menu to register items from other menus, you
can restore the PF2 menu to its original factory settings
by recalling SETUP BANK F from the VTR memory
banks.
To activate the PF2 menu screen
Press the PF2 button.
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min
PF2
Å-IN
CH1
AES/EBU
PLAY
LOCK
TCR
2FD F1
Å-IN
CH2
00Ó00µ00ß00ƒ
IN --:--:--:--
AES/EBU
ÅIN --:--:--:-- ÅOUT --:--:--:--
Å-IN
CH3
OUT --:--:--:--
AES/EBU
Å-IN
CH4
AES/EBU
EMPHÅ-
SIS
MON-L MON-R
SEL SEL
off
1____ _2___
PF2 menu display
PF2menu(factorysettings)
Button Indication
Function
Settings
[F1]
[F2]
[F3]
[F4]
A-IN CH1
A-IN CH2
A-IN CH3
A-IN CH4
Selectstheaudioinputsignalforaudiochannel1.
Selectstheaudioinputsignalforaudiochannel2.
Selectstheaudioinputsignalforaudiochannel3.
Selectstheaudioinputsignalforaudiochannel4.
SDI,AES/EBU,analg,[SDTI]
Note
Whenthedubbingsignalinputtothe
SDTI(OPTION)INconnectoris
selectedfortheinputvideosignal,the
SDTIsignalinputtotheSDTI(OPTION)
INconnectorisautomaticallyselected
fortheinputaudiosignalaswell. The
settingcannotbechanged.
[F7]
[F9]
[F10]
EMPHASIS
MON-L SEL
MON-R SEL
Setstheemphasis.
off,on
SelectsthemonitoroutputsignalforchannelL.
SelectsthemonitoroutputsignalforchannelR.
Combination of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Combination of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-6 PF2 Menu (Factory Settings)
4-6-1 Selecting the Audio Input
Signal (A-IN CH-1~CH4)
4-6-3 Selecting the Monitor
Output Signal (MON-L SEL/MON-
R SEL)
Function buttons [F1] (A-IN CH1) to [F4] (A-IN CH4)
select the audio input signal for the various channels.
The [F9] (MON-L SEL) and [F10] (MON-R SEL)
buttons allow you to specify the audio channel to be
output from the left and right MONITOR OUTPUT
connectors, respectively.
SDI:
SelectstheaudiosignalinputthroughtheHD
SDI INPUT connector.
AES/EBU:
Selectstheaudiosignalinputthroughthe
AUDIO INPUT (AES/EBU) connectors.
analg: Selectstheaudiosignalinputthroughthe
AUDIO INPUT connectors.
[SDTI] (OnlywhentheoptionalHKDV-506ASDTI
1: Audiochannel1
2: Audiochannel2
3:
Audiochannel3
4: Audiochannel4
Boardisinstalled.): WhentheSDTIsignalinput
to the SDTI (OPTION) IN connector is selected
for the input video signal, the audio signal input
to the SDTI (OPTION) IN connector is
automatically selected for the input audio signal as
well. SDTI is displayed and can not be changed.
5: Analogcuechannel
When multiple channels are selected for a single
connector, all of the numbers are displayed.
Select the output signal to be monitored as follows:
Making the setting
Follow the steps below to set the monitor output
signal.
4-6-2 Setting Emphasis
(EMPHASIS)
1 Press the [F9] (MON-L SEL) or [F10] (MON-R
SEL) button.
To apply emphasis to a digital audio signal that has
been converted from an analog input audio signal, set
the [F7] (EMPHASIS) button to on.
The setting display section lights up.
2 Press numeric buttons 1 to 4 to select audio
channels 1 to 4, or numeric button 5 for the analog
cue channel.
Example: Pressing numeric buttons 1 and 2 selects
audio channels 1 and 2, leaving audio channels 3
and 4, and the analog cue channel off.
“12...” appears in the display.
3 To set the entered audio channels, press the
respective function button ([F9] or [F10]).
4-60
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-7 SET UP Menu
In the SET UP menu, you can store and recall menu
settings to and from the VTR memory banks and
memory card, register items to the PF menu, and set
items in the VTR SETUP menu and PANEL SETUP
menu.
To activate the SET UP menu
Press the SET UP button.
To change the SET UP menu page
Press the ALT button.
For details on storing and recalling data to or from the VTR
memory banks or memory card, and registering items to the
PF menus, see Section 4-1, “Registering and Storing Menu
Settings” on page 4-1.
“$” indicates that more than one menu page exists.
REMAIN-T CH.COND
L 113min
SETUP
VTR
BÅNK
MEMORY
CÅRD
VTR BÅNK: Copy data between
[F1]
current setup and 8 banks.
[F2]MEMORY CÅRD: Copy data
between VTR and memory card.
[F4]PF1&2 ÅSSIGN: Åssign PF1/PF2
menu function keys.
PÅNEL SETUP: Panel setting
VTR SETUP: VTR current setup
[F5]
[F6]
PF1&2
ÅSSIGN
PÅNEL
VTR
REMOTE REMOTE
SETUP SETUP
9-PIN 50-PIN
off off
SET UP menu display
SET UP menu
Function
Button
[F1]
Indication
Settings
VTRBANK
See Section 4-1-4, “VTR Memory Bank Function” on page 4-4.
See Section 4-1-5, “Memory Card Function” on page 4-6.
[F2]
MEMORY CARD
[F4]
PF1&2ASSIGN See Section 4-1-3, “Registering Items to the PF1/2 Menus” on page 4-3.
[F5]
[F6]
[F8]
PANEL SETUP
VTR SETUP
See Section 4-7-2, “PANEL SETUP Menu” on page 4-63.
See Section 4-7-1, “VTR SETUP Menu” on page 4-61.
REMOTE 9-PIN SelectsremoteoperationthroughadeviceconnectedtotheREMOTE1-
IN(9P)/OUT(9P)connectors.
on,off
on,off
[F9]
REMOTE 50-PIN Selectsremoteoperationusingadevice(optionalBKDW-509)
connectedtothePARALLELI/O(50P)connector.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-7 SET UP Menu
Selecting remote operation mode
When operating the VTR with an external device, set
the [F8] (REMOTE 9-PIN) button or [F9] (REMOTE
50-PIN) button to on.
When the [F8] (REMOTE 9-PIN) button is set to
on
You can operate the VTR with a device connected to
the REMOTE1-IN(9P)/OUT(9P) connectors.
When the [F9] (REMOTE 50-PIN) button is set
to on
You can operate the VTR with a device (optional
BKDW-509) connected to the PARALLEL I/O(50P)
connector.
Note
When operating the VTR through an external device,
all of the tape operation and editing buttons are
disabled, with the exception of the STOP and EJECT
buttons. You may also set the VTR so that all buttons
are enabled or disabled. Perform this setting through
008. LOCAL FUNCTION ENABLE of the VTR
SETUP menu. You cannot, however, disable the menu
and remote operation mode selection buttons.
4-62
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-7-1 VTR SETUP Menu
All menu items required for setting up the VTR
operating conditions are displayed in the scrollable
VTR SETUP menu.
To activate the VTR SETUP menu
Press the SET UP button, then press the [F6] (VTR
SETUP) button.
Items which are frequently used can be registered in
the PF1/2 menus. Those items that can be registered in
a PF menu are displayed in the scrollable PF1&2
ASSIGN menu.
For details on the VTR SETUP menu items, see the
Appendix “Menu List” on page A-15.
For details on registering items to the PF1/2 menus, see
Section 4-1-3, “Registering Items to the PF1/2 Menus” on
page 4-3.
VTR SETUP
PREV
CH.COND
CÅTEG
TCR 00:00:00:00
HOURS COUNTER
H01:OPE HOURS
NEXT
-
-
-
90
10
8
CÅTEG
H02:DRUM HOURS
H03:TAPE HOURS
H04:THRED COUNT
- 122
H12:DRUM HOURS r -
H13:TAPE HOURS r -
H14:THRED COUNT r-
21
10
93
001:PRE READ
002:CONFI
- off
- off
- off
- 4FD
003:REC INH
004:CAP LOCK
CHÅNGE
DÅTÅ
CANCEL SÅVE/
EXIT
VTR SETUP menu display
VTR SETUP menu
Button Indication
Function
[F1]
[F2]
[F7]
[F9]
[F10]
PREV CATEG
NEXT CATEG
CHANGEDATA
CANCEL
Movestothebeginningofthepreviouscategory.
Movestothebeginningofthenextcategory.
Changesthesetting.
Cancelsthesettingoperation.
SAVE/EXIT
SetsthevalueandexitstheVTRSETUPmenu.
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-7 SET UP Menu
2 Press the [F7] (CHANGE DATA) button.
Scrolling items in the VTR SETUP menu
The window for changing settings appears.
Press the Gand gto scroll the items in the VTR
SETUP menu.
To search the menu by category
Items in the VTR SETUP menu are divided into
categories according to type of settings they perform.
VTR CONTROL
PRE-READ
001
off
Menu
Category
number
CHÅNGE
DÅTÅ
SÅVE/
EXIT
H01~
001~
101~
201~
301~
401~
501~
601~
701~
801~
901~
A01~
T01~
Itemsrelatedtothehoursmeter
ItemsrelatedtoVTRoperations
Itemsrelatedtooperationpanels
Itemsrelatedtoremoteinterface
Itemsrelatedtoediting
3 Press the [F7] (CHANGE DATA) button or the G
or gbutton repeatedly to select the new setting.
When sub-items appear, change the setting as
required with the Gor gbutton, then press the
[F7] (CHANGE DATA) button repeatedly.
Itemsrelatedtoprerolling
Itemsrelatedtorecordingprotection
Itemsrelatedtothetimecodegenerator
Itemsrelatedtothevideocontrol
Itemsrelatedtotheaudiocontrol
Itemsrelatedtodigitalprocess
Itemsrelatedtopulldowncontrol
Other
4 Press the [F10] (SAVE/EXIT) button.
The new value is set and the window for changing
settings disappears.
5 Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to change more settings.
Pressing the [F1] (PREV CATEG) button selects the
first item of the previous category.
Pressing the [F2] (NEXT CATEG) button selects the
first item of the next category.
6 Press the [F10] (SAVE/EXIT) button again.
The new settings are saved and the SETUP menu
display appears again.
Changing settings
2,3 4,6 1
Changing settings
1 Press the Gor gbutton to move the cursor (z)
to the item to be changed.
4-64
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-7-2 PANEL SETUP Menu
To activate the PANEL SETUP menu
Press the SET UP button, then press the [F5] (PANEL
SETUP) button.
The PANEL SETUP menu is used to set the operation
conditions of the upper and lower control panels.
REMAIN-T CH.COND
PÅNEL SETUP
KEYINH
off
L 113min
KEY
ÅLÅRM SCREEN
EXIT
BEEP
BEEP
SÅVER
off
high
10min
PANEL SETUP menu display
PANELSETUPmenu
Button
[F1]
Indication
KEYINH
Function
Settings
Disablesallbuttonoperations.
Setsthekeyboardsound.
Setsthealarm.
on,off
[F6]
KEYBEEP
ALARMBEEP
SCREEN SAVER
EXIT
high,low,off
high,low,off
3min,10min,60min,off
[F7]
[F8]
Setsthescreen-saver.
ExitsthePANELSETUPmenu.
[F10]
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-7 SET UP Menu
Disabling the upper and lower control
panel buttons
Set the [F1] (KEYINH) button to on.
You can select buttons to be disabled through 110.
KEY INHIBIT SWITCH EFFECTIVE AREA in the
VTR SETUP menu.
Setting the keyboard sound
Press the [F6] (KEY BEEP) button repeatedly.
high: The keyboard sound is loud.
low: The keyboard sound is weak.
off: The keyboard sound is off.
Setting the alarm
Press the [F7] (ALARM BEEP) button repeatedly.
high: The alarm sound is loud.
low: The alarm sound is weak.
off: The alarm sound is off.
Setting the elapsed time until screen-
saver activated time
Press the [F8] (SCREEN SAVER) button repeatedly.
3min: The screen-saver goes on 3 minutes after the
last button operation.
10min: The screen-saver goes on 10 minutes after
the last button operation.
60min: The screen-saver goes on 60 minutes after
the last button operation.
off: The screen-saver function is off.
4-66
Chapter 4 Menu Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1 Preparing for Recording
5-1-1 Setting Switches and Menus
For details, refer to the pages indicated in the parentheses.
Before recording, set the switches and menus as shown
in the diagram below.
AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT buttons:
Audio channels to be recorded (page 5-2)
REC level controls: Reference level or
appropriate recording level (page 5-3)
Indicators: Check the REFERENCE signal.
REMOTE buttons: None of these
buttons light up.
POWER switch: ON
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500
Menu settings
ALT/[F2] (REC INH) buttons in the HOME menu: off
[F1] (TIMER SEL) button in the TC menu: Select the time data to be displayed.
[F6] (TCG SOURCE) button in the TC menu: int-LTC, int-VITC, ext-LTC, ext-VITC (see page 4-25)
[F7] (TCG MODE) button in the TC menu: regene, prst, auto (see page 4-25)
Setting switches and menus
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-1 Preparing for Recording
5-1-2 Selecting Audio Signals
Note
If item 701.VIDEO INPUT select in the VTR SETUP
menu is set to SDTI, the audio input signal on the
SDTI (OPTION) IN connector will automatically be
used as the input audio signal and AUDIO INPUT/
MONITOR SELECT buttons become unlit. The SDTI
setting is operative only when the optional HKDV-
506A SDTI Board is installed.
This section describes how to select the audio signals
for input and monitoring.
Selecting the audio input signals
Press the AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT
buttons on the upper control panel as follows to select
the audio input signal and channels.
Selecting audio signals to be monitored
Press the AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT
buttons on the upper control panel as follows to select
the audio signals output to the PHONES jack and the
MONITOR OUTPUT L and R connectors.
1
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500
2
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500
2
Selecting the audio input signals
1 Press the INPUT SELECT button so that it lights
up.
1
The AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT
button(s) light(s) up to indicate the audio input
signal type and the currently selected audio
channel.
Selecting audio signals to be monitored
1 Press the MONITOR SELECT button so that it
lights up.
The AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT
button(s) light(s) up to indicate the audio input
signal type and the channel(s) being monitored.
2 Select the signals to be input and the channels by
pressing the following buttons:
•HD SDI CH-1 to CH-4 buttons: Select audio
input through HD SDI INPUT connector.
(Channels 1 through 4)
•AES/EBU CH-1 to CH-4 buttons: Select audio
channels 1 to 4 input through the AUDIO INPUT
(AES/EBU) connectors.
•ANALOG CH-1 to CH-4 buttons: Select audio
channels 1 to 4 through the AUDIO INPUT
connectors.
2 Press the button(s) for the audio signal and the
channel(s) to be output to the PHONES jack and
the MONITOR OUTPUT L and/or R connector(s).
This setting can also be made in the VTR SETUP
menu using items 807.AUDIO MONITOR-L
select and 808.AUDIO MONITOR-R select.
To adjust the audio output level of the
PHONES jack
Rotate the PHONES level control on the upper control
panel.
This setting can also be made in the VTR SETUP
menu using items 802.AUDIO INPUT SELECT
channel CH-1 through 805.AUDIO INPUT select
CH-4.
5-2
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust the audio output level of the
MONITOR OUTPUT connectors
You can make an initial settings to allow the audio
output level of the MONITOR OUTPUT connector to
be adjusted with the PHONES level control on the
upper control panel.
5-1-3 Adjusting the Audio
Recording Level
Adjusting the recording level
Recording with the reference level
For more information, refer to the supplied Maintenance
Manual.
If the REC level controls on the upper control panel
are pushed in, audio signals are recorded at the
reference level (0 dB reference level indicated in the
audio level meters for +4 dBm input).
Selecting non-audio data as the audio
input signal
Recording with the specific recording level
Pull out the REC level controls for the appropriate
channels and rotate them so that the audio level meters
indicate approximately 0 dB for the average audio
signal input level.
Do the procedure below to select non-audio data such
as a Dolby1) E or Dolby Digital (AC-32)) signal as the
audio input signal.
1 Use item 819.NO AUDIO MODE Select and item
820.NON AUDIO Channel Select to select the
audio input signal.
REC level controls
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500
INPUT SELECT button
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500
Adjusting the recording level
The button of the selected channel flashes.
Selecting the display range of the audio
level meters
2 Press the INPUT SELECT button and verify that
the flashing AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT
button matches the channel selected in step 1.
You can switch the range of audio level meters display
by pressing the DISPLAY FULL/FINE button on the
upper control panel.
Notes
When you select non-audio data as the audio input
signal:
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500
• The audio input signal cannot be switched.
• The “OVER” indication on the audio level meters
flashes.
• Analog audio output to the main line, monitor, and
the headphones are muted.
• The recording level cannot be adjusted using the REC
level controls.
DISPLAY FULL/FINE button
Selecting the display range of the audio level meters
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................
1) Dolby is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories.
2) AC-3 is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories.
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-3
5-1 Preparing for Recording
FULL mode: The meter range is –60 to 0 dB or –40
to +20 dB.
5-1-5 Recording Analog Audio
FINE mode: The meter scale is enlarged, and the
signal level is indicated in 0.25 dB steps, with the
reference marker indicated by a lit LED in the
middle of each meter.
Recording with emphasis
You can emphasize analog audio signals that are
recorded from the AUDIO INPUT connectors. When
the emphasis is removed during playback, high
frequency noise is effectively eliminated without
affecting the original signal.
The display range of the audio level meters in FULL
mode can be set with 814.LEVEL METER SCALE in
the VTR SETUP menu.
To use the emphasis function, set item 806.AUDIO
EMPHASIS in the VTR SETUP menu to on.
During playback, regardless of this setting, only
signals to which emphasis have been applied are
automatically de-emphasized.
5-1-4 Simultaneously Monitoring
Playback of Video and Audio
Signals Being Recorded
Monitoring signals being recorded
Using the 017.PB/EE SELECT MENU settings, the
audio and video signals currently being recorded can
be simultaneously checked.
To check video and audio signals during
recording
In the VTR SETUP menu, set 017.PB/EE SELECT
MENU to PB/PB. Both audio and video playback
signals are output.
To check video and audio signals during
editing
In the VTR SETUP menu, set 017.PB/EE SELECT
MENU to PB/PB. Both audio and video playback
signals are output.
Monitoring previously recorded video and
audio signals while recording
To monitor previously recorded audio and video
signals while recording (preread function), press the
ALT button in the HOME menu, then press the [F1]
(PRE READ) button.
For details, see Section 4-2-4, “Preread Setting (PRE
READ)” on page 4-17.
5-4
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2 Recording
To record, follow the procedure below.
1
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500
3 2
Recording
1 Check that the REC INHIBIT indicator is off, then
insert a cassette.
For details on inserting a cassette, see Section 3-3-2,
“Inserting and Ejecting Cassettes” on page 3-8.
2 Press the PLAY button while holding down the
REC button.
Recording starts and the SERVO indicator lights
up to indicate that the servo is locked.
3 Press the STOP button to stop recording.
If the recording continues to the end of the
tape
If item 407. AUTO REWIND in the VTR SETUP
menu is set to ON, then the tape automatically rewinds
to the beginning and stops.
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-5
5-3 Preparing for Playback
5-3-1 Setting Switches and Menus
Before starting playback, set the switches and menus
as shown in the diagram below.
For details, refer to the pages indicated in the parentheses.
POWER switch: ON
AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT buttons:
Audio channels to be monitored (page 5-2)
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500
PB level controls:
Playback level
REMOTE buttons: None of
these buttons light up.
Menu settings
[F1] (TIMER SEL) button in the TC menu: Select the time data to be displayed.
[F6] (TCG SOURCE) button in the TC menu: int-LTC, int-VITC, ext-LTC, ext-VITC (see page 4-25)
[F7] (TCG MODE) button in the TC menu: regene, prst, auto (see page 4-25)
Setting switches and menus
To adjust the audio playback level
manually
5-3-2 Adjusting the Audio
Playback Level
Pull and rotate the PB level control for the
corresponding channel.
If the PB level controls on the upper control panel are
pushed in, audio signals are output at the factory-set
level (+4 dBm output for signals recorded at the 0 dB
reference level).
For details on changing the factory-set reference output
level, refer to the supplied Maintenance Manual.
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500
PB level controls
To adjust the audio playback level manually
5-6
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When 13:9 is selected
5-3-3 Selecting the HD-SD
Conversion Mode
(when HKDV-501A is installed)
HD
SD
/
When the optional HKDV-501A HD-SD Converter
Board is installed in the HDW-F500, the conversion
mode can be selected with setting the VTR SETUP
menu 754. DOWNCONVERTER MODE.
The sides of the HDVS image are cut and the signal is
compressed, changing the aspect ratio to 13:9.
• Edge crop (CROP)
• Squeeze mode (SQUEEZE)
HD
SD
HD
SD
/
/
,
One-fourth of the HD screen on each side is cut off.
The sides of the HDVS image are cut and the signal is
compressed, changing the aspect ratio to 13:9.
Horizontal adjustment of the edge cropping
Adjust the 766.H CROP POSITION setting in VTR
SETUP menu.
• Letter box mode (LETTER BOX)
When the letter box mode is selected, you can select
one of the following conversion methods through item
778.LETTER BOX MODE in the VTR SETUP menu.
When 16:9 is selected
HD
SD
/
The signal is compressed, maintaining an aspect ratio of 16:9.
When 14:9 is selected
HD
SD
/
The sides of the HDVS image are cut and the signal is
compressed, changing the aspect ratio to 14:9.
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-3 Preparing for Playback
4 Press the [F9](SYSTEM MENU) button.
5-3-4 Selecting the Conversion
Mode of the Effective Scanning Line
Number (when HKDV-502 is installed)
CH.COND
SYSTEM MENU
ACTIVE
LINE
off
SYSTEM MENU
SYSTEM
FREQ
[F1]1080
[F2]SYSTEM FREQUENCY
MODE7 59.94i
[F3]SDI OUT.
1035
(CONVERT)
When the optional HKDV-502 HD Line Converter
Board is installed in the HDW-F500, to select the
conversion mode, follow the procedure below.
MODE7
( D1 / D2 )
D-CONV
SDI
[F4]META DATA(FILM/C.C./USER)
[F8]Cancel
D1
[F9]Execute of Reset VTR System.
with conditions
META
DATA
STOP & not STANDBY
EJECT Tape.
FILM
1 Press the MAINTENANCE switch using the tip of
CANCEL EXEC
EXIT
a small pointed object.
CH.COND
MAINTE INFO
ROM
VER
TCR 00:00:00:00
5 Press the [F1](ACTIVE LINE) button to select the
conversion mode.
MAINTENANCE INFOMATION DISPLAY
ERR
LOG
OPERATION
529HOURS
34HOURS[
20HOURS[
DRUM RUNNING
TAPE TRAVEL
26H]
16H]
Pressing the button cycles the settings from 1035,
1080, off. off is used to activate the function to
improve the vertical resolution during slow-motion
playback.
1035: Convert the effective scanning line number
from 1080 to 1035.
TH
i
9H]
OPERATION INFO
FREQ:
59.94i
LINE:1080 1035(CONV)
OPTION
INFO
MAINTE
EXEC
EXIT
1080: Convert the effective scanning line number
from 1035 to 1080.
2 Press the [F8](MAINTE EXEC) button while
holding down the SFT button.
6 Press the [F9](EXEC).
A message asking you to confirm the operation
appears in the display.
CH.COND
MAINTENANCE
TCR 00:00:00:00
MAINTENANCE
ROM
MAINT
To cancel the execution
Press the [F8](CANCEL) button.
OPERATION
529HOURS
34HOURS[
20HOURS[
780TIMES[
DRUM RUNNING
TAPE TRAVEL
THREADING
26H]
16H]
PANEL
MAINT
449H]
7 Press the [F9](EXEC).
SERVO
CHECK
The HDW-F500 is restarted automatically.
DT/SAT
CHECK
RF
A/V
OTHERS
EXIT
CHECK CHECK CHECK
8 Press the SET UP button.
The VTR SETUP menu appears in the display.
3 Press the [F9](OTHERS CHECK) button.
CH.COND
OTHERS CHK
NVRAM
CTL
TCR 00:00:00:00
OTHERS CHECK
MEMORY
CHECK
RS232C
STATUS
M-HEAD
ROOM
HOURS PAPA-I PAPA-O
METER SETUP SETUP
SYSTEM
MENU
EXIT
5-8
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 Select the conversion mode in the VTR SETUP
5-3-5 Improving the Vertical
Resolution during Slow-Motion
Playback (when HKDV-502 is
installed)
menu below.
•When 1035 is selected in the procedure 5.
Select the conversion mode using the 730.ACTIVE
LINE 1035 CONVERT MODE setting in the VTR
SETUP menu.
1080÷1035(CONV): Convert the effective
scanning line number from 1080 to 1035
preserving the aspect ratio of the image.
When the optional HKDV-502 HD Line Converter
Board is installed in the HDW-F500, to activate the
function to improve the vertical resolution during
slow-motion playback, follow the procedure below.
1 Press the MAINTENANCE switch using the tip of
a small pointed object.
1080
1035
CH.COND
MAINTE INFO
ROM
VER
TCR 00:00:00:00
MAINTENANCE INFOMATION DISPLAY
ERR
LOG
1080÷1035(CROP): Convert the effective
scanning line number from 1080 to 1035. The
four sides of the image are cropped, then it is
horizontally expanded.
OPERATION
529HOURS
34HOURS[
20HOURS[
DRUM RUNNING
TAPE TRAVEL
26H]
16H]
TH
i
9H]
OPERATION INFO
FREQ:
59.94i
LINE:1080 1035(CONV)
OPTION
INFO
MAINTE
EXEC
EXIT
1080
1035
1920
1920
samples
samples
2 Press the [F8](MAINTE EXEC) button while
holding down the SFT button.
•When 1080 is selected in the procedure 5.
Select the conversion mode using the 731.ACTIVE
LINE 1080 CONVERT MODE setting in the VTR
SETUP menu.
CH.COND
MAINTENANCE
TCR 00:00:00:00
MAINTENANCE
ROM
MAINT
1035÷1080(CONV): Convert the effective
scanning line number from 1035 to 1080
preserving the aspect ratio of the image.
OPERATION
529HOURS
34HOURS[
20HOURS[
780TIMES[
DRUM RUNNING
TAPE TRAVEL
THREADING
26H]
16H]
PANEL
MAINT
449H]
SERVO
CHECK
DT/SAT
CHECK
RF
A/V
OTHERS
EXIT
CHECK CHECK CHECK
1035
1080
3 Press the [F9](OTHERS CHECK) button.
1035÷1080(PANEL): Convert the effective
scanning line number from 1035 to 1080. The
1035 lines of the image are inserted into the
1035 lines of 1080 lines, then it is horizontally
compressed.
CH.COND
OTHERS CHK
NVRAM
CTL
TCR 00:00:00:00
OTHERS CHECK
MEMORY
CHECK
RS232C
STATUS
M-HEAD
ROOM
1035
1080
1035
HOURS PAPA-I PAPA-O
METER SETUP SETUP
SYSTEM
MENU
EXIT
(Continued)
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-9
5-3 Preparing for Playback
4 Press the [F9](SYSTEM MENU) button.
CH.COND
SYSTEM MENU
ACTIVE
LINE
off
SYSTEM MENU
SYSTEM
FREQ
[F1]1080
[F2]SYSTEM FREQUENCY
MODE7 59.94i
[F3]SDI OUT.
1035
(CONVERT)
MODE7
( D1 / D2 )
D-CONV
SDI
[F4]META DATA(FILM/C.C./USER)
[F8]Cancel
D1
[F9]Execute of Reset VTR System.
with conditions
META
DATA
STOP & not STANDBY
EJECT Tape.
FILM
CANCEL EXEC
EXIT
5 Press the [F1](ACTIVE LINE) button to select off.
Pressing the button cycles the settings from 1035,
1080, off.
1035 and 1080 are used to activate the function to
convert the effective scanning line number.
6 Press the [F9](EXEC).
A message asking you to confirm the operation
appears in the display.
To cancel the execution
Press the [F8](CANCEL) button.
7 Press the [F9](EXEC).
The HDW-F500 is restarted automatically.
8 Press the SET UP button.
The VTR SETUP menu appears in the display.
9 Select on in the 732.SLOW PROCESS MODE of
the VTR SETUP menu.
on: Improve the vertical resolution during slow-
motion playback.
off: Do not improve the vertical resolution during
slow-motion playback.
5-10
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-4 Playback
There are four types of playback:
• Normal-speed playback
5-4-2 Variable Speed Playback
• Jog/Shuttle/Variable mode playback
• Capstan override playback
• DMC (Dynamic Motion Control) playback
In Jog/Shuttle/Variable modes, you can change the
playback speed as follows:
Jogmode: The playback speed corresponds to the
rotational speed of the search dial, ranging from
–1 to +1 or –2 to +2 times normal playback speed.
(The speed setting can be changed in the VTR
SETUP menu using item 107.JOG DIAL
RESPONSE.)
Shuttle mode: The playback speed corresponds to
the angle of rotation of the search dial. The
playback speed is different depending on the
frame frequency of the unit. The search dial
clicks at the positions for still-picture and ±10
times normal speed playback.
5-4-1 Normal-Speed Playback
Follow the procedure below to play back at normal
speed.
1
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500
Frame frequency Playback speed
23.98/24 Hz
25 Hz
Ranging from –60 to +60
Ranging from –58 to +58
Ranging from –50 to +50
29.97/30 Hz
Variable mode: Playback speed is –1 times normal
speed when the search dial is rotated fully
counterclockwise, and +2 times normal speed
when rotated clockwise.
32
Normal-speed playback
1 Insert a cassette.
For details on inserting a cassette, see Section 3-3-2,
“Inserting and Ejecting Cassettes” on page 3-8.
2 Press the PLAY button.
Playback starts and the SERVO indicator lights up
to indicate that the servo is locked.
3 Press the STOP button to stop playback.
If playback continues to the end of the tape
If item 407. AUTO REWIND in the VTR SETUP
menu is set to ON, then the tape automatically rewinds
to the beginning and stops.
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-11
5-4 Playback
Jog mode playback
Shuttle mode playback
Follow the procedure below to play back in jog mode.
Follow the procedure below to play back in shuttle
mode.
1
1
1,2,3
3
1,2,3
Jog mode playback
Shuttle mode playback
1
Press the JOG button so that the JOG button lights up.
The p indicator lights up and the VTR enters still-
picture mode.
1 Press the SHUTTLE button so that the SHUTTLE
button lights up.
The pindicator lights up and the VTR enters still-
picture mode.
2 Rotate the search dial in the desired playback
direction and to the desired angle.
2 Rotate the search dial in the desired playback
direction and set the angle of rotation as required
to obtain the desired playback speed.
The tape is played back slowly, at a speed
corresponding to the rotational speed of the search
dial. A direction indicator (“or ” ) lights up to
indicate the direction of playback.
Shuttle mode
3 Stop rotating the search dial to stop jog mode
playback.
The indicator lights up.
(–60/–58/–50)
(+60/+58/+50)
Note
You can change the search dial mode selection so that
pressing the search dial switches the VTR between jog
and shuttle modes.
The tape is played back at a speed that corresponds
to the angle of the search dial. A direction
indicator (“or ” ) lights up to indicate the
direction of playback.
For details on switching the search dial functions, refer to
the supplied Mainenance Manual.
The search dial clicks at the positions for still-
picture and ±10 times normal-speed playback.
3 Set the search dial to center position for still-
picture, or press the STOP button to stop shuttle
mode playback.
5-12
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return to normal-speed playback
Press the PLAY button.
The tape is played back at a speed that corresponds
to the angle of the search dial. A direction
indicator (“or ” ) lights up to indicate the
direction of playback.
The search dial clicks at the positions for still-
picture and normal-speed playback.
Note
The audio signal output status is specified by the
following settings of 017. PB/EE SELECT MENU in
the VTR SETUP menu.
EE: The input audio is output.
MU: The audio output is muted.
PB: The playback audio signal is output for playback
speeds of –1 to +2 times normal speed, and is
muted for playback speeds of more than –1 or +2
times normal speed.
3 Set the search dial to center position for still-
picture, or press the STOP button to stop variable
mode playback.
To return to normal-speed playback
Press the PLAY button.
To alternate between normal-speed playback
and variable mode playback
Variable mode playback
After you have set the search dial to the angle that
corresponds to the desired playback speed, pressing
the PLAY button or VAR button selects normal-speed
playback or variable mode playback, respectively.
To stop or start variable mode playback, press the
STOP button or VAR button, respectively.
Follow the procedure below to play back in variable
mode.
1
The VTR is factory set so that pressing the JOG,
SHUTTLE, or VAR button is required in order to enter
variable-speed playback mode. To change this setting,
use item 101. SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL
ENABLE in the VTR SETUP menu.
3
2,3
Variable mode playback
1 Press the VAR button so that it lights up.
The indicator lights up and the VTR enters still-
VAR mode.
2 Rotate the search dial in the desired playback
direction and set the angle of rotation as required
to achieve the desired playback speed.
Variable mode
–1
+2
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-13
5-4 Playback
5-4-3 Capstan Override Playback
5-4-4 DMC Playback
When playing back the same program on two VTRs,
you can adjust the playback phases of the two VTRs so
that they are synchronized.
There are two ways to make this adjustment:
(A) Using the search dial
Overview of DMC playback
DMC (Dynamic Motion Control) playback allows you
to vary the playback speed in variable mode (in the DT
playback range between –1 and +2 times normal
speed) for certain sections of the tape, then store the
specified speed in memory for later playback.
(B) Using the +/– buttons
Note
For example, during a live broadcast of a sporting
event, you can set the start and end points of important
scenes while recording, and immediately play back
and broadcast those scenes using DMC playback.
When using method (A), change the system setup so
that jog/shuttle mode playback is inhibited even when
the search dial is rotated. Doing so prevents the VTR
from accidentally entering jog/shuttle mode during
capstan override playback. Make this setting through
101. SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL ENABLE in
the VTR SETUP menu.
Storing playback speeds in memory
Follow the procedure below to store playback speeds
in memory.
1(B)
5
4,6
1,2
1(A)
Capstan override playback
1
2
3,7
1 Use either method (A) or (B).
(A)Rotate the search dial while holding down the
PLAY button to adjust the playback speed.
The adjustment range is ±15% (in steps of 1%)
of the normal playback speed.
Storing playback speeds in memory
1 In HOME menu, press the ALT button, then press
the[F7]
display.
(DMC)buttontolightupDMConthe
(B)Press the + or – button while holding down the
PLAY button to adjust the playback speed.
Every time the + or – button is pressed, the
speed changes using the field number set in the
VTR SETUP menu under item 004.CAPSTAN
LOCK select.
2 Set a start point during recording or on a
previously recorded tape by simultaneously
pressing the ENTRY button and the IN button.
During playback at increased or decreased speed,
the SERVO indicator goes off since the servo is
not locked (capstan override).
3 Press the STOP button to enter stop mode.
4 Rotate the search dial to select the initial playback
speed.
2 Release the PLAY button after you have finished
adjusting the phase.
The selected speeds are shown in the time data
display window in the menu display.
The VTR returns to normal-speed playback and the
SERVO indicator lights up.
5-14
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performing DMC playback
Note
If the 101.SELECTION FOR SEARCH DIAL
ENABLE setting in the VTR SETUP menu is set
to dial direct, initial speed settings cannot be made.
Change the 101.SELECTION FOR SEARCH
DIAL ENABLE setting to via search key.
There are two methods of starting DMC playback.
• Starting playback at the on-air cue from the on-air
start point
• Starting playback immediately after prerolling
Note
5 Press the PREROLL button and PREVIEW button
simultaneously.
To avoid operation errors, we recommend that you use
the VTR alone when performing DMC playback.
The tape is prerolled and played back at the initial
speed from the preroll point to the speed variation
start point. The moment the tape passes the speed
variation start point, the MEMORY indicator in the
display starts flashing.
1 2
(The pindicator appears in the time data display
window, indicating that tape speed memorization
in DMC mode is active.)
6 Rotate the search dial to the position for the
desired playback speed.
The speed variation is stored in memory while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
Performing DMC playback
7 Press the STOP button to stop the tape.
To start playback at the on-air cue from the
on-air start point
If the MEMORY indicator frashes before the
tape reaches the speed variation end point
Memory has been exceeded and the VTR cannot store
any more data for playback speed variations.
1 Press the PREROLL button.
The PREROLL button lights up and the tape is
cued up to the on-air start point.
Notes on the p indicator and the MEMORY
indicator
2 Press the PREVIEW button at the moment the on-
air cue is given.
The pindicator shows that the tape speed
memorization in DMC mode is taking place.
The MEMORY indicator flashes during playback
speed memorization, then stays lit continuously when
memorization of the playback speed has been
completed.
The PREVIEW button lights up. When the tape
passes the speed variation start point, DMC
playback starts and continues at the speed(s) stored
in memory. When the tape passes the speed
variation end point, normal-speed playback starts
and the tape stops at the on-air end point.
To start playback immediately after prerolling
Press the PREVIEW button.
The PREVIEW button lights up. When the tape passes
the speed variation start point, DMC playback starts
and continues at the speed(s) stored in memory. When
the tape passes the speed variation end point, normal-
speed playback resumes.
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-15
5-4 Playback
To stop the tape during DMC playback
Press the STOP button.
5-4-6 Output of Pull Down Signal
The explanation of pull down signal output for
playback is given below.
To exit DMC playback mode
Press the ALT/[F7] (DMC) button in HOME menu to
go off DMC on the display.
Time code multiplexed to pull down signal
output
During DMC playback, the tape runs as shown in the
diagram below.
• The value of the time code multiplexed to pull down
HD SDI output signal is determined by the time code
preset using the PDPSET MENU in the TC menu and
converted into 30-frame time code.
Speed variation
end point
$
Preroll time ×
initial speed
$
IN point
$
Note
Press the PREVIEW button.
LTC output of this unit is always 24-frame time code
which is output from the main output line of this unit.
• When this unit is operated in 24F mode, time code
data of the user’s bits area is not included in the pull
down signal output. The time code value before
conversion (24F mode) and sequence information of
conversion contained in user’s bits data are
multiplexed to the HD SDI output signal. The
following four bits are used for the sequence
information to display 0 to 9 repeatedly.
MSB: The first bit of the tens digit of the hour
The second bit of the tens digit of the hour
Tape runs at
initial speed
Playback mode
using the
memorized speed
Playback at
normal speed
The first bit of the tens digit of the minute
DMC playback
LSB: The first bit of the tens digit of the second
When the sequence information is masked, the
remaining contents of user’s bits data are the same as
the time code value before conversion (24F mode).
5-4-5 Playing Back Non-audio
Data
Note
Since user’s bits data multiplexed to the down-
converted output signal are updated frame by frame,
24-frame time code and sequence information of the
down-converted output signal differs from those
multiplexed to the HD output signal.
Non-audio data recorded on a tape is detected
automatically and played back.
Note
When non-audio data is being played back:
• The “OVER” indication on the audio level meters
flashes.
• Analog audio output to the main line, monitor, and
the headphones are muted.
Time code area
30F TC
User’s bits area (HD)
24F TC + sequence information
A frame
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:00
00:00:00:01
00:00:00:01
00:00:00:02
00:00:00:02
00:00:00:03
00:00:00:03
00:00:00:04
00:00:00:00
00:00:80:00
00:80:00:01
00:80:80:01
40:00:00:01
40:00:80:02
40:80:00:02
40:80:80:03
80:00:00:03
80:00:80:03
00:00:00:04
00:00:80:04
*
*
*
*
*
*
• The playback level cannot be adjusted using the PB
audio output level controls.
Cycle of
conversion
00:00:00:04
00:00:00:05
00:00:00:05
A frame
5-16
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Phase lock for the HD reference signal
(23.98PsF) and 525 black burst signal
(59.94i mode)
Output delay
When an optional HKDV-507 HD Pull Down Board is
installed, or when an optional HKDV-507D HD Pull
Down Board is installed and item A05. PD EXT SD
REF LOCK MODE in the VTR SETUP menu is set to
“off” or “lock1,” the phase of the output delay for
conversion is as illustrated below.
However, when the HKDV-507D board is installed
and item A05 is set to “lock1,” pull down output is
locked to the external reference signal (525 black burst
signal).
When an optional HKDV-507D HD Pull Down Board
is installed and item A05. PD EXT SD REF LOCK
MODE in the VTR SETUP menu is set to “lock1” or
“lock2” to lock the pull down output signal to the
external reference signal, the phase of the external
reference signals for 24F mode and 30F mode should
be locked as illustrated below.
Line 1
HD SDI
or
1 frame
23.976PsF
external HD Ref.
A
B
C
D
A
B
Exetrnal SD Ref.
Line 4 ± 10 lines
1 frame
59.94i
A frame: No.2
A frame: No.1
A frame: No.0
A frame: No.3
D1 D2 A1 A2 B1 B2 B1 C2 C1 D2 D1 D2
D1 D2 A1 A2 B1 B2 B1 C2 C1 D2 D1 D2
•Tri-level sync signal
(1125/59.94i)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
D1 D2 A1 A2 B1 B2 B1 C2 C1 D2 D1 D2
D1 D2 A1 A2 B1 B2 B1 C2 C1 D2 D1 D2
1122 1123 1124 1125
Variable
•3.58 black burst signal
delay
(525/59/94i)
2
3
4
5
6
Pull down audio output
Pull down output phase lock
Audio signal multiplexed to the pull down HD SDI
output signal is delayed so that the audio signal and the
video signal are equal in phase as considering the
video signal delay due to video signal processing. The
pulled down and down-converted SDI output signal is
also multiplexed with the delayed audio signal.
When an optional HKDV-507D HD Pull Down Board
is installed and item A05. PD EXT SD REF LOCK
MODE in the VTR SETUP menu is set to “lock2”,
the phase of the pull dowm otuput signal can be locked
as illustrated below.
Note
23.976PsF
The AES/EBU or analog audio output signal and 24-
frame video output signal (the main output line of this
unit) are equal in phase.
A
B
C
D
A
B
59.94i
C1 D2 D1 D2 A1 A2 B1 B2 B1 C2 C1 D2 D1 D2
2 frames delay
(59.94i)
Chapter 5 Recording/Playback
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing
Steps in automatic editing
6-1-1 Overview of Automatic
Editing
The sequence of steps that are taken to do automatic
editing with two VTRs is as follows:
Automatic edit modes
Select the edit mode (page 6-3).
.
The VTR provides the following two modes for
automatic editing:
Set edit points for the recorder and player VTR
(page 6-3).
.
• Assemble mode
Preview the edit section (page 6-9).
New scenes are added to the end of previously
recorded scenes.
CTL signals, time codes, video and audio signals on
tape in the player are recorded onto tape in the
recorder VTR.
.
Perform the edit (page 6-12).
.
Confirm and modify the edit points
(pages 6-8 and 6-10).
.
• Insert mode
Confirm the results of the edit (page 6-13).
New scenes are inserted into the middle of previously
recorded scenes. CTL signals on tape in the recorder
VTR are not overwritten. Video, digital audio, cue
audio, and time code signals can be recorded
separately.
Editing precautions
Using an editing control unit
Both of these two edit modes support DMC editing.
In insert mode, you can also use split editing.
When using an editing control unit to control the VTR,
set the edit delay on the control unit so that CUT-IN
and CUT-OUT commands are sent to the VTR five
frames ahead of the actual edit point.
Interpolation of time codes by the CTL
counter
To use time codes as addresses of edit points, the time
codes must be recorded on the tape in ascending order.
As long as they are in ascending order, time codes do
not have to be continuous. The CTL counter
automatically interpolates data for editing even if there
are breaks in the continuity in the time codes.
Chapter 6 Editing
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing
6-1-2 Setting Switches and Menus
Before editing, set the following switches as shown
below.
AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT buttons: input signal
Recorder VTR
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500
POWER switch: ON
REC level controls: recording levels
REMOTE buttons: None of
these buttons light up.
[F1] (VIDEO IN) button in the PF1 menu (factory setting):
SDI, SDTI(when HKDV-506A is installed)
[F1] (TIMER SELECT) button in the TC menu:
TC or CTL
Player VTR
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500
POWER switch: ON
REMOTE buttons: 1(9P) button
lights up.
PB level controls:
playback levels
[F1] (TIMER SEL) button in the TC menu: CTL or TC
Setting switches and menus
6-2
Chapter 6 Editing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-1-3 Selecting the Edit Mode
6-1-4 Setting Edit Points
Select assemble or insert mode.
This section describes how to set edit points (IN and
OUT points). In insert mode, a technque called split
editing allows you to set edit points separately for
video and audio.
[F3] (ASSEMBLE) button in the HOME menu
Positioning and setting edit points
1
[F4] (INS TC) to [F10] (INS CUE) buttons in the HOME menu
Selecting the edit mode
Press one of the following buttons to select the
respective edit mode:
• Assemble mode: [F3] (ASSEMBLE) button in the
HOME menu
3
2
• Insert mode: the appropriate INSERT button in
the HOME menu ([F4] (INS TC), [F5] (INS
VIDEO), [F6] (INS A-CH1), [F7] (INS A-CH2),
[F8] (INS A-CH3), [F9] (INS A-CH4), [F10] (INS
CUE))
Positioning and setting edit points
1 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to
select the VTR for which edit points are to be set.
The button lights up.
2 Rotate the search dial in jog or shuttle mode to
position the edit point.
For details on jog or shuttle playback, refer to “5-4-2
Variable Speed Playback” on page 5-11.
3 Press the IN (or OUT) button while holding down
the ENTRY button.
The time data for the IN (or OUT) point appears in
the menu display.
4 Repeat Steps 1 to 3 to set the remaining edit
points. Editing can begin when the points are set.
Chapter 6 Editing
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing
Setting edit points with the numeric buttons
3 Press the SET button to set the input data.
SET is
displayed.
2
CLR button1
CH.COND
GREEN
HOME
01 00 30 00
PB/EE
PB
SET
PLAY
LOCK
TCR
2FD F1
RECINH
off
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ
OUT 00:02:10:00
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00
ÅSSEM-
BLE
IN 00:01:10:00
PLÅYER
off
INS
TC
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00
IN 00:01:10:00 OUT 00:02:10:00
off
INS
INS INS INS
INS
INS
CUE
4 3
VIDEO Å-CH1 Å-CH2 Å-CH3 Å-CH4
off off off off off
off
Setting edit points with the numeric buttons
1 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to
select the VTR for which edit points are to be set.
The button lights up.
4 Press the IN (or OUT) button.
The time data for the IN (or OUT) point appears in
the menu display.
2 Enter the edit point data with the numeric buttons.
For example, to enter 01H00M30S00F, press 1, 0,
0, 3, 0, 0, 0. (The leading 0 is not required. When
the entered value is less than eight digits, the
leading digit(s) are set to 0 when you press the
SET button.)
About automatic edit point setting
Editing requires a total of four edit points: IN and
OUT points for both the recorder and player VTRs.
However, as soon as you set three edit points, the VTR
automatically sets the fourth point.
In the figure below, the points enclosed in a box have
been set manually, while the OUT point for the player
VTR has been set automatically.
CH.COND
GREEN
HOME
PB/EE
PB
Entered data are
displayed.
PLAY
LOCK
TCR
2FD F1
IN point
OUT point
RECINH
off
$
$
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ
OUT 00:02:10:00
Recorder VTR
Player VTR
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00
ÅSSEM-
BLE
IN 00:01:10:00
PLÅYER
off
INS
TC
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00
IN 00:01:10:00 OUT 00:02:10:00
off
INS
INS INS INS
INS
INS
CUE
VIDEO Å-CH1 Å-CH2 Å-CH3 Å-CH4
off off off off off
off
4
4
IN point
OUT point
To delete entered data
Automatic edit point setting
Press the CLR button.
Whether set manually or automatically, all edit points
can be changed or deleted at any time.
6-4
Chapter 6 Editing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic setting of OUT points
When the fourth edit point (OUT point) is set, the edit
point data is activated and the invalid point is
automatically deleted
Split editing
Positioning and setting edit points
Split editing allows you to set edit points separately for
video and audio. Set audio edit points with the
AUDIO IN/OUT buttons and video edit points with
the IN/OUT buttons.
Automatically
set edit point
IN point
OUT point OUT point
Split editing, however, can only be done when the
recorder VTR is in insert mode.
$
$
$
Recorder VTR
Player VTR
2
4
4
IN point
OUT point
Fourth edit point
1
4
3
Automatic setting of IN points
When an IN point is corrected, the OUT point is set
automatically using the duration of the VTR whose
edit points were not changed.
Positioning and setting edit points
1 Press the appropriate INSERT button in HOME
menu ([F4] (INS TC), [F5] (INS VIDEO),
[F6] (INS A-CH1), [F7] (INS A-CH2), [F8] (INS
A-CH3), [F9] (INS A-CH4), [F10] (INS CUE)).
IN point
OUT point
$
$
Recorder VTR
2 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to
select the VTR for which edit points are to be set.
The button lights up.
Player VTR
3 To locate the edit points, rotate the search dial in
4
4
4
4
jog or shuttle mode.
IN point
IN point
OUT point OUT point
For details on jog/shuttle/variable playback modes,
refer to “5-4-2 Variable Speed Playback” on page 5-11.
Corrected
edit point
Automatically
set edit point
4 Press the IN (OUT, AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT)
button while holding down the ENTRY button.
5 Repeat Steps 2 to 4 to set the remaining edit
points.
Chapter 6 Editing
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing
Setting edit points with the numeric buttons
4 Press the SET button to set the input data.
SET is
displayed.
CLR button
3
2
CH.COND
GREEN
HOME
01 00 30 00
PB/EE
PB
SET
PLAY
LOCK
TCR
2FD F1
RECINH
off
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ
IN 00:01:20:00
PLÅYER
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00
ÅSSEM-
BLE
OUT 00:02:20:00
off
INS
TC
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00
IN 00:01:20:00 OUT 00:02:20:00
off
INS
INS INS INS
INS
INS
CUE
1 5 4
VIDEO Å-CH1 Å-CH2 Å-CH3 Å-CH4
off off off off off
off
Setting edit points with the numeric buttons
1 Press the appropriate INSERT button in HOME
menu ([F4] (INS TC), [F5] (INS VIDEO),
5 Press the IN (OUT, AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT)
button.
[F6] (INS A-CH1), [F7] (INS A-CH2), [F8] (INS
A-CH3), [F9] (INS A-CH4), [F10] (INS CUE)).
The time data for the IN (OUT, AUDIO IN or
AUDIO OUT) point appears in the menu display.
2 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to
select the VTR for which edit points are to be set.
The button lights up.
About automatic split edit point setting
Split editing requires a total of eight edit points: four
edit points for video editing (IN and OUT points for
both the recorder and player VTRs) and four edit points
for audio editing (AUDIO IN and OUT points for both
the recorder and player VTRs). However, as soon as
you set five edit points, the VTR automatically sets the
remaining three points. For example, if you set three
edit points for video (or audio) and two for audio (or
video), the remaining three points are automatically set,
regardless of whether these points are for the recorder
or player.
In the following example, the points enclosed in a box
have been set manually and the AUDIO OUT point for
the recorder VTR, and the AUDIO IN and OUT points
for the player VTR have been set automatically.
Note that whether set manually or automatically, all
edit points can be changed or deleted at any time.
3 Enter the edit point data with the numeric buttons.
For example, to enter 01H00M30S00F, press 1, 0,
0, 3, 0, 0, 0. (The leading 0 is not required. When
the entered value is less than eight digits, the
leading digit(s) are set to 0 when you press the
SET button.)
CH.COND
GREEN
HOME
PB/EE
PB
Input data
are displayed.
PLAY
LOCK
TCR
2FD F1
RECINH
off
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ
IN 00:01:20:00
PLÅYER
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00
ÅSSEM-
BLE
OUT 00:02:20:00
off
INS
TC
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00
IN 00:01:20:00 OUT 00:02:20:00
off
INS
INS INS INS
INS
INS
CUE
VIDEO Å-CH1 Å-CH2 Å-CH3 Å-CH4
AUDIO
IN point
$
AUDIO
OUT point
$
off off off off off
off
IN point
OUT point
$
$
Recorder VTR
To delete entered data
Press the CLR button.
Player VTR
4
4
4
4
OUT point
AUDIO
IN point
IN point
AUDIO
OUT point
Automatic split edit point setting
6-6
Chapter 6 Editing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic setting of AUDIO OUT points
When the sixth edit point (AUDIO OUT point) is set,
the edit point data is activated and the invalid AUDIO
OUT points are automatically deleted
You can select audio cut-in, crossfade, and fade in/out
in edits, as well as their duration, in the VTR SETUP
menu.
For details, refer to the menu items in the 300 range in the
VTR SETUP menu.
Sixth edit point set
AUDIO
OUT point
Using a VTR without the split editing function
If the player VTR does not support the separate setting
of edit points for video and audio, you can set AUDIO
IN and AUDIO OUT points on the recorder and three
video edit points to enable split editing.
AUDIO
AUDIO
OUT
IN point
OUT point
IN point
point
$
$
$
$
$
Recorder VTR
Player VTR
6-1-5 Editing Non-audio Data
4
4
4
4
4
Before editing non-audio data, set item 317.AUDIO
EDIT MODE in the VTR SETUP menu to “cut edit.”
OUT point
AUDIO
IN point
IN point
AUDIO
OUT point
Note
Noise may be produced during editing of certain non-
audio data.
AUDIO
OUT point
Edit point set
automatically
Automatic setting of edit points by correcting
IN points
When IN points are corrected, the duration in the
uncorrected VTR is used to automatically set OUT
points and AUDIO IN/OUT points.
AUDIO
IN point
AUDIO
OUT point
IN point
OUT point
$
$
$
$
Recorder VTR
Player VTR
4
4
4
4
4
4
AUDIO
IN point
OUT points
IN point
AUDIO
OUT points
IN point
AUDIO
IN points
Automatically
set edit point
Corrected
IN point
Chapter 6 Editing
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing
6-1-6 Confirming Edit Points
6-1-7 Cuing Up and Prerolling
You can preroll the tape to a point prior to the edit start
point (preroll point), or cue up the tape to any edit
point.
Displaying the duration between two edit
points
Follow the procedure below to cue up or preroll the
tape.
The following six kinds of duration can be displayed in
the time data display window:
• Between IN and OUT points
1
• Between IN and AUDIO OUT points
• Between IN and AUDIO IN points
• Between OUT and AUDIO OUT points
• Between OUT and AUDIO IN points
• Between AUDIO IN and AUDIO OUT points
Durations are calculated as follows.
• If both IN and OUT points are set, the duration is the
time between the points.
• If one of the edit points is not set, the duration is set
to 00:00:00.
2
Cuing up and prerolling
1 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to
select the VTR which you want to operate.
The button lights up.
1 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to
select the VTR for which you want to confirm a
duration.
The button lights up.
2 To cue up the tape to an edit point
Press the IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or AUDIO OUT
button while holding down the PREROLL button.
The tape moves to the edit point corresponding to
the button, then stops.
2 Hold down any two IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or
AUDIO OUT buttons.
The duration between the points corresponding to
the two buttons is displayed. The value can be
negative.
To preroll the tape
Press the PREROLL button.
CH.COND
GREEN
TC
TIMER
SEL
The tape is rewound to a point before the edit start
point by the amount determined by the preroll time
setting.
TC
PLAY
LOCK
DUR VITC
2FD F1
TIMER
RESET
00Ó01µ00ß00ƒ
Duration
between two
edit points
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00
IN 00:01:20:00 OUT 00:02:20:00
TIMER
SET
Note
TIMER
HOLD
When the [F1] (TIMER SEL) button in the TC menu is
set to CTL, cuing up is slightly slower than in TC
mode. This is to maintain the accuracy of the CTL
signals.
off
TC
TCG
TCG
RUN
DF/NDF VITC
df TCG
SEL
SOURCE MODE
MODE
VITC
int prst
rec
You can set up the VTR so that priority is placed on
cuing accuracy or speed. Change the VTR setting
through 403. CUEUP BY TC and 404. CUEUP BY
CTL in the VTR SETUP menu.
Displaying the duration between two edit points
6-8
Chapter 6 Editing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the preroll time
6-1-8 Previewing
The preroll time is factory set to 5 seconds, but can be
set to any time between 0 and 30 seconds, in 1-second
steps.
Follow the procedure below to preview the edit
AUTO button
For details, see Section 4-2-7, “Setting the Preroll Time
(PREROLL TIME)” on page 4-18.
PREVIEW/REVIEW
button
When changing the preroll time, set it so that the
recorded section prior to the edit start point is longer
than the preroll time.
The preroll time used in automatic editing is the preroll
time set for the recorder.
PREROLL button
STOP button
Previewing
To preview the edit, press the AUTO button to switch
to AUTO mode, then press the PREVIEW/REVIEW
button.
During previewing, the PREVIEW/REVIEW button
lights up.
After previewing, correct the edit points as required,
then do the preview again.
For details on modifying edit points, refer to “6-1-9
Modifying Edit Points” on page 6-10.
To stop previewing
Press the STOP button.
The tape stops immediately.
To rewind the tape to the preroll point
Press the PREROLL button.
To rewind the tape to the edit point
Press the PREROLL button together with the button
corresponding to the edit point.
Chapter 6 Editing
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing
Monitoring signals during previewing
During previewing, you can monitor the following
video and audio signals on a monitor connected to the
recorder VTR:
• Between preroll and IN points: Playback signal of
the recorder VTR can be monitored.
• Between IN and OUT points: Playback signal of the
player VTR can be monitored in E-E mode.
• Between OUT and post-roll points: Playback signal
of the recorder VTR can be monitored.
6-1-9 Modifying Edit Points
If an edit point is incorrectly set, for example, if an
OUT point is located before an IN point, or the length
of an edit section is different for the recorder and
player VTRs, the time data for the incorrectly set edit
point flash indicating that the VTR cannot perform
editing or previewing. In this case, delete the edit
point, then set a new one correctly.
You can also move an edit point position in one-frame
units.
This may be illustrated as shown below:
Deleting edit points
OUT point
$
IN point
$
PB
(recorder VTR)
EE
(player VTR)
PB
1
(recorder VTR)
2
Deleting edit points
1 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to
select the VTR on which to perform the edit point
deletion.
The button lights up.
2 Press the IN, OUT, AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT
button while holding down the CLR button to
delete the corresponding edit point.
The edit point is deleted and --:--:--:-- appears in
the menu display.
6-10
Chapter 6 Editing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Press the + or – button, then use the numeric
buttons to enter the value to be added or
subtracted.
Moving an edit point position by one
frame at a time
CH.COND
GREEN
HOME
PB/EE
PB
+ 30 00
Entered value
is displayed.
1
PLAY
LOCK
TCR
2FD F1
RECINH
off
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ
OUT 00:02:10:00
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00
ÅSSEM-
BLE
IN 00:01:10:00
PLÅYER
off
INS
TC
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00
IN 00:01:10:00 OUT 00:02:10:00
off
INS
INS INS INS
INS
INS
CUE
VIDEO Å-CH1 Å-CH2 Å-CH3 Å-CH4
off off off off off
off
2,3
Moving an edit point position by one frame at a time
To cancel the entered value
Press the CLR button.
1 Press the RECORDER or PLAYER button to
select the VTR on which to modify the edit point.
The button lights up.
3 Press the SET button.
The result of the addition or subtraction is entered.
2 Press the + or – button while holding down the IN,
OUT, AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT button.
SET is
displayed.
CH.COND
GREEN
HOME
01 00 30 00
PB/EE
PB
Pressing the + or – button moves the edit point by
one frame forward or backward, respectively.
SET
PLAY
LOCK
TCR
2FD F1
RECINH
off
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ
IN 00:01:10:00
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00
3 After making the modification, release the
respective edit point button that you have been
holding down (IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or AUDIO
OUT button).
ÅSSEM-
BLE
OUT 00:02:10:00
PLÅYER
off
INS
TC
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ
ÅIN 00:01:10:00 ÅOUT 00:02:10:00
IN 00:01:10:00 OUT 00:02:10:00
off
INS
INS INS INS
INS
INS
CUE
VIDEO Å-CH1 Å-CH2 Å-CH3 Å-CH4
off off off off off
off
Moving an edit point position with the numeric
buttons
4 Press the IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or AUDIO OUT
button.
1
The modified time data for the edit point appears
in the menu display.
4 2 3
Moving an edit point position with the numeric buttons
1 Press the IN, OUT, AUDIO IN, or AUDIO OUT
button while holding down the CLR button.
Time data for the edit point appears in the data
entry window.
Chapter 6 Editing
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing
6-1-10 Performing Automatic Editing
Overview
Once you have set the necessary edit points, the
AUTO button lights up to show that the VTR is ready
for automatic editing.
During automatic editing, the tape in the recorder VTR
and the player VTR move as shown in the diagram
below.
Preroll point
IN point
OUT point
Post-roll point
.
$
$
.
Recorder VTR
Prerolla)
Post-rollb)
Over-
recordingc)
Assemble editing
Insert editing
Playback mode
Stop
Player VTR
Playback mode
Stop
Tape movement during automatic editing
a) Preroll time: Factory-set to 5 seconds. Can be set from 0 to 30
seconds, in 1-second steps, through the SET UP menu.
b) The post-roll time can be set between 0 and 30 seconds in units
of seconds using the SET UP menu.
c) Over-recording time: 2 seconds.
6-12
Chapter 6 Editing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Monitoring signals during editing
During editing, you can monitor the following video
and audio signals on a monitor connected to the
recorder VTR.
• Between preroll and IN points: Playback signal of
the recorder VTR can be monitored.
• Between IN and OUT points: Playback signal of the
player VTR can be monitored in E-E mode.
• Between OUT and post-roll points: Playback signal
of the recorder VTR can be monitored.
To perform automatic editing
To carry out automatic editing, press the AUTO
button, turning it on, then press the REC/EDIT button.
During editing the indicator above the REC/EDIT
button lights up, and goes off at the end.
AUTO button
PREVIEW/REVIEW button
The video and audio signals that can be monitored are
shown in the diagram below.
IN point
$
OUT point
$
REC/EDIT button
OUT button
PB
PB
(recorder VTR)
EE
(player VTR)
(recorder VTR)
ENTRY button
Performing automatic editing
To stop automatic editing
Press the OUT button while holding down the ENTRY
button.
Monitoring signals during editing
The point where the buttons are pressed is treated as an
OUT point and editing stops.
In CONFI mode, you can monitor video and audio
signals that are just being edited.
Through a menu setting, you can also monitor signals
between preroll and postroll points, including portions
between IN and OUT points, through the CONFI
(confidence) heads during editing.
The CONFI setting is made in item 017.PB/EE
SELECT MENU in the VTR SETUP menu.
To confirm the results of the editing
Press the PREVIEW/REVIEW button to confirm the
edit results. When the preview ends, the tape rewinds
to the OUT point, then stops.
Chapter 6 Editing
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-1 Basic Automatic Editing
Modifying edit points for automatic editing
later
After you perform automatic editing, the time data of
IN, OUT, AUDIO IN or AUDIO OUT points remain
stored in memory. The stored data can be later used to
modify edit points or to execute automatic editing
again.
Follow the procedure below to modify edit points after
executing automatic editing.
1
3
Modifying edit points for automatic editing later
1 In HOME menu, press the ALT button, and then
the [F10] (LAST EDIT) button.
The edit points used in the last automatic edit are
restored.
2 Modify the edit points.
For details on modifying edit points, see Section 6-1-9,
“Modifying Edit Points” on page 6-10.
3 Press the REC/EDIT button.
The VTR performs automatic editing.
6-14
Chapter 6 Editing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-2 Advanced Automatic Editing
This section describes the following advanced editing
methods:
Setting edit points and playback speed
• DMC editing
• Animation editing
• Preread editing
Use the procedure below to set edit points and
playback speeds for DMC editing.
1
2
6-2-1 Performing DMC Editing
If your player VTR has DT (Dynamic Tracking)
capability, you can perform variable speed editing by
controlling the playback speed from the lower control
panel. This type of editing is called DMC editing.
3
4 5
Overview of DMC editing
Setting edit points and playback speed
Requirements for DMC editing
• DMC editing may be done during assemble or insert
editing, but not during split editing.
• The player VTR must support DT playback.
1 Pressthe[F3]
menu,orpresstherespectiveINSERTbutton([F4]
(INSTC),[F5] (INSVIDEO),[F6] (INSA-CH1),
(INSA-CH2),F[8] (INSA-CH3),F[9] (INS
(INSCUE)button)toselectthe
(ASSEMBLE)buttonintheHOME
F[7]
Tape movement during DMC editing
During DMC editing, the tape moves as shown in the
diagram below.
A-CH4)or[F10]
edit mode that you want.
2 Press the PLAYER button to set the VTR to act as
the player VTR.
OUT point
Post-roll
IN point
Preroll
$
$
The PLAYER button lights up.
Recorder
VTR
3 PresstheALT/[F7]
(DMC)buttonsintheHOME
menu.
The button lights up and the VTR enters DMC
editing mode.
Stop
4 Press the IN button while holding down the
ENTRY button to set an edit point.
Playback
mode
DMC editing mode
Playback
mode
Note
Preroll time ×
initial speed
IN point
Post-roll time ×
final speed
You cannot set an OUT point for the player VTR
for DMC editing.
$
Player
VTR
Moves at
the initial
speed.
Playback at speeds
stored in memory
Stop
Moves at
the final
speed.
Tape movement during DMC editing
Chapter 6 Editing
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-2 Advanced Automatic Editing
5 Press the STOP button. The VTR enters STOP
Performing DMC editing
mode.
After setting the playback speeds in preview mode,
press the RECORDER button and REC/EDIT button.
DMC editing is performed at the playback speed(s)
stored in memory.
9 7 6,8
6 Turn the search dial to set the initial speed.
The selected speed is displayed in the time data
display.
PREVIEW/REVIEW button
Performing DMC editing
7 Press the PREVIEW/REVIEW and PREROLL
buttons at the same time.
To confirm the results of DMC editing
Press the PREVIEW/REVIEW button.
The tape prerolls and the player VTR begins
playing at the initial speed.
8 When the pindicator appears with beep indicating
that the IN point has been passed, rotate the search
dial to the desired playback speed(s).
The varying playback speeds are stored in memory
while the pindicator appears in the display.
9 Press the STOP button.
If the p indicator goes off before the tape
passes the OUT point
The VTR has reached its storage capacity, and cannot
store any more playback speed variations.
To exit DMC editing mode
PresstheALT/[F7]
(DMC)buttonsinHOMEmenu.
6-16
Chapter 6 Editing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Set the IN point. The OUT point is set
6-2-2 Animation Editing
automatically.
Animation editing is a form of insert editing which
makes it easier to record a succession of still frames in
fixed field or frame units. The procedure for editing
after selecting animation editing is exactly the same as
for normal insert editing.
2 Press the AUTO button.
The button lights up.
3 Press the PREVIEW/REVIEW button to preview.
To select animation editing, use item 301. EDIT
OPERATION MODE in the VTR SETUP menu.
normal: Selects normal insert editing.
CG: Selects editing in frame units, principally for
recording computer graphics (CG).
4 Press the REC/EDIT button.
Automatic editing starts.
When the edit completes, the OUT point
automatically becomes the next IN point, and the
next OUT point is set automatically.
Repeat Steps 3 to 4 to perform animation editing.
When the edit completes, the OUT point
automatically becomes the next IN point, and the
next OUT point is set automatically with 1 frame
added.
film: Selects editing in field units for film recording.
Since the standard film speed is 24 frames/sec and
VTR frame rate is 30 frames/sec when the frame
frequency is 29.97 Hz or 30 Hz, the duration must
be alternated between 2 and 3 fields when
recording films. In the FILM mode, this setting is
made automatically. When an edit ends, as in the
CG mode, the next IN and OUT points are set
automatically.
Note
film is selectable only when the frame frequency of
the VTR is 29.97 Hz or 30 Hz.
Follow the procedure below to perform animation
editing.
2
1
4 3
Performing animation editing
Chapter 6 Editing
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-2 Advanced Automatic Editing
6-2-3 Performing Preread Editing
Notes
• In preread editing, if an input video signal is used as
the reference signal for the output video signal,
oscillation may occur because of loop connections.
To avoid this, select the external reference signal for
preread editing by setting the item 005. SERVO/AV
REFERENCE select in the VTR SETUP menu to
external.
• When preread mode is selected, shifting of the VTR
to E-E mode is disabled in all operation modes to
prevent oscillation caused by loop connections. If
preread mode is deselected while a loop between the
input and output of the same channel exists, E-E
signals are output and oscillation occurs. To prevent
oscillation, do the procedure below to select PB mode
for both the video and digital audio channels before
the start of preread editing.
Video and digital audio signals already recorded on the
tape can be used as an edit source for insert editing.
This type of editing is called preread editing, as the
VTR uses preread heads to read signals in advance.
Signals that are read in advance can be sent to mixers
for mixing, then recorded to the original channels or
other digital audio channels.
The preread editing settings are performed with the
ALT/[F1]
(PREREAD)buttonsintheHOMEmenu.
For details on the settings, refer to “4-2-4 Preread Settings
(PREREAD)” on page 4-17.
Video
source
1 PresstheALT/[F1]
(PREREAD)buttonsinthe
HOME menu and select video, audio, or a/v.
2 Make the required connections for preread editing.
Digital
Digital video input
video
output
3 Perform preread editing after selecting the insert
Video
switcher
editing mode.
4 After preread editing, undo all the connections
used for the preread editing.
Audio
mixer
Digital
audio
input
5 PresstheALTbutton,andthenpress[F1]
(PRE
READ) button to select off.
Digital
audio
output
6 Check that no loop connections remain.
Audio
source
Preread editing
6-18
Chapter 6 Editing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-3 Manual Editing
Follow the procedure below to perform manual
editing.
7 Press the STOP button to stop the tape.
Note
To ensure a stable picture, start playback at least three
seconds before the IN point.
2
1
DIGITALVIDEOCASSETTERECORDERHDW-F500
3
7 4 5,6
Manual editing
1 Enter jog or shuttle mode to position the tape at a
place at least three seconds before the position at
which you want to set an edit point.
2 Press the AUTO button to turn it off.
3 Press the [F3] (ASSEMBLE) button in the HOME
menu or press the respective INSERT button ([F4]
(INS TC), [F5] (INS VIDEO), [F6] (INS A-CH1),
[F7] (INS A-CH2), [F8] (INS A-CH3), [F9] (INS
A-CH4) or [F10] (INS CUE) button) to select the
edit mode that you want.
4 Press the PLAY button.
Playback starts.
5 Press the REC/EDIT button at the point where you
want to start editing (IN point).
The REC/EDIT button lights, and editing starts.
6 Press the REC/EDIT button where you want to end
editing (OUT point).
Editing ends, but the tape continues to run in
playback mode.
Chapter 6 Editing
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
When this error message appears, the VTR enters the
protection mode and certain operations become
inoperable.
Once the moisture has evaporated, the error message
disappears and the VTR becomes normal.
Head Cleaning
Use the BCT-HD12CL Cleaning Cassette to clean the
video and audio heads. Read the instructions included
with the cleaning cassette carefully, as improper usage
can damage the heads.
Please refer to the supplied Maintenance Manual on
protection mode.
Follow the procedure below to clean the heads.
Insert the cleaning cassette.
If “ERROR-10” appears immediately after
turning the VTR on
Leave the VTR turned on and wait until the error
message goes off. Inserting a cassette is not possible
while the message is on.
The tape runs at normal playback speed for about 3
seconds as it cleans the heads. The cleaning cassette is
automatically ejected when the head cleaning finishes.
Note
When the error message disappears, you can use the
VTR.
Do not run the cleaning tape more than 6 times in
succession to avoid damaging the heads.
If you move the VTR from a cold to a warm
location
Leave the VTR turned off for about ten minutes since
some time is needed for the condensation-detection
mechanism to work.
Please refer to the supplied Maintenance Manual on
cleaning the video and audio heads.
Moisture Condensation
If you suddenly move the VTR from a cold location to
a warm one, or use the VTR in a very humid place,
moisture in the air can form on the head-drum or tape
guide. This is called moisture condensation. If you
play a tape under these conditions, the tape may adhere
to the drum where moisture has collected and become
damaged.
If moisture condenses on the head-drum while you are
operating the VTR, the error message “ERROR-10”
appears in the time data display section.
DOLBY NR CH.COND DIGITÅL HOME
PB/EE
KEY-INH GREEN
BÅSEBÅLL EDIT SET
LOCK
TCR
ERROR - 10
DEW DETECTED
0ƒ
RECINH
off
ÅIN :00
ÅSSEM-
BLE
IN
:00
off
INS
TC
off
INS
INS
INS
INS
INS
INS
CUE
VIDEO Å-CH1 Å-CH2 Å-CH3 Å-CH4
off off off off off
off
Time data display section
When moisture condensation has occurred
Appendix
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Search speed
Shuttle mode:
General
Still to approx. ±60 times normal
playback speed (with the frame
frequency of 24Hz)
Still to approx. ±58 times normal
playback speed (with the frame
frequency of 25Hz)
Still to approx. ±50 times normal
playback speed (with the frame
frequency of 30Hz)
Variable mode:
–1 to +2 times normal playback
speed
Jog mode:
Still to ±2 times normal playback
speed
Record format
HDCAM
Power requirements
Power consumption
Peak inrush current
100 to 240 V AC ±10%, 50/60 Hz
230 W
(1) Power ON, current probe method: 50 A (240 V),
14 A (100V)
(2) Hot switching inrush current, measured in
accordance with European
standard EN55103-1: 10 A
(230V)
Operating temperature
+5°C to +40°C (+41°F to + 104°F)
Storage temperature
Dynamic Tracking range
–1 to +2 times normal playback
speed
Load/unload time 6 seconds or less
Recommended tapes
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to + 140°F)
25% to 80% (relative humidity)
35 kg
Humidity
Mass
Dimensions
427 × 237 × 520 mm (w/h/d)
HDCAM cassette (S- and L-sizes)
(16 3/4 × 9 3/8 × 20 1/2 inches)
Digital video system
Tape system
Digital video signal format
Sampling frequency
Tape speed
77.4 mm/s (with the frame
frequency of 24Hz)
80.7mm/s (with the frame
frequency of 25Hz)
96.7mm/s (with the frame
frequency of 30Hz)
Y: 74.25 MHz
B/PR: 37.125 MHz
P
Quantization
10 bits/sample (Compression:
8 bits/sample)
Compression
Channel coding
Coefficient recording system
S-NRZI PR-IV
Digital record/playback time (Using L-size cassette)
155 minutes (with the frame
frequency of 24Hz)
Error correction Reed-Solomon code
Error concealment Adaptive three dimensional
149 minutes (with the frame
frequency of 25Hz)
124 minutes (with the frame
frequency of 30Hz)
Analog composite output (with optional HKDV-
501A)
Bandwidth
S/N ratio
Y: 0 to 5.75 MHz +0.5 dB/–3.0 dB
56 dB or more
Fast forward/rewind time
Approx. 3 minutes (Using L-size
cassettes)
Y/C delay
15 ns or less
K factor (2T Pulse)
1% or less
Output SCH phase
Based upon RS-170A/CCIR
R.624-3
A-2
Appendix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Digital audio system
Input connectors
Digital audio signal format (CH-1 to CH-4)
Sampling frequency
HD SDI INPUT
BNC (1 + 1 INPUT MONITOR)
48 kHz (synchronized with video)
20 bits/sample
HD SDI (1.485 Gbps) (conforms to
SMPTE 292M/BTA S-004B)
Quantization
Wow and flutter Below measurable level
SDTI (OPTION) IN
Headroom
Emphasis
Selectable settings: 20, 18, 16, 15,
14, 12, and 9 dB
T1=50 µs, T2=15 µs (on/off
selectable in recording mode)
(when the optional HKDV-506A is
installed)
BNC (1)
SDTI (270Mbps)
REF. IN
HD
Analog output
BNC (2 + 2 loop-through)
Trilevel SYNC
0.6 V p-p, 75 Ω , sync negative
Black burst
A/D quantization 20 bits/sample
D/A quantization 20 bits/sample
Frequency response
SD
20 Hz to 20 kHz +0.5 dB/–1.0 dB
(0 dB at 1 kHz)
0.286 V p-p, 75 Ω , sync negative
AUDIO INPUT (AES/EBU)
Dynamic range
Distortion
More than 95 dB (at 1 kHz,
emphasis on)
Less than 0.05% (at 1 kHz,
emphasis on, reference level1))
Less than –90 dB (at 1 kHz,
between any two channels)
BNC (2 + 2 loop-through)
CH1/2 and CH3/4
AES/EBU format, unbalanced
AUDIO INPUT
Crosstalk
XLR 3-pin, female (5)
CH1, 2, 3, 4 and CUE
LOW OFF: –60 dBu, high
impedance, balanced
HIGH OFF: +4 dBu, high
impedance, balanced
HIGH ON: +4 dBm, 600 Ω
termination, balanced
Analog audio (Cue track)
Frequency response
90 Hz to 12 kHz ±3 dB
S/N ratio
More than 45 dB (at 3% distortion
level)
TIME CODE IN
XLR 3-pin, female (1)
0.5 to 18 Vp-p, 10 kΩ , balanced
Distortion
Less than 2% (T.H.D at 1 kHz
reference level1))
Wow and flutter Less than 0.2% rms
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................
1) Reference level: + 4 dBm
Note
gender conventions for input and output connectors in Japan
The ANALOG AUDIO INPUT CH1/2/3/4/CUE connectors,
ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT CH1/2/3/4/CUE connectors,
and TIME CODE IN/OUT connectors (XLR 3-pin) have
which are opposite to those everywhere else in the world. If
using this unit with non-Japanese specification equipment,
use male/female adaptors.
Appendix
A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
REF. OUT
1125 SYNC
Output connectors
BNC (2)
Trilevel SYNC
0.6 Vp-p, 75 Ω , sync negative
HD SDI OUTPUT
BNC (4, MONITOR with
superimposed text)
1, 2, 3 and MONITOR
AUDIO OUTPUT (AES/EBU)
BNC (2)
CH1/2 and CH3/4
SDI (1.485 Gbps) (conforms to
SMPTE 292M/BTA-S004B)
D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION)
AES/EBU format, unbalanced
AUDIO OUTPUT
XLR 3-pin, male (5)
CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4 and CUE
+4 dBm, (with 600 Ω load), low
impedance, balanced
MONITOR OUTPUT
(when the optional HKDV-501A
is installed, D1/D2 switchable)
BNC (3, 3(SUPER) with
superimposed text)
1, 2 and 3(SUPER)
XLR, 3-pin, female (2)
D1 SDI (270 Mbps) (conforms to
SMPTE 259M/CCIR-656-III)
D2 SDI (143 Mbps) (conforms to
SMPTE 259M/CCIR-656-III)
L and R
+4 dBm (with a 600 Ω load), low
impedance, balanced
TIME CODE OUT
XLR, 3-pin, male (1)
2.2 Vp-p, low impedance, balanced
D CONV. OUT (OPTION)
(when the optional HKDV-501A is
installed)
BNC (2, COMPOSITE (SUPER)
with superimposed text)
PHONES
JM-60 stereo phone jack
–∞to –12 dBu (with an 8 Ω load),
unbalanced
COMPOSITE (SUPER)
1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω , sync negative
Black burst
SYNC
0.286 Vp-p, 75 Ω , sync negative
SDTI (OPTION) OUT
Remote connectors
(when the optional HKDV-506A is
installed)
BNC (1)
SDTI (270 Mbps)
CONTROL PANEL
D-sub 15-pin, female
D-sub 9-pin, female
REMOTE 1-OUT D-sub 9-pin, female
REMOTE 1-IN
PULL DOWN OUT (OPTION)
RS-232C
D-sub 25-pin, female
(when the optional HKDV-507/
507D is installed)
BNC (2, with superimposed text)
VIDEO CONTROL
D-sub 9-pin, female (for optional
HKDV-503)
PARALLEL I/O (50P)
D-sub 50-pin, female (with
optional BKDW-509)
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note
The ANALOG AUDIO INPUT CH1/2/3/4/CUE connectors,
ANALOG AUDIO OUTPUT CH1/2/3/4/CUE connectors,
and TIME CODE IN/OUT connectors (XLR 3-pin) have
gender conventions for input and output connectors in Japan
which are opposite to those everywhere else in the world. If
using this unit with non-Japanese specification equipment,
use male/female adaptors.
A-4
Appendix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories supplied
AC power cord (1)
RCC-5G 9-pin remote control cable (1)
PSW 4 × 16 screws for rack mounting (4)
SRAM 64 KB Memory card (1)
Operation Manual (1)
Maintenance Manual Part 1 (1)
Optional accessories
HKDV-501A HD-SD Cconverter Board
HKDV-502 HD Line Converter Board
HKDV-503 HD Digital Video Controller
HKDV-506A SDTI Board
HKDV-507/507D HD Pull Down Board
BKDW-509 Parallel (50-pin) Interface Kit
RMM-110 Rack Mount Adaptor
BCT-HD12CL Cleaning Cassette
MLB-1B-100 Memory Label
Recommended accessories
For details about recommended accessories, contact
your Sony service representative.
Parallel/serial converter
HD-694 equivalent from ASTRO DESIGN
Corporation
XLR/BNC adaptors
BCJ-XP-TRA equivalent from CANARE Corporation
Design and specifications are subject to change
without notice.
Appendix
A-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation Information Display
VIDEO INT SG
Information on the operational status of the unit and
discrepancies between the field frequency of the tape
and that of the unit can be shown in the display.
off: The type of the test signal generated by the
internal video test signal generator is not displayed.
on: The type of the test signal generated by the
internal video test signal generator is displayed.
CH.COND DIGITÅL HOME
PB/EE
GREEN
LOCK
TCR
PLÅY
4FD F1
AUDIO INT SG
RECINH
off
01Ó04µ58ß00ƒ
OUT 00:00:00:00
off: The operating status of the internal audio test
signal generator is not displayed.
on: The operating status of the internal audio test
signal generator is displayed.
ÅIN 00:00:00:00 ÅOUT 00:00:00:00
ÅSSEM-
BLE
IN 00:00:00:00
i
i
off
OPERATION INFO
FREQ:
60Hz∫ 60Hz
VIDEO INT SG: CB
AUDIO INT SG: silnc
INS
TC
off
INS
INS
INS
INS
INS
INS
CUE
VIDEO Å-CH1 Å-CH2 Å-CH3 Å-CH4
META DATA
off off off off off
off
off: Settings are not displayed during the recording
of meta data.
on: Settings are displayed during the recording of
meta data.
Operation information
Note
The operation information can be viewed in any menu
except the CUE or SET UP menu.
Information displayed for each item
The information displayed for ACTIVE LINE (HD),
VIDEO INT SG and AUDIO INT SG are specified by
T02.INTERNAL VIDEO SIGNAL GENERATOR
(HD), T03.INTERNAL VIDEO SIGNAL
GENERATOR LINE SELECT and T04.INTERNAL
AUDIO SIGNAL GENERATOR.
Selecting items to be displayed
Use 121.INFORMATION DISPLAY in the VTR
SETUP menu to select the items to be displayed.
The items and the functions that can be set by
item 121. are as follows:
The T02.INTERNAL VIDEO SIGNAL
GENERATOR (HD) settings and display
information
SYSTEM FREQUENCY
off: The field frequency of both the unit and the tape
Setting of item T02
Displayed information
are not displayed.
off
off
diff: The field frequency of both the unit and the
tape are displayed only when they do not match.
ever: The field frequency of both the unit and the
tape are always displayed.
COLOR BARS
MULTIBURST
10 STEPS
PULSE & BAR
RAMP
CB
MB
10STP
P&BAR
RAMP
BLACK
ACTIVE LINE (HD)
off: The effective scanning line number to be input
or played back, and to be output are not displayed.
diff: The effective scanning line number to be input
and output are displayed only when they do not
match.
BLACK
The T03.INTERNAL VIDEO SIGNAL GENERATOR
LINE SELECT settings and display information
Setting of item T03
Displayed information
ever: The effective scanning line number to be input
and output are always displayed.
1035
1080
1035
1080
EOS DISPLAY
off: EOS is not displayed.
Note
This setting is only active when the frame frequency of
the unit is 29.97 Hz or 30 Hz.
on: EOS is displayed.
A-6
Appendix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The T04.INTERNAL AUDIO SIGNAL
GENERATOR settings and display information
Setting of item T04
off
Displayed information
off
silence
silnc
1kHz
1 kHz sine
Display priority of display messages
Messages are displayed in the following order of
priority:
Error messages
.
Lost lock messages
.
Warning messages
.
Player edit points and time data
.
Operation information
.
Pull down time data (when optional HKDV-507/507D
HD Pull Down Board is installed)
Or
24-frame time data when playback in 25-frame mode
(off-speed playback) is selected
Appendix
A-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Messages and Warning Messages
Error Messages
When the unit ceases to opcº¡te correctly due to
malfunction or an internal system error, the alarm will
sound and an error message will be displayed on the
Protection Mode
To protect the tape and the mechanical parts of the
display.
VTR, the servo control system automatically stops
tape transport and the drum motor and enters
protection mode when an error occurs.
Cassettes may not be inserted or ejected during
protection mode.
Only one message will be displayed even when
multiple errors occur, but the error log menu keeps a
history of the errors.
For more information about error messages, refer to the
Maintenance Manual.
Note
When a cassette is stuck in the unit because of
protection mode, make sure to disconnect the power
before removing the cassette manually.
After the error occurs, eliminate the cause of the error
and turn the unit back on. If the error message appears
again when the unit is turned on, contact your Sony
representative.
For information about removing cassettes manually, refer to
the supplied Maintenance Manual.
For more information about eliminating errors, refer to the
supplied Maintenance Manual.
DOLBY NR CH.COND DIGITÅL HOME
PB/EE
KEY-INH GREEN
BÅSEBÅLL EDIT SET
LOCK
TCR
ERROR - 01
REEL TROUBLE-1
0ƒ
RECINH
off
ÅIN :00
ÅSSEM-
BLE
IN
:00
off
INS
TC
Error message
off
INS
INS
INS
INS
INS
INS
CUE
VIDEO Å-CH1 Å-CH2 Å-CH3 Å-CH4
off off off off off
off
01 REEL TROUBLE-1: Slack in the tape was detected during threading or unthreading.
02 REEL TROUBLE-2: Slack in the tape was detected during searching, rewinding, or fast-forward.
03 REEL TROUBLE-3: Slack in the tape was detected during playback or recording.
04 REEL TROUBLE-4: Abnormality in tape speed was detected during fast-forward or rewinding.
05 REEL TROUBLE-5: Abnormality detected in the operation of S or T reels during cassette compartment operation. Or, current flow for S or
T reels deviated from the fixed value.
06 TAPE TENSION ERROR: Excessive tension detected during recording or playback.
07 CAPSTAN TROUBLE: Abnormality detected in capstan motor operation.
08 DRUM TROUBLE: Abnormality detected in drum motor operation.
09 TH/UNTH MOTOR TIME OUT: Abnormality detected during threading or unthreading.
0A THREADING TROUBLE: Tape top process did not end normally during threading.
10 DEW DETECTED: Condensation detected.
11 TAPE TOP/END SENSOR TROUBLE: Top and end of tape were detected simultaneously.
12 TAPE TOP SENSOR TROUBLE: Trouble with the tape top sensor.
13 TAPE END SENSOR TROUBLE: Trouble with the tap end sensor.
14 FAN MOTOR TROUBLE: Abnormality detected in the operation of the fan motor.
20 CASSETTE COMPARTMENT MOTOR LOCK: Abnormality detected during cassette compartment operation.
21 REEL SHIFT MOTOR LOCK: Abnormality detected when moving the reel base corresponding to the cassette size.
22 REEL POSITION SENSOR TROUBLE: Positions for L cassette and S cassette reel positions were detected simultaneously.
92 INTERNAL INTERFACE: Abnormality detected in the communication with the CPU on the circuit board.
93 CPU INITIALIZE ERROR: When the unit was powered up, an abnormality was detected in the initial communication with the CPU.
97 SV NV-RAM TROUBLE: An abnormality was detected while reading servo adjustment data after the unit was turned on.
A0 READ WRITE ERROR: Error occurred during reading and writing to the SS-88 on-board RAM.
A1 SY ROM ERROR: Error detected while reading system computer ROM data when the unit was turned on.
A-8
Appendix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A2 DR NOV RAM CHECK SUM ERROR: Error detected while reading machine type data when the unit was turned on.
A3 SYS NOV RAM CHECK SUM ERROR: Error detected while reading menu settings data when the unit was turned on.
A4 PLAYER CONTROL COMMAND BUFFER FULL: The 9 pin serial communication send buffer for player control is full.
A5 RS-422 REMOTE COMMAND BUFFER FULL: The 9 pin serial communication receive buffer is full.
B0 DT HARD ERROR: Error detecting during DT distortion removal.
B1 TCG HARD ERROR: Possibly a hardware error in the time code generator circuit or peripheral hardware.
B2 DCP-26 BOARD INSTALLATION ERROR: The two DCP-26 boards are installed.
B3 DCP-26 & PD-94 BOARD INSTALLATION ERROR: The DCP-26 board and PD-94 board are installed to the wrong position.
Appendix
A-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Messages and Warning Messages
Warning Messages
When one of the problems described below is detected,
a warning mark is displayed in the upper left corner of
the display. Operation can continue even when the
mark is flashing.
When the mark is flashing, the warning message can
be displayed by using the tip of a small pointed object
to press the MAINTENANCE switch.
Use the displayed warning information to eliminate the
cause of the warning.
For more information about eliminating the cause of
warning, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
To automatically display a warning message
Whenever a warning occurs, change item
120.WARNING DISPLAY in the VTR SETUP menu
to on.
Note
The warning messages can be viewed in any menu
except the CUE or SET UP menu.
To clear a warning message
To cancel the display of a warning message, refer to
“Clearing warning messages” on page A-12.
Only one message will be displayed even if there are
multiple messages, but a history of errors is kept in the
error log menu.
For more information about warning messages, refer to the
Maintenance Manual.
Warning mark
CH.COND
DIAGNOSTICS
ROM
VER
TCR 00;00;00;00
MAINTENANCE INFOMATION DISPLAY
ERR
LOG
OPERATION
529HOURS
34HOURS[
20HOURS[
DRUM RUNNING
TAPE TRAVEL
THR
26H]
16H]
9H]
WARNING - 02
LOST LOCK
Warning message
OPTION
INFO
MAINTE
EXEC
EXIT
01 NO EXTERNAL REFERENCE: There is no reference signal on the selected REF INPUT connector. The VTR is using an internal reference
signal.
02 LOST LOCK: Capstan servo lock was lost during playback, recording, or editing.
03 NO EXTERNAL SD REFERENCE ON PD: When item A05. PD EXT SD REF LOCK MODE in the VTR SETUP menu is set to “lock1” or
“lock2,” no external SD reference signal is input (only when the HKDV-507D is installed).
04 HD & SD REF ASYNCHRONOUS: When item A05. PD EXT SD REF LOCK MODE in the VTR SETUP menu is set to “lock1” or “lock2,”
HD reference signal and external SD reference signal are not synchronized (only when the HKDV-507D is installed).
08 NO SDI INPUT: A SDI input signal cannot be detected.
09 NO SDI AUDIO INPUT: No audio data detected in the SDI input signal.
10 VITC NOT READ: VITC cannot be correctly read from the tape.
11 AUDIO PLL UNLOCKED: Audio lock generator PLL not locked to the video reference signal.
14 NO PB RF SIGNAL: Playback heads cannot correctly read digital data from the tape.
15 INCONSISTENT EMPHASIS: Emphasis information on the tape is inconsistent with the system emphasis status.
16 INCONSISTENT FORMAT OF META DATA: The meta data being input and the meta data recorded on the tape have different formats.
17 PB FREQUENCY IS UNSUITABLE: The cassette is ejected automatically in line with the setting of item 018.AUTO EJECT LEVEL in the
VTR SETUP menu because the system frequency of the VTR and the frequency of the signal recorded on the tape do not match.
1C NO A1/A2 INPUT: No carrier detected on digital audio input on channels 1 and 2
20 NO A3/A4 INPUT: No carrier detected on digital audio input on channels 3 and 4
2D INVALID SDI DATA: SDI input signal data is invalid.
34 NO CASSETTE COMPARTMENT MODE: The cassette compartment does not operate during no cassette compartment mode.
3B NO LTC REPRODUCED: LTC signal not detected on the tape.
45 DT UNLOCKED: DT cannot be correctly traced during playback, recording, or editing.
50 PROCESSOR IS IN TEST MODE: The processor is in test mode.
55 VIDEO PLL UNLOCKED: Video lock generator PLL not locked to the video reference signal.
A-10
Appendix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Log Menu
Openig the error log menu
Use the tip of a narrow object to press the
MAINTENANCE switch and press the [F2] (ERR
LOG) button.
The time and time codes of errors and warnings
occurring during operation can be displayed in a list
form in the display. (Maximum listing is 99 items.)
CH.COND
DIAGNOSTICS
PAGE
TOP
TCR 00:00:01:05
ERROR LOG
'97/03/06 10:32:23
PAGE
END
TOTAL 03
1.00:00:00:00
SYS NOV RAM CHECK SUM ERR...
(E)
A3
FULL
MSG
2.23:59:59:09
VIDEO DATA ERROR
3.23:59:59:09 (C)
AUDIO DATA ERROR
(C)
0B
0F
ALL
CLEAR
WARNI-
NG
CONDI-
EXIT
ERROR
TIME
TC
TION
Error Log Menu
Button
[F1]
Display
Function
Setting
on, off
PAGE TOP
PAGE END
FULL MSG
WARNING
ERROR
Move to the top page
Move to the last page
[F2]
on, off
[F3]
Display in full the message selected with the cursor
Display warning messages
on, off
[F5]
on, off
[F6]
Display error messages
on, off
[F7]
CONDITION
TIME
Display condition messages
on, off
[F9]
Toggle between time code are real time display
Return to display of maintenance information
Clear messages (LOG DATA)
TC, REAL
[F10]
EXIT
SFT/[F4]
ALT/[F8]
ALT/[F9]
ALL CLEAR
CANCEL EDIT
REAL TIME
Display the CANCEL EDIT screen
Display the REAL TIME screen
For more information about error log menu settings, refer to the Maintenance Manual.
Appendix
A-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Messages and Warning Messages
Clearing warning messages
1 Press the ALT/[F8] (CANCEL EDIT) button.
2 Select the message to be cleared using the G and
g buttons.
3 Press the [F2] (MARK) button.
An asterisk “*” will appear in front of the
message.
The message will not be displayed or saved.
Cancelling removal
To cancel the removal of a warning message, press the
[F2] (MARK) button.
Adjusting the clock
Press the ALT/[F9] (REAL TIME) button in the error
log menu and use the setting below.
Get current time codes
Hold down the SFT button and press the [F5] (GET
TC) button.
Setting the data and time
Hold down the SFT button and press the [F6] (SET)
button.
Use the f and F buttons to move the bar to the
location to be adjusted.
Use the numeric keys to change the value.
Adjusting minutes and second to zero
Hold down the SFT button and press [F8] (ZERO)
button.
Selecting daylight saving time and normal
time
Hold down the SFT button and press [F9] (SEASON)
button.
STANDARD: normal time
SUMMER: daylight saving time (one hour ahead of
normal time)
Note
Changing between normal and daylight saving times
changes the current time by one hour.
Even if the change crosses midnight, the current date is
not changed.
A-12
Appendix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
AES/EBU format
Component video signal
Effect edit mode
A standard format for the transfer of
digital audio signals. In this format, two
audio signals can be input/output through
one XLR-type connector.
A video signal that consists of a luminance
signal (Y) and two chrominance (color-
difference) signals (R-Y, B-Y).
When editing a tape using a switcher or
when editing special effects, the pixels
comprising the picture are often not
dubbed to the same positions as those of
the original. In the case of repeated
dubbings, this shifting of pixels produces
an accumulation of calculation errors
during the compression/expansion process;
this may result in an increase in low-level
noise within the signal. The effect edit
mode minimizes the production of this
noise. Note, however, that a slight loss in
picture resolution may be observed in this
mode.
Composite video signal
Assemble editing
A signal that consists of video (luminance
and color sub carrier), sync (horizontal and
vertical), and color burst signals.
An edit mode for adding new scenes to the
end of previously recorded scenes. New
video signals are recorded for each control
signal, but continuity with the control
signal preceding the edit point is
maintained electrically. Because assemble
editing in the middle of a scene will cause
a break in the video image at the end of the
insertion, this is not a practical method for
inserting new video data. This should be
done with insert editing.
Condensation
Moisture that collects on the head drum of
the tape transport mechanism, causing
damage to the tape and malfunction of the
VTR.
Emphasis
CTL
Emphasizing the high frequencies of a
signal before processing (pre-emphasis)
and de-emphasizing those high frequencies
before output (de-emphasis). This reduces
deterioration of the signal-to-noise ratio in
the high frequency range.
Abbreviation for control signal. A pulse
signal that can be counted, to determine
the number of frames, and therefore the
tape’s running time. Used mainly for
adjusting the tracking position of video
heads, and to achieve time code continuity
during continuous recording. This signal is
recorded on a longitudinal tape track.
See also Insert editing.
Backspace editing
Also called phase matching. During
backspace editing, the VTR automatically
rewinds the tape a few seconds after
recording of a scene has been completed.
This allows the tape to attain a stable
speed before the start of recording of the
next scene, thus maintaining signal
continuity during editing.
External synchronization
A method to maintain color subcarrier
phase continuity by performing editing in
two-frame units in order to achieve stable
video without horizontal fluctuation at the
edit points. For editing, a recorder VTR (or
master VTR) and a player VTR (or source
VTR or slave VTR) are used, and external
synchronization is commonly used to
ensure that the operation timing control
signals and time reference signals are
synchronized.
Cue point
A point used to mark the beginning of a
section of tape so that it can be located for
later playback or editing.
Bridging connection
A connection that allows a signal input to
an input terminal to pass throuth the unit
and exit from an output terminal for input
to a third piece of equipment.
Drop frame mode
When the field frequency of this unit is
59.94 Hz, the actual number of frames per
second is approximately 29.97, while the
time code value advances one second
every 30 frames. In drop frame mode, the
time code is advanced such a way that this
difference in the value between real time
and the time codes is corrected.
Specifically, two frames are skipped at the
beginning of each minute, except for every
tenth minute, so that the frame value for
time codes matches that for real time.
See also Non-drop frame mode.
Capstan
Insert editing
A drive mechanism that moves the tape at
a specified speed. Its rotation is normally
synchronized with a reference sync signal.
An edit mode for inserting new scenes into
the middle of previously recorded scenes.
CTL signals previously recorded on the
tape are used. Consequently, this mode
cannot be used for blank tapes. This mode
assumes that CTL signals have somehow
be recorded to the tape already.
Color frame
A color subcarrier phase having one cycle
that consists of two frames (four fields) in
the NTSC format.
See also Assemble editing
Color frame locking
E-E mode
Longitudinal time code
See LTC.
A procedure in which the time code frame
value is set to an odd number for the first
and second color fields, and to an even
number for the third and fourth color
fields.
Abbreviation for Electric-to-Electric
mode. In this mode, the signals are passed
through the VTRís electronics before
output but do not pass through the
magnetic converter circuits such as the
tape and head circuits. This mode is used
for confirming input signals or adjusting
the input level.
LTC
Abbreviation for Longitudinal Time Code.
This is the time code recorded onto a
longitudinal track of the tape. During the
playback of still pictures, LTC cannnot be
read since the tape is not moving. During
slow playback, the LTC output is so small
that it may not be read correctly,
depending on the playback speed.
See also VITC.
Color framing
A method to maintain color subcarrier
phase continuity by performing editing in
two-frame units in order to achieve stable
video without horizontal fluctuation at the
edit points when editing downconverted
composite video signal.
Appendix
A-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
Non-drop frame mode
Time code
In this mode, drop frame mode processing
is not performed. Since there is no frame
cutting, a discrepancy of about 86 seconds
occurs each day (in the case of a field
frequency of 59.94 Hz) which causes
problems when editing programs in units
of seconds using the number of frames as a
refernce.
A digital signal recorded on the video tape
that supplies information such as hour,
minute, second and frame number for each
frame to facilitate the setting of edit points
or searching for specific scenes on the
tape.
There are two types of time codes: SMPTE
(for the NTSC color system) and EBU (for
the PAL/SECAM color system); and two
time code recording formats: LTC
(longitudinal time codes) which are CTL
signals and audio signals simultaneously
recorded longitudinally on the tape and
VITC (vertical interval time codes) which
are recorded on the video signal track.
See also Drop frame mode.
Preroll
The rewinding of a video tape in the player
or recorder VTR by a certain length before
an edit point, allowing the tape to attain a
stable speed at the edit point and
synchronization with the other video tape
during editing.
Tracking
The synchronizing of the head drum
rotation phase and tape transport phase
during playback and recording. Tracking
is adjusted to eliminate picture instability
when playing back material recorded on
another VTR.
Reference video signal
A video signal containing a sync signal or
sync and burst signal, used as a reference
for synchronizing video equipment.
Servolocking
User bits
The locking of the phase and speed of a
VTR’s head drum rotation and tape
transport to a reference signal during
recording and playback.
A recordable 32-bit section in each time
code on a video tape for recording such
information as the recording year, month,
and day, and the tape or program ID
number.
Standby-off mode
A mode in which head drum rotation is
stopped and tape tension is released, and
thus the VTR is not ready for immediate
recording and playback. This mode
alleviates the tape and video heads from
wear or damage.
Vertical interval time code
See VITC.
VITC
Abbreviation for Vertical Interval Time
Code. This is a time code recorded on a
video signal track during the vertical
blanking interval. This VTR writes this
time code in the AUX data area in the
video signals. It can be read correctly even
during slow or still picture playback. See
also LTC.
Standby-on mode
A mode in which the head drum rotates
with the tape wrapped around it, and thus
the VTR is ready for immediate recording
or playback. The VTR enters standby-off
mode after remaining in standby-on mode
for a specified length of time to prevent
wear or damage to the tape and video
heads.
A-14
Appendix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu List
Items in the VTR SETUP menu are divided into
categories according to type of setting they perform.
Descriptions on each item are given below:
• Items related to the hours meter (H01~)
• Items related to VTR operations (001~)
• Items related to operation panels (101~)
• Items related to the remote interface (201~)
• Items related to editing (301~)
• Items related to recording protection (501~)
• Items related to the time code (601~)
• Items related to the video control (701~)
• Items related to the audio control (801~)
• Items related to digital process (901~)
• Items related to pull down control (A01~)
• Other items (T01~)
For details on the VTR SETUP menu, refer to “4-7-1 VTR
SETUP Menu” on page 4-61.
• Items related to prerolling (401~)
Items Related to the Hours Meter (H01~)
Item number
Item
Function
H01
OPERATION
HOURS
Displays the total number of hours that the VTR has been turned on and operated.
H02
H03
H04
H12
DRUM RUNNING
HOURS
Displays the total number of hours that the drum has rotated with tape threaded.
TAPE RUNNING
HOURS
Displays the total number of hours that the VTR has been in playback, fast-forwarding,
rewinding, jog, shuttle, variable speed, and edit modes. (Does not include still mode.)
THREADING
COUNTER
Displays the total number of threadings and unthreadings.
DRUM RUNNING
HOURS
(resettable)
Displays the total number of hours that the drum has run with tape threaded since last
reset. Use this information as a guide for head-drum replacements.
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual Part 1.
H13
H14
TAPE RUNNING
HOURS
(resettable)
Displays the total number of hours that the VTR has been in playback, jog, shuttle and
variable speed modes since last reset. (Does not include stop and still modes.) Use
this information as a guide for replacing the fixed head and pinch rollers.
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual Part 1.
THREADING
COUNTER
(resettable)
Displays the total number of threadings and unthreadings since last reset.
For details, refer to the Maintenance Manual Part 1.
Appendix
A-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu List
Items Related to VTR Operations (001~)
The values enclosed in a box are factory settings.
Item number Item
Settable range
Function
001
PRE-READ
[off]
Selectsthepre-read(read-before-write)modeforinsert
editing.
off:Nopre-readoperation
audio/video:Carryoutpre-readeditingforbothaudioand
video
audio/video
audioonly
videoonly
audioonly:Carryoutpre-readeditingforaudioonly
videoonly:Carryoutpre-readeditingforvideoonly
002
REC INHIBIT
select
[off]
all/crashREC/video
CTL/audioCTL
Selectstherecordinhibitmode.
off:Recordingisenabled.(TheRECINHIBITindicatordoes
notlight.)
all/crash/video/audio:Recordingisinhibitedontheset
channels.(TheRECINHIBITindicatoreitherlightsor
goesoff.)
Thescopeofinhibitingrecordingisdeterminedbymenu
item003.
003
REC INHIBIT
AREAselect
[all]
Selectsthescopetowhichinhibitingrecordingapplies.
all:Allrecordingisinhibited.(TheRECINHIBITindicator
lights.)
crashREC:Thenormalrecordingmodeisinhibited.Usethis
settingwhenyouwishtorecordinassembleeditingor
inserteditingonly.
crashREC
video/CTL
audio/CTL
[casst]
video/CTL:RecordingofvideoandCTLisinhibited.
audio/CTL:RecordingofaudioandCTLisinhibited.
[casst]:Whentherecordingprotectionplugonthecassette
ispushedin,thissettingisdisplayed.Thissettingcannot
beselected.
TheRECINHIBITindicatorlightsorflashestoindicatethe
stateoftherecordinginhibitmechanismonthecassette.
For details, see item 104.
004
CAPSTANLOCK
select
[2FD]
4FD
Wheneditingorplayingbackatapewithdecoded
componentsignals,selecttheappropriatesettingdepending
onyourpurpose.
2FD:Thissettinglocksthecapstanservointwo-fieldunits.
ThisisthenormalsettingforeditingorplayingbackHD
orD1signals.
4LOCK: Thecapstanservoislockedtothecolorframe
every4fields. Ifcolorframesoccurintermittentlyduring
playback,thecapstanservoislockedwhenthenext
colorframeappears.
4HOLD: Thecapstanservoislockedtothecolorframe
every4fields. Ifcolorframesoccursintermittently
duringplayback,thecapstanservostayslockedtothat
colorframe.
Note
•Thissettingisonlyactivewhentheframefrequencyofthe
unit is 29.97 Hz or 30 Hz.
•TolockcompositesignaloutputtofourfieldsonthisVTR,
setitem005. toexternaland006. toexternSD.
A-16
Appendix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item number Item
Settable range
Function
005
SERVO/AV
REFERENCE
select
[input]
auto
external
Theservoreferenceisdeterminedbythefollowingmenu.
input:ThereferencesignalisobtainedfromtheHDSDI
INPUTconnectorsorSDTI(OPTION)INconnector.
auto:Duringrecordingandintheeditpresetstate,the
referencesignalisobtainedfromtheHDSDIINPUT
connectorsorSDTI(OPTION)INconnector.
Note
Whenitem001isnotsettooff,thereferencesingnalis
alwaysexternal.
Inallothercases,theservooperatesusingthesignal
selectedinitem006asthereferencesignal.Ifthesignal
selectedinitem006isnotpresent,theservooperates
usinganinternalreferencesignal.
external:Theservoreferencesignalisalwaysexternal.
006
007
EXTERNAL
REFERENCE
select
[extrn HD]
extrnSD
Whenitem005issettoexternal,thisselectsthesignalused
asreferencebythisunit.
extrnHD:ThesignalinputtotheREF.INHDconnectoris
usedasthereferencesignalforplaybackandaudio
signalrecording.
extrnSD:ThesignalinputtotheREF.INSDconnectoris
usedasthereferencesignalforplaybackandaudio
signalrecording.
SYNC PLAY
[off]
on
Thisisthemodeforautomaticcorrectionatthestartof
playback.Insyncplaymode,forexamplewhenplayingback
theVTRfromaprerollpoint,theINpointisreachedafter
exactlytheprerolltimehaselapsed.
off:Selectsnormalplaybackmode.
on:Activatesthesyncplayfunctionforplayback.
Note
Insyncplaymode,thetimeafterthetapetransportstarts
untilthevideoandsoundappearislongerthaninthenormal
playbackmode.
008
LOCALFUNCTION alldisable
Whenthisunitisusedinremotecontrolmode,thisselects
whichbuttonsonthecontrolpaneloperate.
alldisable:Allswitchesandbuttonsaredisabled.
stop&eject:OnlytheSTOPandEJECTbuttonsoperate.
allenable: AllswitchesandbuttonsexcepttheRECORDER
andPLAYERbuttonsareenabled.
ENABLE
[stop & eject]
allenable
localkeymap
localkeymap: Onlythebuttonsenabledinitem009are
operational.
Appendix
A-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu List
Item number Item
Settable range
Function
LOCALKEYMAP
Enables/disablesthebuttonsonthisunitwhenitisinremote
controlmode.
009
Sub items
STOP
[disable]
enable
disable: TheSTOPbuttonisdisabledinremotecontrol
mode.
enable:TheSTOPbuttonoperatesinremotecontrolmode.
PLAY
[disable]
enable
disable: ThePLAYbuttonisdisabledinremotecontrol
mode.
enable: ThePLAYbuttonoperatesinremotecontrolmode.
REC/EDIT
[disable]
enable
disable: TheREC/EDITbuttonisdisabledinremotecontrol
mode.
enable: TheREC/EDITbuttonoperatesinremotecontrol
mode.
STANDBY
EJECT
[disable]
enable
disable:TheSTANDBYbuttonisdisabledinremotecontrol
mode.
enable:TheSTANDBYbuttonoperatesinremotecontrol
mode.
[disable]
enable
disable: TheEJECTbuttonisdisabledinremotecontrol
mode.
enable: TheEJECTbuttonoperatesinremotecontrolmode.
JOG
[disable]
enable
disable: TheJOGbuttonisdisabledinremotecontrolmode.
enable: TheJOGbuttonoperatesinremotecontrolmode.
SHUTTLE
[disable]
enable
disable: TheSHUTTLEbuttonisdisabledinremotecontrol
mode.
enable:TheSHUTTLEbuttonoperatesinremotecontrol
mode.
VAR
[disable]
enable
disable: TheVARbuttonisdisabledinremotecontrolmode.
enable: TheVARbuttonoperatesinremotecontrolmode.
PREROLL
[disable]
enable
disable: ThePREROLLbuttonisdisabledinremotecontrol
mode.
enable: ThePREROLLbuttonoperatesinremotecontrol
mode.
PREVIEW/
REVIEW
[disable]
enable
disable: ThePREVIEW/REVIEWbuttonisdisabledin
remotecontrolmode.
enable:ThePREVIEW/REVIEWbuttonoperatesinremote
controlmode.
AUTO
[disable]
enable
disable: TheAUTObuttonisdisabledinremotecontrol
mode.
enable: TheAUTObuttonoperatesinremotecontrolmode.
INPUT CHECK
[disable]
enable
disable: TheINPUTCHECKbuttonisdisabledinremote
controlmode.
enable: TheINPUTCHECKbuttonoperatesinremote
controlmode.
MENU&CURSOR
AUDIO INPUT
MONITOR
[disable]
enable
disable: Themenubuttonsandthecursorcontrolbuttons
aredisabledinremotecontrolmode.
enable:Themenubuttonsandthecursorcontrolbuttons
operateinremotecontrolmode.
[disable]
enable
disable: TheAUDIOINPUTbuttonisdisabledinremote
controlmode.
enable: TheAUDIOINPUTbuttonoperatesinremote
controlmode.
[disable]
enable
disable: TheMONITORbuttonisdisabledinremotecontrol
mode.
enable: TheMONITORbuttonoperatesinremotecontrol
mode.
A-18
Appendix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item number Item
017 PB/EESELECT
Settable range
Function
Selectsoutputvideoandaudiosignals.
MENU
Sub items
STAND BY OFF
PB/MU
[EE/EE]
Selectsthevideoandaudiooutputsignalsinthe“standby
off”mode.
PB/MU:Theplaybackvideosignalisoutput. Theaudio
outputismuted.
EE/EE:Theinputvideoandaudiosignalsareoutput.
STAND BY ON
[PB/MU]
EE/EE
EE/MU
Selectsthevideoandaudiooutputsignalsinthe“standby
on”mode.
PB/MU:Theplaybackvideosignalisoutput. Theaudio
outputismuted.
EE/EE:Theinputvideoandaudiosignalsareoutput.
EE/MU: Theinputvideosignalisoutput. Theaudiooutput
ismuted.
REC
PB/PB
[EE/EE]
Selectsthevideoandaudiooutputsignalsduringrecording.
PB/PB:Theplaybackvideoandaudiosignalsareoutput.
EE/EE:Theinputvideoandaudiosignalsareoutput.
EDIT
PB/PB
[EE/EE]
Selectsthevideoandaudiooutputsignalsduringediting.
PB/PB:Theplaybackvideoandaudiosignalsareoutput.
EE/EE:Theinputvideoandaudiosignalsareoutput.
SHUTTLE
[PB/MU]
EE/EE
PB/PB
Selectsthevideoandaudiooutputsignalsduringshuttle
playback.
PB/MU:Theplaybackvideosignalisoutput. Theaudio
outputismuted.
EE/EE:Theinputvideoandaudiosignalsareoutput.
PB/PB:Theplaybackvideoandaudiosignalsareoutput.
JOG
VAR
[PB/PB]
PB/MU
Selectsthevideoandaudiooutputsignalsduringjog
playback.
PB/PB:Theplaybackvideoandaudiosignalsareoutput.
PB/MU:Theplaybackvideosignalisoutput. Theaudio
outputismuted.
[PB/PB]
PB/MU
Selectsthevideoandaudiooutputsignalsduring“variable”
playback.
PB/PB:Theplaybackvideoandaudiosignalsareoutput.
PB/MU:Theplaybackvideosignalisoutput. Theaudio
outputismuted.
018
AUTO EJECT
LEVEL
[off]
Selectstheconditionunderwhichthecassetteis
automaticallyejectedafterbeingplayedbackforafew
seconds.
Whenthecassetteisejectedinaccordancewiththissetting,
thewarningmessage“17PBFREQUENCYIS
UNSUITABLE”appearsinthedisplay.
LEVEL1
LEVEL2
LEVEL3
off: Thecassetteisnotejected.
LEVEL1: Thecassetteisejectedwhentheaudiosignalon
thetapeisnotcompatiblewiththisVTR.
Fordetailsonaudiosignalcompatibility,refertothe
compatibilitytablein“1-8-1.SwitchingtheSystem
Frequency”inthesuppliedmaintenancemanual.
LEVEL2: Thecassetteisejectedwhenthesignalonthe
tapeisnotcompatiblewiththisVTR.However,ifthe
differencebetweentheaudiosignalandtheVTRfield
frequencyis±0.1%,thetapeisassumedtobe
compatible.
LEVEL3: Thecassetteisejectedwhenthefieldfrequency,
PsFmode,orinterlacemodeofthetapediffersfromthat
of the VTR.
Appendix
A-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu List
Items Related to Operation Panels (101~)
The values enclosed in a box are factory settings.
Item number Item
Settable range
Function
Determines how the unit is set to search mode.
direct:Theunitenterssearchmodewhenyourotatethe
searchdialinallmodesexceptrecordingandeditmodes.
dial
101
dial direct
via search key
SELECTION FOR
SEARCHDIAL
ENABLE
via search key: The unit enters search mode when you
press the SHUTTLE, JOG or VAR button.
102
REFERENCE
SYSTEMALARM
off
[on]
Specifieswhereornottodisplayawarningwhenaudio/
videoreferencesignalselectedinitem005.isnotpresentor
outofphasewiththeinputvideosignal.
off:Nowarningisdisplayed.
on:WarningisdisplayedbyflashingSTOPbutton.
104
107
REC INHIBIT
LAMPFLASHING
[off]
on
SpecifieswhethertheRECINHIBITindicatorlightsor
flashes,whenRECinhibitplugonthebacksideofthe
insertedcassettetapeispresseddown.
off: TheRECINHIBITindicatorlightsup.
on: TheRECINHIBITindicatorflashes.
JOGDIAL
RESPONSE
[type1: –1 to + 1]
type2: –2 to + 2
type3: –2 to + 2
Selectsthetapespeed(VTRcommand)characteristicsfor
searchJOGdialrotation.
TYPE1:Tapespeedchangeslinearlyinarangeof–1to+1
timesnormaltapespeed.
TYPE2:Tapespeedchangesinarangeof–2to+2times
normaltapespeedasshownbelowinTYPE2.(Tape
speeddoesnotchangewhenthesearchdialiswithina
rangeof ±1timesnormaltapespeed.)
TYPE3:Tapespeedchangeslinearlyinarangeof–2to+2
timesnormaltapespeedasshownbelowinTYPE3.
TYPE2
TYPE3
+2
speed
FWD
speed
FWD
+2
+1
RVS
FWD RVS
rotation
FWD
rotation
-1
-2
-2
RVS
RVS
109
KEY INHIBIT
[off]
on
Whenthisissetto“on”,theKEYINHIBITindicatorinthe
uppercontrolpanellights,andsome,all,oragroupofthe
followingbuttonsaredisabled:REMOTEbuttononthe
uppercontrolpanel,AUDIOINPUT/MONITORSELECT
button,editingoperationbuttonsonthelowercontrolpanel.
For details of the keys and buttons disabled by this setting,
see item 110.
A-20
Appendix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item number Item
110
KEY INHIBIT
Settable range
Function
Theenablingordisablingofswitchesandbuttonscanbe
independentlyspecifiedthrougheachofthefollowingsub-
itemswhenitem109issetto“on”.
SWITCH
EFFECTIVE AREA
Sub items
MON./INPUT
SEL
[dis]
ena
SpecifieswhethertheINPUT/MONITORSELECTbuttons
ontheuppercontrolpanelareenabledornot.
1
dis :INPUT/MONITORSELECTbuttonsaredisabled.
ena:INPUT/MONITORSELECTbuttonsareenabled.
CONTROL
PANEL
[dis]
edit
ena
Specifieswhichswitchesandbuttonsonthecontrolpanelof
thisunitandtheexternalcontrolpanelconnectedtothisunit
areenabled.
2
dis :Allswitchesandbuttonsaredisabled.
edit:Theswitchesandbuttonsrelatedtoeditingfunctionare
disabled.
ena:Allswitchesandbuttonsareenabled.
VARIABLESPEED [off ª–1 to +2 º ]
Setsthethetapespeedrangeduringvariable-speed(VAR)
playbackonthecontrolpanelofthisunit.
off (–1 to +2) : The range of the tape speed is –1 to +2 times
normalspeed.
111
LIMIT IN KEY
on ( 0 to +1)
PANELCONTROL
on (0 to +1) : The range of the tape speed is 0 to +1 time
normalspeed.
112
113
CTL LOCK IN
VAR/SHTL
[off]
–1/–0.5/0.5/1.0/2.0
CTLlocksthetapetransportduringvariable-speedplayback
orshuttleplayback.
off:CTLdoesnotlock.
–1/–0.5/0.5/1.0/2.0:CTLlocksthetapetransportatspeeds
of –1, –0.5, 0.5, 1.0, and 2.0 times normal speed.
DT MODE
[field ª–1 to +1 º ]
frame
SetstheDToperationmode.
field :(–1to+1):Entersthefieldplaybackmode(FieldDT
mode)whenthetapespeedis–1to+1timesnormal
speed.
Enterstheframeplaybackmode(FlameDTmode)when
thetapespeedis+1to+2timesnormalspeed.
frame:Enterstheframeplaybackmode(FrameDTmode).
114
POWER-ON MENU [home menu]
Selectsthemenudisplayedwhentheunitispoweredon.
select
TCmenu
CUEmenu
PF1menu
PF2menu
ALT+PF1menu
ALT+PF2menu
115
116
117
KEYBEEP
high
low
Selectsthevolumeofthekeyclicksound.
Selectsthevolumeofthekeyclicksound.
[off]
ALARMBEEP
SCREEN SAVER
[high]
low
off
3min
10min
60min
[off]
Selectsthetimeafterwhichthescreensaverfunction
operates.
118
INPUT GUARD
select
[off]
SelectsthemodeinwhichtheINPUTSELECTbuttonson
thefrontpanelswitchvideoandaudioinputs.
on
off:TheINPUTSELECTbuttonsonthefrontpanelcan
switchthevideoandaudioinputs.
on:TheINPUTSELECTbuttonsonthefrontpanelare
inhibitedfromswitchingthevideoandaudioinputs.
However,itispossibletochecktheINPUTSELECT
display,andtocarryoutMONITORSELECTswitching.
Appendix
A-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu List
Item number Item
Settable range
Function
120
WARNING
DISPLAY
[off]
on
Selectswhetherwarningmessagesshouldbedisplayedin
thelowerpartofthetimecodedisplayfortheHOMEmenu,
the TC menu, the PF1 menu, and the PF2 menu.
off:Donotdisplaywarningmessages.
on:Displaywarningmessages.
Notes
• NowarningmessagesaredisplayedfortheCUEmenu,so
checkbyviewingamenuotherthantheCUEmenu.
• IfLOSTLOCKoccursduringplaybackorrecording,a
LOSTLOCKwarningmessageisalwaysdisplayed.
121
INFORMATION
DISPLAY
Selectsitemstobedisplayedintheoperationinformation.
Sub items
SYSTEM
FREQUENCY
[off]
diff
ever
off:Doesnotdisplaythefieldfrequencyofboththeunitand
thetape.
diff:Displaysthefieldfrequencyoftheunitandthetapeonly
whentheydonotmatch.
ever:Alwaysdisplaysthefieldfrequencyoftheunitandthe
tape.
off:Doesnotdisplaytheeffectivescanninglinenumberto
beinputorplayedback,andtobeoutput.
ACTIVE LINE (HD)
[off]
diff
diff:Displaystheeffectivescanninglinenumbertobeinput
andtooutputonlywhentheydonotmatch.
ever:Alwaysdisplaystheeffectivescanninglinenumberto
beinputandoutput.
ever
EOSDISPLAY
VIDEO INT SG
[off]
on
off:DoesnotdisplayEOS.
on:DisplaysEOS.
[off]
on
off:Doesnotdisplaythetypeofthetestsignalgeneratedby
theinternalvideotestsignalgenerator.
on:Displaythetypeofthetestsignalgeneratedbythe
internalvideotestsignalgenerator.
off:Doesnotdisplaytheoperatingstatusoftheinternal
audiotestsignalgenerator.
on:Displaystheoperatingstatusoftheinternalaudiotest
signalgenerator.
AUDIO INT SG
METADATA
[off]
on
[off]
on
Selectswhetherthereceptionsetting(bankname)forthe
metadatamultiplexedintheHDSDIpacketisdisplayedor
not.
off:Thebanknameisnotdisplayed.
on:Thebanknameisdisplayed.
[on]
off
MULTI CUE
CLEARbyinject
Selectswhethertoerasecuepointdatainmulti-cuemode
whenacassetteisinserted.
on:Erasecuepointdata.
122
123
off:Donoterasecuepointdata.
Tele-File
[control panel]
CONTROL MODE RS-232C
SelectsthedevicetobeusedforTELEFILEmenu
operations.
controlpanel:ThecontrolpaneloftheVTRisused.
RS-232C:ApersonalcomputerconnectedtotheRS-232C
connectoroftheVTRisused.
124
125
Tele-FileMENU
autopopup
[off]
on
SpecifieswhetherornottheTELEFILEmenuappears
automaticallywhenacassettewithamemorylabelis
inserted.
off: TheTELEFILEmenudoesnotappear.
on: TheTELEFILEmenuappears.
[not clear]
whenformat
Tele-FileTHREAD
COUNTERclear
mode
Specifieswhetherornotthethreadcounterisresetwhena
memorylabelisformatted.
notclear:Thethreadcounterisnotreset.
whenformat:Thethreadcounterisreset.
A-22
Appendix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Items Related to Remote Interface (201~)
The values enclosed in a box are factory settings.
Item number Item
Settable range
Function
201
REMOTE 9-PIN
[off]
Whenthisissetto“on,”thisunitiscontrolledfromthe
deviceconnectedtotheREMOTE1-IN(9P)/OUT(9P)
connectors.
on
Note
Whenthisunitiscontrolledbyadeviceconnectedtothe
REMOTE 1-IN(9P) or PARALLEL I/O 1-IN(50P)
connectors,theeditingcontrolbuttonsandallofthetape
transportbuttonsexceptSTOPandEJECTaredisabled.It
isalsopossibletomakeasettingsothatallofthebuttons
aredisabled.
For details, see item 008.
202
203
REMOTE 50-PIN
[off]
Whenthisissetto“on,”thisunitiscontrolledfromthe
deviceconnectedtotheREMOTEPARALLELI/O(50P)
connector(optionalBKDW-509).
on
PARALLEL
RUNNING
[disable]
enable
SelectswhethertwoormoreVTRscanbeoperated
synchronized.
disable:Synchronizedoperationisnotcarriedout.
enable:Synchronizedoperationisenabled.
Note
Forsynchronizedoperationtobepossible,item203must
besetto“enable”onalloftheconnectedVTRs.
Appendix
A-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu List
Items Related to Editing (301~)
The values enclosed in a box are factory settings.
Item number
Item
Function
Settable range
301
EDIT OPERATION
MODE
film
CG
[normal]
Selects the animation edit mode. For normal editing, use the
“normal” setting.
film: Selects editing in field units for film recording. Since the
standard film speed is 24 frames/sec and VTR frame
rate is 30 frames/sec when the frame frequency is 29.97
Hz or 30 Hz, the duration must be alternated between 2
and 3 fields when recording films. This setting is
automatically activated in film mode. When editing
finishes, the next IN and OUT points are automatically
set.
Note
This setting is only active when the frame frequency of
the unit is 29.97 Hz or 30 Hz.
CG: Primarily for recording computer graphics, this setting
allows editing by individual frames. When the edit is
completed, the OUT point automatically becomes the
next IN point. The next OUT point is automatically set
one frame ahead of the IN point.
normal: Use this setting for normal insert editing.
302
303
304
PREROLL TIME
POSTROLL TIME
0 sec
This sets the preroll time. The range is from 0 to 30
seconds, in steps of 1 second. The preroll time should
generally be set to at least 3 seconds, and for phase
adjustment with an editing controller it is recommended to
set the preroll time to at least 5 seconds.
.
.
.
[5 sec]
.
.
.
30 sec
0 sec
This sets the postroll time for which the tape transport
keeps moving after reaching an OUT point.
The range is from 0 to 30 seconds, in steps of 1 second.
.
.
.
[2 sec]
.
.
.
30 sec
VAR SPEED RANGE
FOR
SYNCHRONIZATION
[–1 to +2]
–1.15 to +2.45
Specifies the variable tape speed range when the variable
speed playback is executed by a remote control unit
connected to the REMOTE1 IN (9P) connector.
–1 to +2: –1 to +2 times normal tape speed
–1.15 to +2.45: –1.15 to +2.45 times normal tape speed
Note
When an editing control unit such as BVE-9100 is
connected for DT editing, select “–1.15 to +2.45”.
305
EDIT FIELD select
[1F]
2F
Selects the start timing for editing when performing tape
editing.
1F/2F
1F: Start editing from field 1 and end on field 2.
2F: Start editing from field 2 and end on field 1.
1F/2F: Following received timing commands.
Note
When the system frequency of this unit is PsF mode, the
unit always operates with the F1 setting.
306
SYNCHRONIZE
[accurate]
rough
off
When this unit is used as a controller for editing control of
another VTR connected through a 9-pin remote cable, this
selects whether or not to carry out phase synchronization of
the two VTRs, and also the editing accuracy when carrying
out synchronization.
accurate: Editing is carried out with an accuracy of ±0
frames.
rough: Editing is carried out with an accuracy of ±1 frame.
off: Synchronization is not carried out.
A-24
Appendix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item number
Item
Settable range
Function
Items 311 through 315 describe the analog audio edit preset
during editing mentioned on right.
The follwing items specifies the allocation of each channel
for the analog audio preset of the editor or remote controller
when the digital audio signals from the VTR is edited on an
editor (BVE-600, etc.) or remote controller with digital audio
edit preset control functions.
311
ANALOG AUDIO
EDIT PRESET
REPLACE FOR
CH 1
no definition
[analog ch 1]
Sets the channel-1 edit preset of the VTR to ON or OFF
according to the analog audio preset specified on an editor
or remote controller.
analog ch 2
analog ch 1 + ch 2
no definition: Not defined.
analog ch 1: As determined by analog channel 1 edit preset.
analog ch 2 : As determined by analog channel 2 edit
preset.
analog ch 1 + ch 2 : As determined by analog channel 1 or
analog channel 2 preset.
312
ANALOG AUDIO
EDIT PRESET
REPLACE FOR
CH 2
no definition
analog ch 1
[analog ch 2]
Sets the channel-2 edit preset of the VTR to ON or OFF
according to the analog audio preset specified on an editor
or remote controller.
no definition: Not defined.
analog ch 1 + ch 2
analog ch 1: As determined by analog channel 1 edit
preset.
analog ch 2: As determined by analog channel 2 edit
preset.
analog ch 1 + ch 2: As determined by analog channel 1 or
analog channel 2 preset.
313
314
315
ANALOG AUDIO
EDIT PRESET
REPLACE FOR
CH 3
[no definition]
analog ch 1
analog ch 2
Sets the channel-3 edit preset of the VTR to ON or OFF
according to the analog audio preset specified on an editor
or remote controller.
no definition: Not defined.
analog ch 1 + ch 2
analog ch 1: As determined by analog channel 1 edit preset.
analog ch 2: As determined by analog channel 2 edit preset.
analog ch 1 + ch 2: As determined by analog channel 1 or
analog channel 2 preset.
ANALOG AUDIO
EDIT PRESET
REPLACE FOR
CH 4
[no definition]
analog ch 1
analog ch 2
Sets the channel-4 edit preset of the VTR to ON or OFF
according to the analog audio preset specified on an editor
or remote controller.
no definition: Not defined.
analog ch 1 + ch 2
analog ch 1: As determined by analog channel 1 edit preset.
analog ch 2: As determined by analog channel 2 edit preset.
analog ch 1 + ch 2 : As determined by analog channel 1 or
analog channel 2 preset.
ANALOG AUDIO
EDIT PRESET
REPLACE FOR
CUE
[no definition]
analog ch 1
analog ch 2
Sets the analog audio channel (longitudinal) edit preset of
the VTR to ON or OFF according to the analog audio preset
specified on an editor or remote controller.
no definition: Not defined.
analog ch 1 + ch 2
analog ch 1: As determined by analog channel 1 edit preset.
analog ch 2: As determined by analog channel 2 edit preset.
analog ch 1 + ch 2: As determined by analog channel 1 or
analog ch 2 preset.
Appendix
A-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu List
Item number
Item
Settable range
Function
cut edit
[cross fade]
fade in/out
Specifies the type of editing for digital audio signals.
cut edit: Cut editing (discontinuity in audio signal may result
at the join, causing noise.)
317
AUDIO EDIT
MODE
cross fade: Cross-fade (see figure below.)
fade in/out: Fade-out and fade-in (see figure below.)
IN
OUT
CROSS FADE
PB
INPUT
t
t
OUT
IN
FADE IN/OUT
PB
INPUT
t
t
Note
• The “t” in the figures above is the time set by item 811.
• When editing non-audio data, be sure to select “cut edit.”
• Noise may be produced during the editing of certain non-
audio data.
318
EDIT RETRY
off
[on]
Set this item when the VTR is used as a recorder during
VTR-to-VTR editing. Specifies the action taken when the
recorder fails to synchronize with the player VTR.
off: Editing is not executed and the VTR enters STOP mode.
on: The VTR automatically repeats the editing again (not
more than twice).
320
321
PLAY COMMAND –30 frame
This adjusts the time in frames required between the issue
of a playback command and this unit actually beginning the
execution of the command. This adjustment is useful for
synchronization between VTRs with widely differing start-up
timing.
.
.
.
DELAY START
TIME
[0 frame]
.
.
.
+30 frame
VIDEO PREVIEW
MODE
During a preview operation, this selects the video signals
that can be monitored on the monitor output and line output
connectors.
[VVV]
VBV
VVV: VIDEO-VIDEO-VIDEO: In the editing interval the
monitored signal is the player video signal or video input
(EE) signal.
VBV: VIDEO-BLACK-VIDEO: In the editing interval the
monitored signal is a black signal.
322
[SSS]
AUDIO PREVIEW
MODE
During a preview operation, this selects the audio signals
that can be monitored on the monitor output and line output
connectors.
SMS
SSS: SOUND-SOUND-SOUND: In the editing interval the
monitored signal is the player audio signal or audio
input (EE) signal.
SMS: SOUND-MUTE-SOUND: In the editing interval the
audio signal is muted.
A-26
Appendix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Items Related to Prerolling (401~)
The values enclosed in a box are factory settings.
Item number
Item
Settable range
Function
401
[stop]
still
FUNCTION MODE
AFTER CUE-UP
Selects the operation mode that the VTR changes to after
completing a cue up operation.
stop: Enters stop mode.
still: Enters still-picture mode (search mode).
Note
When setting the standard constant on the editor and
control the unit, set to “stop.”
403
404
CUEUP BY TC
capstan only
[reel/capstan]
This setting is only active when item 602. is set to TC or
UBIT.
capstan only: The tape runs with the pinch ON during cue
up. (The maximum tape speed is ten times normal tape
speed.)
reel/capstan: The tape runs with the pinch OFF state during
cue up. When the tape nears the cue up point and tape
speed drops to slow, the pinch turns ON.
CUEUP BY CTL
[capstan only]
reel/capstan
This setting is only active when item 602. is set to CTL.
capstan only: The tape runs with the pinch ON state during
cue up. (The maximum tape speed is ten times normal
tape speed.)
reel/capstan: The tape runs with the pinch OFF state during
cue up. When the tape nears the cue up point and tape
speed drops to slow, the pinch turns ON.
When this unit is controlled by an editor (BVE-2000/BVE-
9100, etc), and the seting is “reel/capstan”, cue up
operations are done at high speed.
Select “capstan only” when editing precision has priority.
405
406
CUE MENU
DEFAULT MODE
select
[page mode]
Selects the default mode when the CUE menu is opened.
page mode: PAGE mode
extend mode: EXTEND mode
extend mode
CUE MENU
PREROLL
OFFSET
[0 sec]
Sets the preroll time for a cueing up operation from the
CUE menu.
.
.
.
30 sec
407
[off]
Selects the rewind mode for the end of the tape.
off: The tape transport stops at the end of the tape.
on: The tape is automatically rewound from the end of the
tape.
AUTO REWIND
on
Appendix
A-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu List
Items Related to Recording Protection (501~)
The values enclosed in a box are factory settings.
Item number
Item
Settable range
Function
STILL TIMER
0.5 sec
5 sec
Select the amount of time after which the VTR to
automatically enters tape-protect mode, for the purpose of
protecting the video head and tape.
This is the time between stopping of the tape (stop mode or
still-picture mode in search mode) and the change to tape-
protection mode.
501
10 sec
20 sec
30 sec
40 sec
50 sec
1 min
The selectable range of time is from 0.5 second to 30
minutes.
2 min
3 min
4 min
5 min
6 min
7 min
[8 min]
30 min
502
TAPE
PROTECTION
MODE SEARCH
[step fwd]
standby off
tension release
Specifies the tape-protect mode the VTR changes from still-
picture mode while searching.
The unit enters automatically the specified tape-protect
mode after the time specified in item 501 has elapsed.
step fwd: A two-second step advance is repeated in forward
direction at 1/30 times normal tape speed.
standby off: The VTR enters standby off mode (standby is
canceled).
tension release: The VTR enters tension release mode
(tape tension is released).
503
TAPE
[standby off]
tension release
Specifies the tape-protect mode the VTR changes to from
the stop mode.
The unit automatically enters the specified tape-protect
mode after the elapse of time specified by the item 501.
standby off: The VTR enters standby off mode (standby is
canceled).
PROTECTION
MODE FROM
STOP
tension release: The VTR enters tension release mode
(tape tension is released).
504
505
DRUM ROTATION [off]
IN STANDBY OFF on
Sets the drum rotation to on or off during standby-off mode.
off: Drum rotation is stopped.
on: Drum rotation continues.
STILL TENSION
[normal]
loose
Sets the tape tension control in still-picture mode.
normal: Maintains the tape tension that ensures uneffected
playback even in still-picture mode.
(This is the normal setting for VTR operations.)
loose: Sets the tape tension lower than that of the “normal”
setting after the VTR enters still-picture mode. In this
case, picture playback is not ensured. (For long
standbys (e.g., LMS) in still-picture mode, this setting is
recommended.)
A-28
Appendix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Items Related to the Time Code (601~)
The values enclosed in a box are factory settings.
Item number
Item
Settable range
Function
601
DF/NDF MODE
select
[drop frame]
non-drop frame
auto
Selects the timing mode for the time code generator and the
CTL counter.
drop frame: drop frame mode (“DF” indication)
non-drop frame: non-drop frame mode (“NDF” indication)
auto: Drop frame / non-drop frame mode is selected
automatically on the basis of the frame frequency of the
unit. For 29.97 Hz drop frame mode is selected, and for
30 Hz non-drop frame mode is selected. The setting of
the frame frequency mode is carried out with the
[MAINTENANCE]/[F9]/(OTHERS CHECK/SYSTEM)
buttons.
Note
•This setting is only active when the frame frequency of the
unit is 29.97 Hz or 30 Hz.
•When the [F7](TCG MODE) key is set to regene, the time
code generator is synchronized to the playback time code,
and therefore this setting is disabled.
602
TIMER MODE
select
CTL
[TC]
Selects the mode for displaying time data.
CTL: During playback the CTL signal recorded on the tape,
or during recording the CTL signal being recorded on the
tape, is counted, and the tape running time is displayed
in hours, minutes, seconds, and frames.
UBIT
TC: The time code value read by the time code reader, or
the time code value generated by the time code
generator is displayed. Use item 603. to toggle between
VITC and LTC.
UBIT: The user bits inserted in the playback time code, or
the user bits inserted in the being recorded are
displayed. Use item 603. to toggle between VITC and
LTC.
603
604
[LTC]
auto
VITC
TCR MODE select
Selects the time code read by the time code reader during
playback.
LTC: LTC is read.
auto: If the playback speed is from –1/2 to +1/2 normal
speed, VITC is read, and if outside this range LTC is
read.
VITC: VITC is read.
+/– 12H
[24H]
TAPE TIMER
DISPLAY
Selects whether the CTL counter operates in 12-hour
display mode or 24-hour display mode.
+/–12H: 12-hour display mode
24H: 24-hour display mode
Note
In the ±12-hour display, the tens digit of the hours value is
dropped.
[TCG]
V IN
605
VITC SOURCE
Selects the source for VITC to be written to the AUX data
area of video signals.
TCG: Write the signals generated by this unit’s internal time
code generator to the VITC.
V IN: Write the VITC of video signals input to this unit to the
VITC.
Appendix
A-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu List
Settable range
Function
Item number
Item
606
TCG MODE select [preset]
Selects the time code to which the internal time code
generator synchronizes.
preset: By an operation on the front panel or by remote
control from a device connected to the REMOTE 1-IN
(9P) connector, the initial value of the time code
generated by the internal time code generator can be
preset.
regene
auto
regene: The internal time code generator is synchronized
(“regene”) to the time code values read by the internal
time code generator.
auto: Operates in regene mode when either assemble or
insert mode is selected and operates in preset mode
when any other mode is selected.
607
TCG REGENE
SOURCE select
[int-LTC]
int-VITC
ext-LTC
ext-VITC
If item 606 is set to “regene,” this selects the source of the
synchronization of the time code generated internally.
int-LTC: When the time code played back from the time
code track on the tape is used.
int-VITC: When the time code played back from the “AUX
data” in the video signal on the tape is used.
ext-LTC: When the external time code input to the TIME
CODE IN connector is used.
ext-VITC: When the external time code input to the HD SDI
INPUT connector is used.
&
[TC UB]
608
609
TCG/UBG
REGENE MODE
Selects the regenerate signal when the time code generator
is in regenerate mode (when item 606. is set to regene) or
during auto edit mode.
TC & UB: The time code signal and user bits signal are both
regenerated.
TC: The time code signal is regenerated.
UB: The user bits signal is regenerated.
TC
UB
REC RUN/FREE
RUN select
[free run]
This selects the way in which the time code advances.
free run: Regardless of the operating mode of this unit, the
time code advances all the time that the power is on.
rec run: The time code advances only during recording.
rec run
Note
When using this setting, set item 606. to “preset”.
610
611
VITC (SD)
[off]
Selects whether or not to insert VITC data in the HD-SD
converter output.
off: VITC data is inserted.
on
on: VITC data is not inserted.
VITC POSITION-1 12 line
select (NTSC)
When an HKDV-501A (optional HD-SD Converter Board) is
installed and 29.97PsF/59.94i mode is selected on the
VTR, this setting specifies the lines in which the VITC
signal is inserted.
.
.
.
[16 line]
.
.
.
20 line
It can be inserted in any lines from 12 to 20.
Note
Items 611 and 612 allow VITC to be inserted in two lines.
612
12 line
When an HKDV-501A (optional HD-SD Converter Board) is
installed and 29.97PsF/59.94i mode is selected on the
VTR, this setting specifies the lines in which the VITC
signal is inserted.
VITC POSITION-2
select (NTSC)
.
.
.
[18 line]
.
.
.
20 line
It can be inserted in any lines from 12 to 20.
Note
Items 611 and 612 allow VITC to be inserted in two lines.
A-30
Appendix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item number
Item
Settable range
Function
613
TC OUTPUT
SIGNAL IN
REGENE MODE
[off tape]
regene
through
Specifies the signal output to the TIME CODE OUT
connector when the internal time code generator is in a
mode for regenerating the playback time code (i.e. during
auto edit mode or when item 607. is set to int-LTC or int-
VITC and item 606. is set to “regene”.)
off tape: The playback time code signal is output to the
TIME CODE OUT connector without regeneration.
regene: The playback time code signal is output to the
TIME CODE OUT connector after regeneration only
when the VTR is in playback mode.
through: The playback time code signal is output.
614
615
PHASE
CORRECTION
[off]
on
Specifies whether the phase correction control of the LTC
signal generated by the time code generator is applied or
not.
off: The phase correction control is not applied.
on: The phase correction control is applied.
TCG CF FLAG
[off]
on
auto
Specfies whether the color frame (CF) flag is set (ON) or
not set (OFF) in the blank bit of the time code data.
off: Color frame flag is set OFF.
on: Color frame flag is set ON.
auto: Color frame flag is set ON or OFF depending on the
phase relationship of the color framing between the
recorded video signal and the time code signal.
Note
When this item is set to “auto”, the color frame flag is
determined by the operating mode of the time code
generator.
• When PRESET mode (i.e., item 606 is set to preset and
the VTR is in a mode other than automatic edit mode), the
time code signal is generated with color flame-locked to
the video signal, and the color frame flag is ON.
• When REGENE mode (i.e., item 606 is set to regene or
the VTR is in automatic edit mode), color frame flag is
OFF.
616
617
620
VITC POSITION-1 9,322 line
When an HKDV-501A (optional HD-SD Converter Board) is
installed and 25PsF/50i mode is selected on the VTR, this
setting specifies the lines in which the VITC signal is
inserted.
.
.
.
select (PAL)
[19,332 line]
.
.
.
22,335 line
It can be inserted in any lines from 9,322 to 22,335.
Note
Items 616 and 617 allow VITC to be inserted in two lines.
VITC POSITION-2 9,322 line
When an HKDV-501A (optional HD-SD Converter Board) is
installed and 25PsF/50i mode is selected on the VTR, this
setting specifies the lines in which the VITC signal is
inserted.
.
.
.
[21,334 line]
select (PAL)
.
.
.
22,335 line
It can be inserted in any lines from 9,322 to 22,335.
Note
Items 616 and 617 allow VITC to be inserted in two lines.
[off]
SUPERIMPOSED
CHARACTER
Specifies whether or not to superimpose time data and
operating status information on the signal output from the
MONITOR connector of HD SDI OUTPUT, the D CONV.
OUT (OPTION) COMPOSITE (SUPER) connector and the
3 (SUPER) connector of D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION).
off: No information is superimposed.
on
on: Information is superimposed.
Appendix
A-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu List
Item number
Item
Settable range
Function
622
CHARACTER H-
POSITION
0
Sets the horizontal position of text information
.
.
.
[8]
superimposed on the signal output from the MONITOR
connector of HD SDI OUTPUT, the D CONV. OUT
(OPTION) COMPOSITE (SUPER) connector, the 3
(SUPER) connector of D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION) and
the PULL DOWN OUT connectors. A setting of 0 displays
the information at the left edge of the screen, and the
position moves to the right as the setting is increased. There
are 16 possible settings, from 0 to 15
.
.
.
15
623
CHARACTER V-
POSITION
0
Sets the vertical position of text information superimposed
on the signal output from the MONITOR connector of HD
SDI OUTPUT, the D CONV. OUT (OPTION) COMPOSITE
(SUPER) connector, the 3 (SUPER) connector of D CONV.
SDI OUT (OPTION) and the PULL DOWN OUT connectors.
A setting of 0 displays the information at the bottom of the
screen, and the position moves up as the setting is
.
.
.
[22]
.
.
.
23
increased. There are 24 possible settings, from 0 to 23.
Note
If two-line display is selected in item 626., sometimes the
second line will disappear in the middle of the screen.
624
CHARACTER
TYPE
without BG
outlined
translucent
[withBG]
Sets the style of text information such as time codes output
from the MONITOR connector of HD SDI OUTPUT, the D
CONV. OUT (OPTION) COMPOSITE (SUPER) connector,
the 3 (SUPER) connector of D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION)
and the PULL DOWN OUT connectors.
without BG: White characters, with no background.
outlined: White characters outlined in black.
translucent: White characters on a gray screen background.
with BG: White characters on a black background.
Note
For the D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION) connector and D
CONV. OUT (OPTION) COMPOSITE (SUPER)
TYconnector, the “translucent” setting is automatically
changed to “with BG”.
625
626
CHARACTER SIZE
Sets the size of text information such as time codes output
from the MONITOR of HD SDI OUTPUT connector, the D
CONV. OUT (OPTION) COMPOSITE (SUPER) connector,
3 (SUPER) of D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION) connector and
the PULL DOWN OUT connectors.
× 1
[x 2]
× 3
× 1: Normal size.
× 2: Twice normal size.
× 3: Three times normal size.
When item 620 is set to “on”, this setting specifies the
content of text information output from the MONITOR
connector of HD SDI OUTPUT, the D CONV. OUT
(OPTION) COMPOSITE (SUPER) connector, the 3
(SUPER) connector of D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION) and
the PULL DOWN OUT connectors.
DISPLAY
INFORMATION
select
time data & status
time data & UB
time data & CTL
time data & VITC
[time data only]
time data & status: Timer counter display and status
information.
time data & UB: Timer counter display and user bits.
time data & CTL: Timer counter display and CTL.
time data & VITC: Timer counter display and VITC.
time data only: Timer counter display only.
A-32
Appendix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item number
Item
Settable range
Function
627
CHAR WARNING
DISPLAY at dual
line mode
[off]
on
When item 626 is set to anything other than time data only,
this item specifies whether warning messages flash on the
second line or not.
off: Warning messages do not flash.
on: If a warning message exists, it flashes.
Notes
• Messages that have been cleared are not displayed. For
more information about clearing warning messages, see
“Clearing warning messages” on page A-12.
• When there are multiple warning messages, each
message flashes twice before it is replaced by the next
message.
REMAIN TIME
DISPLAY
[off]
10min
on
628
Sets whether to display remaining time on the tape in
superimposed charecter position.
off: Do not display remaining time.
10 min: Display remaining time when it is 10 minutes or
less.
on: Always display remaining time.
Notes
The remaining time on the tape is not displayed when no
cassette is inserted. The remaining time is not also
displayed until the VTR finishes detecting the diameter of
the wound tape and estimating the remaining time
immediately after the cassette is inserted.
630
TC CONVERSION [off]
Specifies whether or not to convert the 24 frames time code
to the 25 frames time code when off-speed playing back the
cassette tape recorded in the 24F mode with the 25F mode.
off: Does not convert the 24 frames time code to the 25
frames time code.
at 25F off-speed
on
PB
on: Converts the 24 frames time code to the 25 frames time
code.
Note
This setting is only active when the field frequency is 25 Hz.
631
632
ORIGINAL TC
display
When item 630 is set to “on,” this setting specifies whether
the 24-frame time code is displayed or not on the control
panel of the VTR before conversion.
off: The 24-frame time code is not displayed before
conversion.
on: The 24-frame time code is displayed before conversion.
The type of time code type displayed is specified by item
603.
[off]
on
JUMPING TC
select
[–3H]
–2H
–1H
+1H
+2H
+3H
0H
When the 24-frame time code is converted to 25-frame time
code, this setting specifies the loopback point (JUMPING
TC) with respect to the reference point for conversion
(STARTING TC).
–3H: The JUMPING TC is set 3 hours before STARTING
TC.
–2H: The JUMPING TC is set 2 hours before STARTING
TC.
–1H: The JUMPING TC is set 1 hour before STARTING TC.
+1H: The JUMPING TC is set 1 hour after STARTING TC.
+2H: The JUMPING TC is set 2 hours after STARTING TC.
+3H: The JUMPING TC is set 3 hours after STARTING TC.
0H: The JUMPING TC is set 1 frame before STARTING TC.
Appendix
A-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu List
Items Related to the Video Control (701~)
The values enclosed in a box are the factory settings.
Item number Item
Settable range
Function
701
VIDEO INPUT
select
[SDI]
SDTI
Selectstheinputvideosignal.
SDI: The SDI video signal input to the HD SDI INPUT
connectors.
SDTI(OnlywhentheoptionalHKDV-506ASDTIBoardis
insalled.):TheSDTIvideosignal(270Mbps)inputtothe
SDTI(OPTION)INconnector.
706
707
FORCED
[auto]
forcedYADDoff
SpecifieswhetherY-addoperationmodeisautomatically
turnedonduringDTplaybackornot.
auto:Y-addoperationmodeisautomaticallyturnedon.
forcedYADDoff:Y-addoperationmodeisoffallthetime.
SpecifieswhetherornotA-ROUNDING™ 1) performed.
simple:A-ROUNDING™isnotused.10bitinputsignals
changedto8bitsbynormalrounding(roundingdown
numbersof4orlessandroundingupnumbersof5or
more).
VERTICAL
INTERPOLATION
OFF
ROUNDING
[simple]
adaptive
adaptive:A-ROUNDING™isapplied.10bitsignalsare
roundedto8bits.
AdjuststheleveloftheHDvideosignaloutputfromtheHD
SDIOUTPUTconnectors.SimultaneouslyadjuststheY,P
708
709
MASTERLEVEL
(HD)
0.0% (0H)
.
.
.
B,
andP levels.
R
[100% ª4000Hº]
.
preset:100%
(4000H)
.
.
141.3% (5A70H)
0.0% (0H)
Y LEVEL (HD)
preset:100%
(4000H)
AdjuststheleveloftheHDvideosignaloutputfromtheHD
SDIOUTPUTconnectors. AdjuststheYlevelofthevideo
signal.
.
.
.
[100% ª4000Hº]
.
.
.
141.3% (5A70H)
..........................................................................................................................................................................................................
1) A-ROUNDING™
A method for rounding a 10 bit signal to 8 bits. This
process suppresses step noise that occurs when lines
which differ slightly from the horizontal are displayed.
A-ROUNDING is a trademark of Sony Corp.
A-34
Appendix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item number Item
Settable range
Function
710
711
712
713
P
B
LEVEL (HD)
0.0% (0H)
AdjuststheleveloftheHDvideosignaloutputfromtheHD
.
.
.
[100% ª4000Hº]
SDIOUTPUTconnectors. AdjuststheP
signal.
B
levelofthevideo
preset:100%
(4000H)
.
.
.
141.3% (5A70H)
0.0% (0H)
P
R
LEVEL (HD)
AdjuststheleveloftheHDvideosignaloutputfromtheHD
.
.
.
[100% ª4000Hº]
SDIOUTPUTconnectors. AdjuststheP
signal.
R
levelofthevideo
preset:100%
(4000H)
.
.
.
141.3% (5A70H)
SETUPLEVEL
(HD)
preset:0
–10.0
AdjuststheleveloftheHDvideosignaloutputfromtheHD
SDIOUTPUTconnectors. Adjuststhesetuplevelofthe
videosignal.
.
.
.
[0.0]
.
.
.
10.0
SYNC PHASE (HD) –128
preset:0
ControlstheHsyncphaseoftheHDvideosignaloutput
fromtheHDSDIOUTPUTconnectors,accordingtothe
menu.
.
.
.
[0]
.
.
.
127
714
720
FINE (HD)
preset:0
[0]
ControlstheHsyncphaseoftheHDvideosignaloutput
fromtheHDSDIOUTPUTconnectors,accordingtothe
menu.
.
.
.
1024
EFFECT EDIT
MODE
[off]
on
Applieseffecteditmodeforeditingspecialeffectsorfor
dubbingatapewithanattenuatedsignal-to-noiseratio.
off:Fornormaleditingordubbing.
on:Forrepeatededitingofspecialeffectsorfordubbinga
tapewithahighlyattenuatedsignal-to-noiseratio.
730
ACTIVE LINE 1035 1080÷1035(CONV)
WhentheHKDV-502HDLineConverterBoardisinstalled,
selectstheconversionmodeoftheeffectivescanningline
number.
CONVERT MODE
1080÷1035(CROP)
1080÷1035(CONV):Converttheeffectivescanningline
numberfrom1080to1035preservingtheaspectratioof
theimage.
1080÷1035(CROP):Converttheeffectivescanningline
numberfrom1080to1035. Thefoursidesoftheimage
arecropped,thenitishorizontallyexpanded.
731
ACTIVE LINE 1080 1035÷1080(CONV)
WhentheHKDV-502HDLineConverterBoardisinstalled,
selectstheconversionmodeoftheeffectivescanningline
number.
CONVERT MODE
1035÷1080(PANEL)
1035÷1080(CONV):Converttheeffectivescanningline
numberfrom1035to1080preservingtheaspectratioof
theimage.
1035÷1080(PANEL):Converttheeffectivescanningline
numberfrom1035to1080. The1035linesoftheimage
areinsertedintothe1035linesof1080lines,thenitis
horizontallycompressed.
732
SLOW PROCESS [on]
WhentheHKDV-502HDLineConverterBoardisinstalled,
selectswhetherornottoactivatethefunctiontoimprovethe
verticalresolutionduringslow-motionplayback.
on:Activatethefunctiontoimprovetheverticalresolution
duringslow-motionplayback.
MODE
off
off:Donotactivatethefunctiontoimprovethevertical
resolutionduringslow-motionplayback.
Note
ThissettinghasnoeffectwhentheVTRisoperatedinPsF
mode.
Appendix
A-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu List
Item number Item
Settable range
Function
754
755
756
757
758
759
DOWNCONVERTER [EDGE-CROP]
When an HKDV-501A (optional HD-SD Converter Board) is
installed, selects the mode
EDGE-CROP: Selects edge crop mode.
LETTER BOX: Selects letter box mode.
MODE
LETTER BOX
SQUEEZE
SQUEEZE: Selects squeeze mode.
MASTERLEVEL
(D1)
0.0% (0H)
Adjusts the level of the high D1 video signal output from D
CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION) connector. Simultaneously adjusts
the Y, B–Y, and R–Y level.
.
.
.
[100% ª4000Hº]
.
preset:100%
(4000H)
.
.
141.3% (5A70H)
0.0% (0H)
Y LEVEL (D1)
preset:100%
(4000H)
Adjusts the level of the D1 video signal output from D CONV.
SDI OUT (OPTION) connector. Simultaneously adjusts the Y
levels.
.
.
.
[100% ª4000Hº]
.
.
.
141.3% (5A70H)
0.0% (0H)
B–Y LEVEL (D1)
preset:100%
(4000H)
Adjusts the level of the D1 video signal output from D CONV.
SDI OUT (OPTION) connector. Adjusts the B–Y level of the
video signal.
.
.
.
[100% ª4000Hº]
.
.
.
141.3% (5A70H)
0.0% (0H)
R–Y LEVEL (D1)
preset:100%
(4000H)
Adjusts the level of the D1 video signal output from D CONV.
SDI OUT (OPTION) connector. Adjusts the R–Y level of the
video signal.
.
.
.
[100% ª4000Hº]
.
.
.
141.3% (5A70H)
0.0% (0H)
VIDEO OUTPUT
LEVEL (D2)
preset:100%
(4000H)
Adjusts the video level of the D2 video signal output from D
CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION) connector and analog composite
video signal output from D CONV. OUT (OPTION) COMPOSITE
(SUPER) connector.
.
.
.
[100% ª4000Hº]
.
.
.
141.3% (5A70H)
A-36
Appendix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item number Item
Settable range
Function
760
CHROMALEVEL
(D2)
preset:100%
(4000H)
0.0% (0H)
Adjusts the chroma level of the D2 video signal output from
D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION) connector and analog
composite video signal output from D CONV. OUT
(OPTION) COMPOSITE (SUPER) connector.
.
.
.
[100% ª4000Hº]
.
.
.
141.3% (5A70H)
761
762
763
HUE (D2)
preset:0
–30
Adjusts the hue of the D2 video signal output from D CONV.
SDI OUT (OPTION) connector and analog composite video
signal output from D CONV. OUT (OPTION) COMPOSITE
(SUPER) connector.
.
.
.
[0]
.
.
.
30
SETUPLEVEL
(D2)
preset:7.5IRE
0.0
Adjusts the setup level of the D2 video signal output from D
CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION) connector and analog
composite video signal output from D CONV. OUT
(OPTION) COMPOSITE (SUPER) connector.
.
.
.
[7.5]
.
.
.
10.0
SYNC PHASE (SD)
preset:0
–128
Adjusts the sync phase of the D1/D2 video signal output
from D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION) connectors and analog
composite video signal output from D CONV. OUT
(OPTION) COMPOSITE (SUPER) connector.
.
.
.
[0]
.
.
.
127
764
765
FINE (SD)
preset:0
[0]
Makes fine adjustments to the sync phase of the D1/D2
video signal output from D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION)
connectors and analog composite video signal output from
D CONV. OUT (OPTION) COMPOSITE (SUPER)
connector.
.
.
.
1024
CROSS COLOR
preset:8
0
WhenanHKDV-501A(optionalHD-SDConverterBoard)is
installed,adjuststheimageenhancer.
.
.
.
[8]
.
.
.
15
766
767
H CROP POSITION
preset:0
–120
WhenanHKDV-501A(optionalHD-SDConverterBoard)is
installed,ad juststheimageenhancer. Adjust sthe“Hcr op”
(croppingpositioninthehorizontaldirectionwhenusing
edgecropmode).
.
.
.
[0]
.
.
.
120
DETAILGAIN
preset:32
0
WhenanHKDV-501A(optionalHD-SDConverterBoard)is
installed,ad juststheimageenhance r.Adjuststhedegreeof
edgeenhancement.
.
.
.
[32]
.
.
.
127
768
769
LIMITER
preset:32
0
WhenanHKDV-501A(optionalHD-SDConverterBoard)is
installed,ad juststheimageenhancer .Adjust sthemaxi mum
levelofthe detailaddedtoenhancetheoriginalsignal.
.
.
.
[32]
.
.
.
63
WhenanHKDV-501A(optionalHD-SDConverterBoard)is
installed,ad juststheimageenhancer.Setstheamplitude
fornotenhancingsmall-amplitudesignals.
CRISP THRESHOLD
preset:0
[0]
.
.
.
15
Appendix
A-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu List
Item number Item
Settable range
Function
770
LEVELDEPEND
THRESHOLD
preset:8
0
WhenanHKDV-501A(optionalHD-SDConverterBoard)is
installed,adjuststheimageenhancer.Setstheluminance
rangeforedgeenhancement.
.
.
.
[8]
.
.
.
15
771
772
H DETAIL
FREQUENCYselect
2.6 MHz
3.4 MHz
[3.9 MHz]
4.6 MHz
WhenanHKDV-501A(optionalHD-SDConverterBoard)is
installed,adjuststheimageenhancer.Setsthecenter
frequencyforedgeenhancement.
H/V RATIO
preset:3
0
WhenanHKDV-501A(optionalHD-SDDownconverter
Board)isinstalled,adjuststheimageenhancer.Setsthe
horizontaltoverticalratioforedgeenhancement.
.
.
.
[3]
.
.
.
7
773
775
GAMMALEVEL
preset:0
–128
WhenanHKDV-501A(optionalHD-SDConverterBoard)is
installed,adjuststheimageenhancer.Adjuststhegradient
ofthecorrectioncurve.
.
.
.
[0]
.
.
.
128
VIDEO OUTPUT DATA 8bit
[10bit]
Setsthebitsizeoftheoutputdatafromvideoprocessing
(bitreductionprocessing).
8bit:Whenconnectedtoan8-bitsystem
10bit:Whenconnectedtoa10-bitsystem
Notes
• Makesurethebitlengthmatchesthedestinationdevice.
• ThissettingisonlyactivewhentheHD-SDconverter
outputissettoD1.
776
DOWNCONVERTER
INPUT CHECK ENABLE
[disable]
SelectstheHD-SDconvertermodewhentheINPUT
CHECKbuttononthecontrolpanelispressed.
disable:TheINPUTCHECKbuttonisnotlinkedto
downconverteroutput.
enable
enable:TheINPUTCHECKbuttonislinkedto
downconverteroutput.WhentheINPUTCHECKbutton
ispressed,theinputsignalselectedbythesettingin
item701isoutputtotheHD-SDconverteroutput
connector.
Note
TheINPUTCHECKbuttonworksforalloftheHD-SD
converteroutputconnectors.
777
778
V-FILTER SELECT
[1]
2
3
Selectscoefficientoftheverticalinterpolationfilterforthe
HD-SDconverteroutput. Thehigherthefigureis,the
highertheverticalresolutionis.
LETTER BOX MODE
[16:9]
14:9
13:9
Whenitem754issetto“LETTERBOX,”thissetting
specifiestheaspectratiooftheHD-SDconverteroutput.
16:9:TheaspectratiooftheHD-SDconverteroutputis
16:9.
14:9:TheaspectratiooftheHD-SDconverteroutputis
14:9.
13:9:TheaspectratiooftheHD-SDconverteroutputis
13:9.
A-38
Appendix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Items Related to the Audio Control (801~)
The values enclosed in a box are the factory settings.
Item number Item
Settable range
Function
801
802
803
AUDIO INPUT
select
ALL-CHANNELS
analg
[SDI]
Selectsthetypeandchannelsoftheaudioinputsignals.
analg:AudiosignalsinputtotheANALOGAUDIOINPUT
connectors.
SDI:AudiosignalsinputtotheHDSDIINPUTconnectors.
AES/EBU:AudiosignalsinputtotheAUDIOINPUT(AES/
EBU)connectors.
[SDTI](OnlywhentheoptionalHKDV-506ASDTIBoardis
installed.):If“SDTI” isselectedinitem701.,theSDTI
audiosignalinputtotheSDTI(OPTION)INconnectoris
automaticallyselectedandAUDIOINPUT/MONITOR
SELECTbuttonsontheuppercontrolpanelbecome
unlitandanotherinputselectioncannotbemade.
AES/EBU
[SDTI]
AUDIO INPUT
select
CH-1
analg
[SDI]
AES/EBU
[SDTI]
AUDIO INPUT
select
CH-2
analg
[SDI]
AES/EBU
[SDTI]
analg
[SDI]
804
805
AUDIO INPUT
select
CH-3
AES/EBU
[SDTI]
AUDIO INPUT
select
analg
[SDI]
CH-4
AES/EBU
[SDTI]
806
807
808
809
AUDIO EMPHASIS [off]
Selectstheemphasismodewhenrecordingdigitalaudio
signalsconvertedfromanaloginputaudiosignals.
off:Emphasisisnotappliedtoanyoftheaudiosignals.
on:Emphasisisappliedtoalloftheaudiosignals.
on
AUDIO MONITOR- [ch1]
SelectstheaudiochanneloutputfromtheAUDIO
MONITOROUTPUTLconnector.
Lselect
ch2
.
.
.
ch1,ch2,ch3,ch4,cue
AUDIO MONITOR- ch1
SelectstheaudiochanneloutputfromtheAUDIO
MONITOROUTPUTRconnector.
Rselect
[ch2]
.
.
.
ch1,ch2,ch3,ch4,cue
DIGITALJOG
SOUND
off
[on]
Switchesdigitaljogsoundonandoff.
off: Digitaljogsoundisswitchedoff.
Inthiscase,thesoundforchannelsforwhichspeed
correctionprocessingisnotbeingcarriedoutisoutput,
eveninthecaseof“STILL.”
on: Digitaljogsoundisswitchedon.
811
DIGITALAUDIO
FADE TIME
5ms
[10 ms]
Specifiesthefadeprocessingtimeduringcross-fadingor
fading-in/outofdigitalaudiosignals.
15ms
20ms
Note
25msa)
50msb)
85ms
Processingforcrossfading,fading-in,andfading-outstarts
afteranINorOUTpoint. Thisitemspecifiesrewriting
duringrecordingfollowingtheOUTpoint. Rewritingofone
fieldoccursevenwhentheminimumsetting(5ms)is
selected. When“cutedit”isselectedinitem317toprevent
thisfromhappening,adiscontinuityintheaudiosignal
occurs.Thereis,however,noeffectontherecordingofthe
videosignal.
115 msc)
a)Thecrossfadetimeis24ms.
b)Theactualfadetimeis49ms.
c)Theactualfadetimeis114ms.
Appendix
A-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu List
Item number Item
Settable range
Function
812
AUDIO CH3/4
INPUT SOURCE
ARRANGE
[CH3/CH4 : sw/sw]
CH3/CH4:ch1/sw
CH3/CH4:sw/ch2
CH3/CH4:ch1/ch2
Selecttheinputsignalfordigitalaudiochannels3and4.
CH3/CH4: sw/sw:Thesignalthatisselectedbytheupper
controlpanelisinputtochannels3and4.
CH3/CH4:ch1/sw:Thesignaltoberecordedinchannel1is
alsorecordedinchannel3.
CH3/CH4:sw/ch2:Thesignaltoberecordedinchannel2is
alsorecordedinchannel4.
CH3/CH4:ch1/ch2:Thesignaltoberecordedinchannel1
isrecordedinchannel3whilethesignaltoberecorded
inchannel2isrecordedinchannel4.
Note
Theeditpresetforchannels3and4iscompletely
independent.Evenifthisitemissetto“CH3/CH4 : sw/sw”
andinserteditingisperformedwitheditpresetforchannel1
only,nosignalisrecordedinchannel3.
Therecordinglevelisdetermined,notbythesettingsfor
channels3and4,butbythelevelcontroloftheinput
channelsusedasthesourcewhenthissettingisCH3/
CH4:ch1/sw,CH3/CH4:sw/ch2,orCH3/CH4:ch1/ch2.
ThelevelcontrolforLINE/MONITORoutputisindependent
ofE-E,CONFI,andPBmodesevenwhenthissettingis
CH3/CH4:ch1/sw,CH3/CH4:sw/ch2,orCH3/CH4:ch1/ch2.
813
814
815
AUDIO MONITOR add
Specifiesthetypeofaudiomixingtobeconductedonthe
digitalaudiosignaloutputtotheMONITOROUTPUT
connector.
add:Simpleaddition
rms:Multipliedaverage
OUTPUT MIXING
[rms]
average
average:Simpleaverage
Note
WhentheCUEchannelsignalisoutputtothemonitor,
signalsaremixedbysimpleaddition.
LEVEL METER
SCALE
[peak 0 dB]
reference0dB
Specifiesthemodeinwhichthedigitalaudiolevelis
displayed.
peak 0 dB:Displaysminusaudiolevelswiththemaximum
levelset at 0dB.
reference0dB:Displaysplusandminusaudiolevelswith
thereferencelevelsetat0dB.
Note
Thecuechannellevelisalwaysdisplayedwiththereference
levelset at 0dB.
AUDIO OUTPUT
PHASE
0
Setstheoutputtimingforthedigitalaudioplaybacksignal
(SDIandAES/EBUonly). The128settingspecifiesthe
referenceposition.
Asettinglowerthan128advancestheoutputtiming,anda
settinghigherthan128delaystheoutputtiming.
(128samples,orapprox.2.7ms,with1sample=approx.
20µs)
.
.
.
preset:128
[128]
.
.
.
255
817
819
AUDIOLEVEL
METER DIMMER
CONTROL
[0]
Specifiesthebrightnessoftheaudiolevelmeter.
0isthebrightestlevel.
7isthedarkestlevel.
.
.
.
7
NON AUDIO
MODEselect
[BURST DATA MODE]
Specifiestheformatinwhichnon-audiodataisrecorded.
CONTINUOUS DATA MODE BURSTDATAMODE:Selectthissettingforrecordingdata
compressedinunitsofvideoframes(e.g.,DolbyE).
CONTINUOUSDATAMODE:Selectthissettingfor
recordingdatacompressedwithoutanyrelationshipto
thevideoframes(e.g.,DolbyDigital(AC-3)).
A-40
Appendix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item number Item
820 NON AUDIO
Channelselect
Settable range
Function
[off]
Selectstheaudiosignalandthechannelstoberecordedas
non-audiodata.
off: Non-audiosignalsarenotrecorded.
SDI CH12 (MODE1)
SDI CH34 (MODE2)
SDI all (MODE3)
AES CH12 (MODE4)
AES CH34 (MODE5)
AES all (MODE6)
SDI CH12/AES CH34
(MODE7)
SDI CH12 (MODE1): Channels 1 and 2 of the signal input
fromtheHD/SDIINPUTconnectorarerecorded.
SDI CH34 (MODE2): Channels 3 and 4 of the signal input
fromtheHD/SDIINPUTconnectorarerecorded.
SDIall(MODE3): Channels1to4ofthesignalinputfrom
theHD/SDIINPUTconnectorarerecorded.
AESCH12(MODE4): Channels1and2ofthesignalinput
fromtheAUDIOINPUT(AES/EBU)connectorare
recorded.
SDI CH34/AES CH12
(MODE8)
AESCH34(MODE5): Channels3and4ofthesignalinput
fromtheAUDIOINPUT(AES/EBU)connectorare
recorded.
AESall(MODE6): Channels1to4ofthesignalinputfrom
theAUDIOINPUT(AES/EBU)connectorsarerecorded.
SDI CH12/AES CH34 (MODE7): Channels 1 and 2 of the
signalinputfromtheHD/SDIINPUTconnectorandthe
channels3and4ofthesignalinputfromtheAUDIO
INPUT(AES/EBU)connectorarerecorded.
SDI CH34/AES CH12 (MODE8): Channels 3 and 4 of the
signalinputfromtheHD/SDIINPUTconnectorandthe
channels1and2ofthesignalinputfromtheAUDIO
INPUT(AES/EBU)connectorarerecorded.
821
Specifieswhetherornotthephaseoftheaudiooutputsignal
isshifted1frameaheadofthevideooutputsignal.
off: Thephaseoftheaudiooutputsignalisnotshifted.
on: Thephaseoftheaudiooutputsignalisshifted1frame
aheadofthevideooutputsignal.Notethatthephaseis
shiftedforallaudiochannels.
AUDIOADVANCE [off]
MODE
on
Note
Wheneditpresetissetto“ON”,HDW-F500operates
internallywith“off”setting.
Appendix
A-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu List
Items Related to Digital Processing (901~)
The values enclosed in a box are the factory settings.
Item number Item
902 FREEZE MODE
Settable range
Function
[field]
field1
field2
frame1+2
frame2+1
Specifiesthefreeze(still-picture)modeandfreezetiming
duringmanualfreezing(byREMOTE1(9P)orREMOTE2
(50P)connectoronthecontrolpanel)orautomaticfreezing.
field:Freezestheoddorevenfield,dependingonthetiming
infreezemode.
field1:Freezesthefirst(odd)field
field2:Freezesthesecond(even)field
frame1+2:Freezesthefirstandthesubsequentsecondfield
frame2+1:Freezesthesecondfieldandthesubsequentfirst
field
Inthecaseoffreezinginplaybackmodesotherthannormal
playback,thepictureisfrozeninframemodeonlywhen
dynamictrackingisperformingaframeoperation.The
pictureisfrozedinfieldmodewhendynamictrackingisnot
operating.
Thefrozedpicturedoesnotchangeevenifyouchangethis
settingduringfreezemode.Thechangetothissetting
becomeseffectivethenexttimetheVTRoutputsastill
picture.
Whenthestopfreezefunctionisenabled,regardlessofthe
settingofthisitem,thepictureisfrozeninframemodeonly
whendynamictrackingisperformingaframeoperation,oris
frozedinfieldmodewhendynamictrackingisperforminga
fieldoperationorwhenitisnotoperating.
903
FREEZE
CONTROL FROM latch
KEYPANEL
[momentary]
Determinesthefreezeoperationcontrolbybutton
operations.
momentary :Thepictureisfrozenonlywhilethebuttonis
helddown
latch :Thepictureisfrozenwhenthebuttonispressed,and
remainsfrozenwhenthebuttonisreleased.
Thefozenpictureiscancelledwhenthebuttonis
pressedagain.
Buttonoperations
•Freezinginoddoreven(firstorsecond)fieldisspecified
byitem902. Distinctionbetweenthefirstorsecondfield,
followsthedistinctioninthereferencesignal.
A-42
Appendix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item number Item
905 STOP FREEZE
CONTROL
Settable range
Function
disable
[enable]
Enableordisablesthestopfreezefunction.
Stop freeze opration
MODE(After)
STDBY OFF
DTpicture
TENSION OFF
STOP
MODE(Before)
STILL
DTpicture
DTpicture
(dynamictrackingon)
CAPSTANdrive
(includesshuttlingupto ×10
normaltapespeed)
non-DTpicture
non-DTpicture
non-DTpicture
non-DTpicture
Reeldrive
(includesshuttlingover ×10
normaltapespeed)
non-DTpicture
non-DTpicture
• A “DT picture” is a frozen picture in noiseless DT playback mode. The picture freezes in frame mode when the dynamic
tracking is performing a frame operation. It freezes in field mode when dynamic tracking is not performing a frame
operation.
• A “non-DT picture” is a frozen picture in shuttle mode. A block pattern may appear in a non-DT picture, depending on the
circumstances.
Appendix
A-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu List
Items Related to the Pull Down Control (A01~)
The values enclosed in a box are the factory settings.
Item number Item
Settable range
Function
A01
A02
A03
PD TIME CODE
DISPLAY
[off]
Setswhetherornottodisplaythepulldowntimecodeon
thetimecodedisplayarea.
off:Doesnotdisplaythepulldowntimecode.
on:Displaysthepulldowntimecode.
on
PD PRESET
FRAME MODE
[24 FRAME MODE]
30 FRAME MODE
Selectsthetimecodetobepreset. TheAframeofthe
pulldownsequencecanbepreset.
24FRAMEMODE:The24framestimecodeispreset.
30FRAMEMODE:The30framestimecodeispreset.
PD
[off]
Specifieswhetherornottosuperimposetimedataand
operatingstatusinformationonthesignaloutputfromthe
PULLDOWNOUTconnector.
SUPERIMPOSED
CHARACTER
on
off:Noinformationissuperimposed.
on:Informationissuperimposed.
[drop frame]
non-dropframe
auto
Selectstherunningmodeforthepulldowntimecodetobe
preset.
dropframe:Dropframemode
PD DF/NDF
SELECT
A04
non-dropframe:Non-dropframemode
auto:Theunitswitchestherunningmode(DF/NDF)
automaticallyaccordingtotheframefrequencyofthe
unit. Whentheframefrequencyis23.976Hz,theunit
switchestothedropframemodeandswitchestothe
non-dropframemodewhenitis24Hz.
A05
[off]
lock1
lock2
PD EXT SD REF
LOCK MODE
WhenanHKDV-507D(optionalHDPullDownBoard)is
installedandtheoperatingfrequencyissetto23.976PsF,
specifieswhetherornotthepulldownoutputsignaland
down-convertedoutputsignalaresynchronizedwith
externalSD(EXT-SD)referencesignal. Tooutputthepull
downsignal,anHKDV-507D(optionalHDPullDownBoard)
mustbeinstalled. Tooutputthedown-convertedsignal,an
HKDV-501A(optionalHD-SDConverterBoard)mustbe
installed.
off:Thepulldownoutputsignalanddown-convertedoutput
signalarenotsynchronizedwithexternalSD(EXT-SD)
referencesignal.
lock1:Thepulldownoutputsignalanddown-converted
outputsignalaresynchronizedwithexternalSD(EXT-
SD)referencesignal.
lock2:Thepulldownoutputsignalanddown-converted
outputsignalaresynchronizedwithexternalSD(EXT-
SD)referencesignal. WhenthePB/EEmodeis
selected,theamountofdelayontheAframeofthepull
downoutputsignalfortheAframeofthemainvideo
signalisfixedto2frames(59.94i).
Note
•AwarningmessageappearswhentheHDreference
signalandexternalSD(EX-SD)referencesignalarenot
inputortheHDreferencesignalandexternalSDreference
signalarenotsynchronized.
•“lock1”and“lock2”areeffectiveonlywhentheoperation
modeofthisunitissetto23.98PsF.
A-44
Appendix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Item number Item
Settable range
Function
A06
PD
[off]
Whenitem620andA03issetto“on,”specifieswhetheror
nottheID(24F/30F)isdisplayedtotherightof
superimposedtimecode.
SUPERIMPOSED
TIME CODE ID
on
off: NoIDisdisplayed.
on: ID(“24F”or“30F”)isdisplayed.
Note
Thesettingofthisitemiseffectiveonlywhentheoperation
modeofthisunitissetto23.98PsFor24PsF.
[off]
A07
PD CHARACTER
24F TIME CODE
MODE
Whenitem620andA03issetto“on,”specifieswhetheror
notthe2-3pulldown24-frametimedataisinsertedtothe
firstlineinsteadof30-frametimedata.
on
off: 30-frametimedataisdisplayed.
on: 24-frametimedataisdisplayed.
Note
Thesettingofthisitemiseffectiveonlywhentheoperation
modeofthisunitissetto23.98PsFor24PsF.
[24F]
30F
WhenanHKDV-507D(optionalHDPullDownBoard)is
installedandtheoperatingfrequencyissetto23.976PsF,
specifieswhetherornotthe30-frame/sectimecode
informationofpulldownoutputsignalanddown-converted
outputsignalisreturnedwhentimecodesensecommand
isinputthroughthe9-pinconnector.
A10
TCsensedata
select
24F: 24-frame/sectimecodeinformationofmainoutput
signalisreturned.
30F: 30-frame/sectimecodeinformationofpulldown
outputsignalanddown-convertedoutputsignalis
returned.
Notes
•Pulldownoutputsignaland30-frame/sectimecodeare
synchronizedonlywhenthisunitissettoPLAYLOCK
mode. Tosynchronizethesignals,setitemA05.PDEXT
SDREFLOCKMODEto“lock2.”
•Machine-to-machineeditingusingthepulldownoutput
signalwithaVTRoperatingin30Fmodemaynotfunction
properlyiftheVTRin30Fmodeisengagedinplayersync.
Appendix
A-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu List
Other Items (T01~)
The values enclosed in a box are the factory settings.
Item number Item
Settable range
Function
T01
AUTO REPEAT
MODE
[off]
Selectstherepeatingoperationinautomaticediting.
off:Automaticeditingisnotrepeated.
on:Automaticeditingisrepeated.Tostop,presstheSTOP
button.
on
T02
INTERNAL VIDEO [off]
Selectsthetestsignaloutputbythesignalgeneratorbuilt
intotheVTR.
off:Thetestsignalisnotgenerated,andtheVTRoperates
normally.
allothersettings:ThetestsignalisoutputfromtheVTR.At
thistimeitisalsopossibletorecordthesignal.
SIGNAL
GENERATOR (HD)
COLORBARS
MULTIBURST
10 STEPS
PULSE & BAR
[RAMP]
BLACK
T03
INTERNAL VIDEO 1035
Selectstheeffectivescanninglinenumberofthetestsignal
outputbythesignalgeneratorbuiltintotheVTR.
1035:Setstheeffectivescanninglinenumberto1035.
1080:Setstheeffectivescanninglinenumberto1080.
SIGNALLINE
SELECT
[1080]
Note
Thissettingisonlyactivewhentheframefrequencyofthe
unit is 29.97 Hz or 30 Hz.
T04
INTERNALAUDIO [off]
Selectstheoperationofaudiotestsignaloutput.
off:Theaudiotestsignalisnotoutput.
silence:Mutesignal.
SIGNAL
GENERATOR
silence
1kHzsine
1 kHz sine: 1 kHz (In this case, a 1 kHz -20 dB FS sine
waveissuppliedtoallaudioinputs.)
Note
• When“silence”or“1kHzsine”isselected,theAUDIO
INPUT/MONITORSELECTbuttonslightup.
• When the unit is operated i n the 23.98 PsF or 24 PsF
modewith“1kHzsine”selected,theoutputsignalis960
Hz.
Note
Items T01, T02, and T04 are reset whenever the power is turned off. Item T03 is maintained even when the power
is turned off.
A-46
Appendix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
A
C
D
AC IN connector 2-15
ACCESS button 2-6
Capstan override playback 5-14
Cassettes
D CONV. OUT (OPTION) SYNC
connector 2-15
Adjusting
handling cassettes 3-8
inserting and ejecting cassettes 3-8
preventing accidental erasure 3-9
recommended cassettes 3-8
Changing
D CONV. OUT (OPTION) COMPOSITE
(SUPER) connector 2-15
D CONV. SDI OUT (OPTION)
connectors 2-16
Deleting edit points 6-10
DISPLAY FULL/FINE button 2-2
Displaying the duration 6-8
DMC editing
overview 6-15
performing 6-15
setting edit points and playback speed
6-15
DMC playback
audio playback level 5-6
output video signal 4-58
recording level 5-3
ALARM indicator 2-6
ALT button 2-6
Assemble editing 4-17, 6-3
AUDIO IN/OUT buttons 2-8
AUDIO INPUT connectors 2-16
AUDIO INPUT (AES/EBU)
connectors 2-15
AUDIO INPUT LEVEL/600Ω termination
switches 2-16
AUDIO INPUT/MONITOR SELECT
buttons 2-4
Audio level meters 2-3
AUDIO OUTPUT connectors 2-16
AUDIO OUTPUT (AES/EBU)
connectors 2-15
AUTO button 2-8
Automatic edit modes 6-1
Automatic editing
Animation editing 6-17
Backspace editing 4-40
confirming edit points 6-8
cuing up and prerolling 6-8
DMC editing 6-15
modifying edit points 6-10, 6-13
non-audio data 6-7
overview of automatic editing 6-1
performing editing 6-12, 6-14
preread editing 6-18
previewing 6-9
selecting the edit mode 6-3
setting edit points 6-3
menu settings 4-2
preroll time 6-9
Confirming edit points 6-8
Connecting external equipment
Cascade connection 3-4
making HD analog connections 3-2
making digital connections 3-1
making NTSC/PAL Digital Connections
3-3
Connector panel 2-14
Control panel
lower control panel
(editing operations section) 2-7
lower control panel
(menu operations section) 2-5
lower control panel
(search operations section) 2-11
lower control panel
(tape transport section) 2-9
upper control panel 2-2
CONTROL PANEL connector 2-16
CONTROL PANEL switch 2-13
Conversion
selecting conversion mode 5-7, 5-8
time code in 24F mode 4-34
time code in 25F mode 4-29
(HD-SD) conversion mode
Edge crop 5-7
Letter box mode 5-7
Squeeze mode 5-7
Cross-fade editing A-25
CTL timer 4-24
CUE menu 4-35
Cue point
overview 5-14
performing 5-15
DF (Drop frame) mode 4-25, 4-26
E
Editing See Automatic editing
Edit point
confirming 6-8
deleting 6-10
modifying 6-10
moving a position by one frame at a
time 6-11
setting 6-3
recalling 4-19
Editing precautions 6-1
Effective scanning line number 5-8
EJECT button 2-9
Ejecting the cassette 3-8
EMPHASIS 4-60
ENTRY button 2-8
Error Messages A-8
Error Log Menu A-11
Clearing warning messages A-12
Adjusting the clock A-12
EXTEND mode 4-36
setting switches and menus 6-2
steps in automatic editing 6-1
B
changing into an edit point 4-40
erasing 4-38
prerolling 4-39
Backspace editing 4-40
BREAKER button 2-15
F, G
Fade IN/OUT A-26
Function buttons 2-6
registrating 4-36
Cut editing A-26
H
HD SDI INPUT connectors 2-15
HD SDI OUTPUT connectors 2-15
Head cleaning A-1
HOME menu 4-14
Index
I-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
I
O
R
IN/OUT buttons 2-8
Indicator window 2-3
INPUT CHECK button 2-8
INPUT SELECT button 2-4
Improving vertical resolution 5-9
Insert editing 4-17, 6-3
Inserting VITC 4-26
Operation information A-6
Outputting still-pictures 4-17
Overview
REC/EDIT button 2-10
REC INHIBIT indicator 2-10
REC level controls 2-3
Recording 5-5
automatic editing 6-1
DMC editing 6-15
DMC playback 5-13
inhibit mode 4-16
REF SYNC indicators 2-4
Reference signals connections 3-6
Reference signals for video output and
servo system 3-5
REF. IN SD connectors (BNC) and 75 Ω
termination switch 2-15
REF. IN HD connectors (BNC) and 75 Ω
termination switch 2-15
REF. OUT 1125 SYNC connectors 2-15
REMOTE buttons 2-4
P, Q
J, K, L
JOG button 2-11
Jog mode playback 5-12
PARALLEL I/O(50P) connector 2-16
Pausing the current time 4-24
PB audio output level controls 2-3
PF1 menu 4-55
PF2 menu 4-59
PHONES jack 2-2
PHONES level control 2-3
PLAY button 2-10
Playback 5-11
capstan override playback 5-14
DMC playback 5-14
jog mode playback 5-12
non-audio data 5-16
normal-speed playback 5-11
shuttle mode playback 5-12
variable mode playback 5-13
PLAYER/RECORDER buttons 2-8
POWER switch 2-2
Preparing for playback 5-6
adjusting the audio playback level 5-6
improving the vertical resolution 5-9
selecting the HD-SD conversion mode 5-7
Selecting the conversion mode of the
effective scanning line number 5-8
setting switches and menus 5-6
Preparing for recording 5-1
adjusting the audio recording level 5-3
monitoring simultaneous playback of
recording analog audio 5-4
selecting audio signals 5-2
setting switches and menus 5-1
PREREAD indicator 2-8
Preread editing 4-17
M
MAINTENANCE A-1
MAINTENANCE switch 2-6
Manual editing 6-19
Memory card
REMOTE1-IN/OUT connectors 2-16
RS-232C connector 2-16
RS-232C indicator 2-4
adding titles 4-11
data compatibility 4-13
formatting 4-6
insertion slot 2-6
recalling 4-9
S
SDTI (OPTION) IN connector 2-15
SDTI (OPTION) OUT connector 2-15
Search dial 2-12
recalling cue point list 4-10
storing 4-7
Selecting
audio input signals 5-2
audio signals to be monitored 5-2
capstan servo lock mode 4-18
CTL display 4-21
CTL display mode 4-26
conversion mode of the effective
scanning line number 5-8
drop frame mode 4-25
edit mode 4-17
HD-SD conversion mode 5-7
input video signal 4-56
monitor output signal 4-60
multi-cue mode 4-36
non-audio data as the audio input signal 5-3
output signals 4-16
output signals for the TIME CODE
OUT terminal 4-17
reference signal 4-56
remote operation mode 4-62
time code and user bits to be recorded 4-22
SERVO indicator 2-10
SET button 2-8
storing cue point lists 4-8
MEMORY CARD indicator 2-6
Memory label 1-2, 4-41, A-5
Menu
configuration 4-1
changing settings 4-2
CUE menu 4-35
HOME menu 4-14
list A-15
PANEL SETUP menu 4-65
PF1 menu 4-55
PF2 menu 4-59
registering items to the PF1/2 menus 4-3
MLB-1B-100 1-2, 4-41, A-5
Moisture condensation A-1
MONITOR OUTPUT connectors 2-16
MONITOR SELECT button 2-3
Monitoring video and audio signals being
recorded 5-4
PREROLL button 2-10
Preroll time setting 4-18
PREVIEW/REVIEW button 2-10
Pull down output 5-16
Pull down time code
Displaying 4-29
N
NDF (Non-drop frame) mode 4-25, 4-26
Non-audio data
SET UP menu 4-59
SFT button 2-8
Presetting 4-26
editing 6-7
playing back 5-16
SHUTTLE button 2-11
Shuttle mode playback 5-12
Slow-motion playback
improving vertical resolution 5-9
Split editing 6-5
selecting as the audio input signal 5-3
Normal-speed playback 5-11
STANDBY button 2-9
STOP button 2-10
Super imposition of character information 4-28
System set-up panel 2-13
I-2
Index
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
T
TC menu 4-20
Tele-File 1-2, 4-41
TELE FILE menu 4-41
Time code
conversion in the 24F mode 4-34
conversion in the 25F mode 4-29
presetting for conversion from 24-frame
to 25-frame time code 4-27
presetting for conversion from 25-frame
to 24-frame time code 4-33
running mode 4-25
Time code generator (TCG) 4-25
setting 4-25
TIME CODE IN connector 2-17
TIME CODE OUT connector 2-17
Time code reader (TCR) 4-24
Time data
resetting 4-24
selecting the time data display 4-21
setting 4-21
U
Upper control panel 2-2
User bits setting 4-24
V
VAR button 2-11
Variable mode playback 5-13
Vertical resolution 5-9
VIDEO CONTROL connector 2-16
VITC insertion line setting 4-32
VTR memory banks 4-4
adding titles 4-11
recalling 4-5
storing 4-4
VTR SETUP menu
items related to digital processing A-42
items related to editing A-24
items related to operation panels A-20
items related to prerolling A-27
items related to recording protection A-28
items related to remote interface A-23
items related to the audio control A-39
items related to the hours meter A-15
items related to the pull down control A-44
items related to the time code A-29
items related to the video control A-34
items related to VTR operations A-16
other items A-46
W, X, Y, Z
Warning messages A-10
Index
I-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The material contained in this manual consists of
information that is the property of Sony Corporation and is
intended solely for use by the purchasers of the equipment
described in this manual.
Sony Corporation expressly prohibits the duplication of any
portion of this manual or the use thereof for any purpose
other than the operation or maintenance of the equipment
described in this manual without the express written
permission of Sony Corporation.
Le matériel contenu dans ce manuel consiste en
informations qui sont la propriété de Sony Corporation et
sont destinées exclusivement à l’usage des acquéreurs de
l’équipement décrit dans ce manuel.
Sony Corporation interdit formellement la copie de quelque
partie que ce soit de ce manuel ou son emploi pour tout
autre but que des opérations ou entretiens de l’équipement
à moins d’une permission écrite de Sony Corporation.
Das in dieser Anleitung enthaltene Material besteht aus
Informationen, die Eigentum der Sony Corporation sind,
und ausschließlich zum Gebrauch durch den Käufer der in
dieser Anleitung beschriebenen Ausrüstung bestimmt sind.
Die Sony Corporation untersagt ausdrücklich die
Vervielfältigung jeglicher Teile dieser Anleitung oder den
Gebrauch derselben für irgendeinen anderen Zweck als die
Bedienung oder Wartung der in dieser Anleitung
beschriebenen Ausrüstung ohne ausdrückliche schriftliche
Erlaubnis der Sony Corporation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sony Corporation
Printed in Japan
2001.09.13
1999
Broadband Solutions Network Company
HDW-F500 (SYL,
)
3-203-128-04(1)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|